HumveeTM PDF

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
AIR FORCE TO 36A12-1A-3061-1

MARINE CORPS TM 11033-OR
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL iii
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR INTRODUCTION 1-1
TRUCK, UTILITY: S250 SHELTER CARRIER,

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 2-1
4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 3-1
TRUCK, UTILITY: UP-ARMORED
CARRIER, 4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C); REFERENCES A-1
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED
CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER, M1151 COMPONENTS OF END
(2320-01-518-7330) (EIC: BA5); ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE B-1
ITEMS (BII) LISTS
CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER,
IAP/ARMOR READY, M1151A1 ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION C-1
(2320-01-540-2038) (EIC: BEG); LIST (AAL)
CAPACITY, ENHANCED, M1152 EXPENDABLE/DURABLE
(2320-01-518-7332) (EIC: BA6); SUPPLIES AND D-1
MATERIALS LIST
CAPACITY, ENHANCED, STOWAGE AND SIGN GUIDE E-1
IAP/ARMOR READY, M1152A1
(2320-01-540-2007) (EIC: BEH);
ON-VEHICLE EQUIPMENT F-1
TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CON- LOADING PLANS
TROL/GENERAL PURPOSE VEHICLE, M1165
(2320-01-540-1993) (EIC: BEK);
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS G-1
TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CON-
TROL/GENERAL PURPOSE VEHICLE,
IAP/ARMOR READY, M1165A1 INDEX INDEX 1
(2320-01-540-2017) (EIC: BEJ);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY,
TOW ITAS CARRIER, M1167
(2320-01-544-9638).
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY,

THE AIR FORCE, AND MARINE CORPS
OCTOBER 1997
PCN 184 110330 00
TM 9-2320-387-10
WARNING
EXHAUST GASES CAN KILL
Brain damage or death can result from heavy exposure. Precautions must be
followed to ensure crew safety when the personnel heater or engine of any vehicle is
operated for any purpose.
1. Do not operate your vehicle engine in enclosed areas.
2. Do not idle vehicle engine with windows closed.
3. Be alert at all times for exhaust odors.
4. Be alert for exhaust poisoning symptoms. They are:
• Headache
• Dizziness
• Sleepiness
• Loss of muscular control
5. If you see another person with exhaust poisoning symptoms:
• Remove person from area

• Expose to open air
• Keep person warm
• Do not permit physical exercise
• Administer artificial respiration, if necessary*
• Notify a medic
*For artificial respiration, refer to FM 21-11.
6. BE AWARE, the field protective mask for Nuclear, Biological, or Chemical

(NBC) protection will not protect you from carbon monoxide poisoning.
THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST EXHAUST POISONING IS ADEQUATE

VENTILATION.
warning a
TM 9-2320-387-10
WARNING SUMMARY
• Do not attempt to operate cargo shell door forward latch. The cargo shell door is
not to be opened from inside the vehicle. Opening cargo shell door from inside the
vehicle may cause damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
• Drycleaning solvent is flammable and will not be used near an open flame.
A fire extinguisher will be kept nearby when the solvent is used. Use only in well-
ventilated places. Failure to do this may result in injury to personnel
and/or damage to equipment.
• Protective gloves, clothing, and/or respiratory equipment must be worn whenever
caustic, toxic, or flammable cleaning solutions are used. Failure to do this may
result in injury to personnel.
• Do not perform fuel or battery system checks, inspections, or maintenance while
smoking or near sparks. Fuel may ignite and batteries may explode, causing
damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.
• Never use transmission shift lever in place of parking brake. Set parking brake.
Ensure transmission shift lever is in P (park) position and transfer case shift
lever is NOT in N (neutral) position. Damage to equipment and injury to
personnel may occur if these instructions are not followed.
• Ensure all slack from the three-point seatbelt or Improved Personal Restraint
System is removed. The three-point seatbelt and Improved Personal Restraint
System will lock only during sudden stops or impact. Injury and/or death to
personnel may result if an accident occurs and seatbelts or lap and shoulder
straps are not in use or adjusted properly.
• This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits
specified in this TM. Operations beyond these limits are prohibited IAW AR 750-1
without written approval from the Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive and
Armaments Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
• Use extreme caution when transporting personnel. Although certain design
characteristics of the vehicle, such as vehicle width, ground clearance,
independent suspension, etc., provide improved capabilities, accidents can still
happen.
• Operators are reminded to observe basic safe driving techniques/skills when
operating the vehicle, especially when transporting personnel. Vehicle speed must
be reduced consistent with weather and road/terrain conditions. Obstacles such as
stumps and boulders must be avoided. Failure to use basic safe driving
techniques/skills may result in loss of control and an accident or rollover resulting
in injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment. Since the troop/cargo
area has minimal overhead protections and does not have seatbelts, personnel
seated here are at greater risk of serious injury.
• Prior to towing vehicle with rear wheels up, secure steering wheel to prevent
front wheels from turning.
• Wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Do not handle cable with bare
hands. When fully extending winch cable, ensure that four wraps of winch cable
remain on drum at all times. Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch cable
during winch operation. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle and
injury or death to personnel.
• Protective eye equipment (goggles/shield) must be worn when removing snaprings
or springs. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
warning b Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
WARNING SUMMARY (Cont’d)
• Avoid using fire extinguisher in unventilated areas. Prolonged inhalation exposure

to extinguishing agent or fumes from burning material may cause injury to
personnel. Using fire extinguisher in windy area will cause rapid dispersal of
extinguishing agent and reduce effectiveness in fire control.
• Vehicle operation in snow is a hazardous condition. Operator must travel at reduced
speeds and be prepared to meet sudden changes in road conditions. Pump brakes
gradually when stopping vehicle on ice or snow. Sudden braking will cause wheels
to lock and vehicle to slide out of control, causing damage to vehicle and injury or
death to personnel.
• Do not rely on wet service brakes. Keep applying brakes until they dry out and
uneven braking ceases. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle and injury
or death to personnel.
• Exhaust components are hot after prolonged vehicle use. Ensure exhaust system
components are cool before removing/installing exhaust assembly. Failure to do this
may result in injury to personnel.
• Do not use hand throttle as an automatic speed or cruise control. The hand throttle
does not automatically disengage when brake is applied, resulting in increased
stopping distances and possible hazardous and unsafe operation. Injury to
personnel or damage to equipment may result.
• To ensure opening of hood is accomplished safely and effectively, always maintain
the proper lifting posture, with legs bent and back straight. When raising and
securing hood, ensure hood prop rod is secured to hood support bracket. When
releasing hood prop rod, do not pull rod at hook end. Damage to equipment or
injury to personnel may occur if hood is not raised, secured, and lowered properly.
• If NBC exposure is suspected, all air filter media should be handled by personnel
wearing protective equipment. Consult your unit NBC officer or NBC NCO for
appropriate handling or disposal instructions.
• Due to tire load ratings and vehicle load carrying capabilities, only the load range D
radial tire can be used.
• Hearing protection is required for driver and passengers when engine is running.
Noise levels produced by these vehicles exceed 85 dBA, which may cause injury to
personnel.
• Do not operate the vehicle without windshield assembly positioned upright and the
B-pillar securely attached. Operation of vehicle without these structures in place
may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
• Chock blocks shall be used when parking a vehicle with inoperative parking brakes,
operating in extreme cold conditions, parking on inclines, or whenever and
wherever maintenance is being performed. Failure to do so may result in injury to
personnel or damage to equipment.
• Do not operate the vehicular heater in a closed area without proper exhaust
evacuations. Damage to heater or injury to personnel may result.
• Do not operate the vehicular heater when refueling. Damage to heater or injury to
personnel may result.
• Use care when opening and closing doors. Do not rest fingers in door opening.
Personnel injury may result.
Change 1 warning c
TM 9-2320-387-10
WARNING SUMMARY (Cont’d)
• Do not operate heater when ventilation system is on. Damage to heater or injury to
• Communication shelters AN/GRC-122 and AN/GRC-142 RATT may overload vehicle
by up to 500 pounds. Use caution when driving to avoid damage to equipment or
injury to personnel.
• Do not use tow pintle as a step when entering or exiting vehicle cargo area. Failure
to do so may result in injury to personnel.
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, always utilize the manual crank handle to rotate the
turret. Failure to do this may result in injury to personnel.
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, always secure the locking mechanism while on an incline to
prevent the T-GPK from unexpectedly rotating, which may result in injury to the
crew or damage to the ITAS.
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, always maximize personal space by adjusting storage and
placement of personal gear. Failure to do this may result in injury to personnel.
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, the left side and rear T-GPK panels must be lowered to the
down position prior to firing IAW with the procedures in FM 3-22.32.
• Frag 5 doors are extremely heavy and difficult to open and close. For vehicles
equipped with Frag 5 doors, avoid parking on inclines or sloped terrain if possible. If
vehicle must be parked on an incline or sloped terrain, use extreme caution when
opening and closing Frag 5 doors. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment or injury to personnel.
warning d Change 6
ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
CHANGE HEADQUARTERS
NO. 6 DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY, AIR FORCE,
AND MARINE CORPS
WASHINGTON, D.C., 30 JUNE 2009
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);
CARRIER, 4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C);
CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER, M1151
(2320-01-518-7330) (EIC: BA5);
(2320-01-540-2038) (EIC: BEG);
CAPACITY, ENHANCED, M1152
(2320-01-518-7332) (EIC: BA6);
CAPACITY, ENHANCED,
(2320-01-540-2007) (EIC: BEH);
TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL
PURPOSE VEHICLE, M1165
(2320-01-540-1993) (EIC: BEK);
PURPOSE VEHICLE, IAP/ARMOR READY, M1165A1
(2320-01-540-2017) (EIC: BEJ);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY,
TOW ITAS CARRIER, M1167
(2320-01-544-9638).
TM 9-2320-387-10, 17 October 1997, is changed as follows:
1. One new model has been added to the front cover. The new cover, located at the end of the
change package, replaces the existing cover.
2. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below.
3. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page.
4. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Marine Corps PCN 184 110330 06
Remove pages Insert pages
warning c and warning d warning c and warning d
A and B A through C/(D blank)
i through iv i through iv
1-1 and 1-2/(1-2.1 and 1-2.2 deleted) 1-1 and 1-2/(1-2.1 and 1-2.2 deleted)
1-5 through 1-18 1-4.7 through 1-18
1-21 and 1-22 1-21 through 1-22.1/(1-22.2 blank)
1-25 through 1-28 1-25 through 1-28.2
1-31 and 1-32 1-31 and 1-32
2-3 and 2-4 2-3 and 2-4
2-7 through 2-8.6 2-7 through 2-8.6
2-13 and 2-14 2-13 and 2-14
2-23 through 2-26 2-22.5 through 2-26
2-29 and 2-30 2-29 and 2-30
2-33 and 2-34 2-33 and 2-34
2-39 through 2-42 2-38.1 through 2-42
2-49 through 2-54 2-49 through 2-54
2-57 and 2-58 2-57 and 2-58
2-60.1 through 2-60.4/(2-61 blank) 2-60.1 through 2-60.4/(2-61 blank)
2-67 and 2-68 2-67 and 2-68
2-71 and 2-72 2-71 and 2-72
2-76.1 through 2-78 2-76.1 through 2-78.1/(2-78.2 blank)
2-81 and 2-82 2-81 and 2-82
2-89 and 2-90 2-89 and 2-90
2-94.1 through 2-94.6 2-94.1 through 2-94.6
2-94.11 through 2-94.14 2-94.9 through 2-94.14
2-95 and 2-96 2-95 and 2-96
2-99/(2-100 blank) 2-98.7 through 2-99/(2-100 blank)
2-101 through 2-102.2 2-101 through 2-102.2
2-122.1 and 2-122.2 2-122.1 and 2-122.2
2-135/(2-136 blank) 2-135 and 2-136
3-6.1 and 3-6.2/(3-7 blank) 3-6.1 and 3-6.2/(3-7 blank)
3-13 and 3-14 3-13 and 3-14
A-1 and A-2 A-1 and A-2
C-1 through C-4 C-1 through C-4
E-5 and E-6 E-4.1 through E-6
G-3 and G-4 G-3 and G-4
None G-14.1/(G-14.2 blank)
G-15 and G-16 G-15 and G-16
Index 1 through Index 8 Index 1 through Index 8
Cover Cover
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.

General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0830503
By Order of the Secretary of the Air Force:

JOHN P. JUMPER
General, United States Air Force
Chief of Staff
GREGORY S. MARTIN
Commander, Air Force Materiel Command
By Order of the Marine Corps:

MICHAEL W. EVERLY
Program Manager
Motor Transportation (PMM151)
Marine Corps Systems Command
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN)

381018, requirements for TM 9-2320-387-10.
Marine Corps PCN 184 110330 06

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
CHANGE
NO. 5 HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY, AIR FORCE,
AND MARINE CORPS
WASHINGTON, D.C., 30 NOVEMBER 2007
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);

CARRIER, 4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C);

(2320-01-518-7330) (EIC: BA5);

(2320-01-540-2038);

(2320-01-518-7332) (EIC: BA6);

CAPACITY, ENHANCED,
(2320-01-540-2007);

(2320-01-540-1993);

(2320-01-540-2017).

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

a and b a and b
A and B A and B
i through vi i through vi
1-31 through 1-33/(1-34 blank) 1-31 through 1-33/(1-34 blank)
2-7 through 2-8.2 2-7 through 2-8.6
2-13 through 2-18.1/(2-18.2 blank) 2-13 through 2-18.1/(2-18.2 blank)
2-22.1 through 2-24 2-22.1 through 2-24
2-27 and 2-28 2-27 and 2-28
2-35 and 2-36 2-34.1 through 2-36
2-61 and 2-62 2-60.3 through 2-62
2-65 and 2-66 2-65 and 2-66
2-76.1 through 2-76.4 2-76.1 through 2-76.4/(2-77 blank)
2-80.1 through 2-86 2-80.1 through 2-86
2-89 and 2-90 2-89 and 2-90
2-94.1 through 2-96 2-94.1 through 2-96
2-99 and 2-100 2-98.1 through 2-99/(2-100 blank)
2-101 through 2-102.1/(2-102.2 blank) 2-101 through 2-102.3/(2-102.4 blank)
2-122.1 through 2-124 2-122.1 through 2-124
2-125 and 2-126 2-125 and 2-126
(2-130.1 blank)/2-130.2 (2-130.1 blank)/2-130.2
3-6.1 and 3-6.2 3-6.1 and 3-6.2
3-21 and 3-22 3-21 and 3-22
B-1 and B-2 B-1 and B-2
D-1 through D-4 D-1 through D-4
E-3 through E-6 E-3 through E-6
F-1 and F-2 F-1 and F-2
G-1 through G-4 G-1 through G-4
G-15 and G-16 G-15 and G-16
Index 1 through Index 7/(Index 8 blank) Index 1 through Index 8

Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
0721901

JOHN P. JUMPER
Chief of Staff
GREGORY S. MARTIN

S. I. SCHULER
Colonel, USMC
Program Manager Motor
Transportation (PMM151)
DISTRIBUTION:

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
CHANGE
NO. 4 HEADQUARTERS,
AND MARINE CORPS
WASHINGTON, D.C., 28 FEBRUARY 2007
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);

CARRIER, 4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C);

(2320-01-518-7330) (EIC: BA5);

(2320-01-540-2038);

(2320-01-518-7332) (EIC: BA6);

CAPACITY, ENHANCED,
(2320-01-540-2007);

(2320-01-540-1993);

(2320-01-540-2017).

1. Four new models have been added to the front cover. The new cover, located at
the end of the change package, replaces the existing cover.

A and B A and B
i and ii i and ii
Cover Cover

Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
0703801

JOHN P. JUMPER
Chief of Staff
GREGORY S. MARTIN

S. I. SCHULER
Colonel, USMC
DISTRIBUTION:

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
CHANGE HEADQUARTERS,
NO. 3 AND MARINE CORPS
WASHINGTON, D.C., 30 APRIL 2006
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);
TRUCK, UTILITY: UP-ARMORED CARRIER,
4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER,
M1151
(2320-01-518-7330);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY, ENHANCED,
M1152
(2320-01-518-7332).
1. Two new models have been added to the front cover. The new cover, located at
the end of the change package, replaces the existing cover.

warning a and warning b warning a and warning b
A and B A and B
i through vi i through vi
1-31 and 1-32 1-31 through 1-33/(1-34 blank)
2-13 through 2-18 2-13 through 2-18.1/(2-18.2 blank)
2-23 and 2-24 2-22.1 through 2-24
2-33 and 2-34 2-33 and 2-34


2-65 and 2-66 2-65 and 2-66
2-75 and 2-76 2-75 through 2-76.4
2-81 through 2-90 2-80.1 through 2-90
2-95 through 2-108 2-94.1 through 2-108
2-111 through 2-120 2-111 through 2-120
2-123 through 2-126 2-122.1 through 2-126
2-129 through 2-132 2-129 through 2-132
3-3 and 3-4 3-3 and 3-4
3-25 through 3-29/(3-30 blank) 3-25 through 3-29/(3-30 blank)
(3-31 and 3-32 deleted) (3-31 and 3-32 deleted)
B-1 through B-6 B-1 through B-6
B-9/(B-10 blank) B-9/(B-10 blank)
D-1 and D-2 D-1 and D-2
E-1 through E-6 E-1 through E-6
F-1 and F-2 F-1 and F-2
F-11/(F-12 blank) F-11 throughF-15/(F-16 blank)
G-15 and G-16 G-15 and G-16
Index 1 through Index 6 Index 1 through Index 7/
(Index 8 blank)
Cover Cover
PETER J. SCHOOMAKER
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
0602403

JOHN P. JUMPER
Chief of Staff
GREGORY S. MARTIN

S. I. SCHULER
Colonel, USMC
DISTRIBUTION:

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCE
NO. 2 WASHINGTON, D.C., 30 JULY 2004
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);
4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C).

A/(B blank) A and B
1-3 and 1-4 1-3 and 1-4
1-31/(1-32 blank) 1-31 and 1-32
2-8.1/(2-8.2 blank) 2-8.1/(2-8.2 blank)
2-41 and 2-42 2-41 and 2-42
2-49 and 2-50 2-49 and 2-50
2-53 and 2-54 2-53 and 2-54
2-77 and 2-78 2-76.1 through 2-78
2-93 and 2-94 2-92.1 through 2-94
2-97 through 2-100 2-97 through 2-100
NONE 2-102.1/(2-102.2 blank)
2-121 through 2-124 2-121 through 2-124
B-3 through B-9/(B-10 blank) B-3 through B-9/(B-10 blank)
C-1 and C-2 C-1 and C-2
F-1 through F-8 F-1 through F-8

ERIC K. SHINSEKI
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOEL B. HUDSON
0024307

RONALD R. FOGELMAN
Chief of Staff
HENRY VICCELLIO, JR.

DISTRIBUTION:

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCE
NO. 1 WASHINGTON, D.C., 15 OCTOBER 2001
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);
4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C).

Remove page Insert page

warning a through warning a through
warning c/(warning d blank) warning d
None A/(B blank) (after warning d)
i and ii i and ii
None 2-8.1/(2-8.2 blank)
2-23 and 2-24 2-23 and 2-24
None 2-48.1 and 2-48.2
2-77 and 2-78 2-77 and 2-78
2-95 and 2-96 2-95 and 2-96
2-101 through 2-104 2-101 through 2-104
2-109 through 2-114 2-109 through 2-114

oÉãçîÉ=é~ÖÉ fåëÉêí=é~ÖÉ

- -

- -

&
&
& &
- -
&' '()*
()* (*
++ ++
,, ,,
,/,. ,/,.
,'(,)* ,'(,)*
11- 11-
2&2. 2&2.
3&3 3&3
3&3. 3&3.
45&45. 45&45.
1+6! 1+6!
6#&#&#
ERIC K. SHINSEKI
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOEL B. HUDSON
0024307

RONALD R. FOGELMAN
Chief of Staff
HENRY VICCELLIO, JR.

DISTRIBUTION:

TM 9-2320-387-10
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
NOTE: The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a vertical line in the
outer margins of the page.
Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:
Original . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . 17 October 1997
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 15 October 2001
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 July 2004
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 April 2006
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . 28 February 2007
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 30 November 2007
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 June 2009
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 442
CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page No. . . . . . .*Change No. Page No. . . . . . .*Change No. Page No. . . . . . .*Change No.
Warning a . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 1-16.1 - 1-16.2 Added . . . .6 2-18.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warning b . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-18.2 Blank Added . . . . . .3
Warning c . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1-18 - 1-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-19 - 2-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
Warning d . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
A - B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1-22.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-22.1 - 2.22.4 . . . . . . . . . .6
C Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1-22.2 Blank Added . . . . . .6 2-22.5 - 2-22.8 Added . . . .6
D Blank Added . . . . . . . . . .6 1-23 - 1-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1-25 - 1-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1-28.1 - 1-28.2 Added . . . .6 2-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
iii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1-29 - 1-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1-32 - 1-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1-34 Blank Added . . . . . . .3 2-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-30 - 2-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-32.1 - 2-32.2 Added . . . .2
1-2.1 - 1-2.2 Deleted . . . . .5 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1-3 - 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1-4.1 - 1-4.2 . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2-34.1 - 2-34.2 Added . . . .5
1-4.3 - 1-4.6 Added . . . . . .5 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-35 - 2-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
1-4.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1-4.8 Added . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
1-5 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-8.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-38.1 - 2-38.2 Added . . . .6
1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-8.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-39 - 2-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1-6.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-8.3 Blank Added . . . . . . .5 2-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1-6.2 Blank Added . . . . . . .3 2-8.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-43 - 2-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1-7 - 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-8.5 Added . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-48.1 - 2-48.2 Added . . . .1
1-10.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-8.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1-10.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
1-11 - 1-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1-12.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-11 - 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1-12.2 Blank Added . . . . . .6 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-52.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-52.2 Blank Added . . . . . .3
1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-53 - 2-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1-15 - 1-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-16 - 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
*Zero in this column indicates original page.
Change 6 A
TM 9-2320-387-10
Page No. . . . . . . .*Change No. Page No. . . . . . . .*Change No. Page No. . . . . . . .*Change No.
2-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-94.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-94.3 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-130.1 Blank . . . . . . . . . . .5
2-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2-94.4 - 2-94.5 . . . . . . . . . .6 2-130.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2-59 - 2-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-94.6 - 2-94.11 Added . . .5 2-130.3 - 2-130.10 Added . . . .3
2-60.1 - 2-60.2 . . . . . . . . . .6 2-94.12 - 2-94.14 . . . . . . . .6 2-131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-60.3 - 2-60.4 . . . . . . . . . .6 2-94.15 - 2-94.16 Added . .5 2-132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
2-61 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
2-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2-96.1 - 2-96.2 Added . . . .3 2-135 - 2-136 . . . . . . . . . . .6
2-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2-97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3-1 - 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
2-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-98.1 - 2-98.2 Added . . . .5 3-5 - 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2-67 - 2-68 . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-98.3 Blank Added . . . . . .5 3-6.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2-98.4 - 2-98.6 Added . . . .5 3-6.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
2-70 - 2-71 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-98.7 - 2-98.10 Added . . .6 3-7 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2-73 - 2-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-100 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . .5 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2-74.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-100.1 - 2-100.2 Added . .3 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-74.2 Blank Added . . . . . .5 2-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 3-10.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 3-10.2 Blank Added . . . . . .3
2-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-102.1 - 2-102.2 . . . . . . . .6 3-11 - 3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
2-76.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-102.3 Added . . . . . . . . . .5 3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
2-76.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-102.4 Blank Added . . . . .5 3-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2-76.3 Added . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2-76.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2-77 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2-105 - 2-108 . . . . . . . . . . .3 3-17 - 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-109 - 2-110 . . . . . . . . . . .1 3-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
2-78.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2-78.2 Blank Added . . . . . .6 2-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 3-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2-79 - 2-80 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2-80.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2-80.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 3-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
2-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3-26 - 3-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-118 - 2-120 . . . . . . . . . . .3 3-30 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2-84 - 2-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 3-31 - 3-32 Deleted . . . . . .1
2-86 - 2-87 . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 A-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-122.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
2-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2-122.2 Added . . . . . . . . . .3 B-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2-123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-91 - 2-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 B-2.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-92.1 - 2-92.4 Added . . . .2 2-124.1 Added . . . . . . . . . .3 B-2.2 Blank Added . . . . . .3
2-93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2-124.2 Blank Added . . . . .3 B-3 - B-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2-94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 2-125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 B-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2-94.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .3 2-126 - 2-129 . . . . . . . . . . .0 B-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
B Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Page No. . . . . . . .*Change No. Page No. . . . . . . .*Change No. Page No. . . . . . . .*Change No.
B-7 - B-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 F-6 - F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 G-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
B-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 F-8 - F-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 G-11 - G-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
B-10 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 F-11 - F-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 G-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
C-1 - C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 F-16 Blank Added . . . . . . .3 G-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 G-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 G-14.1 Added . . . . . . . . . . .6
D-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 G-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 G-14.2 Blank Added . . . . .6
D-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 G-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 G-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
D-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 G-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 G-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
D-5 - D-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 G-5 - G-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Index 1 - Index 8 . . . . . . . .6
E-1 - E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 G-7 - G-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
E-2.1 - E-2.2 Added . . . . . .3 G-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
E-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
E-4 - E-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
E-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
F-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
F-2 - F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
F-4 - F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
Change 6 C/(D blank)

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10
TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO. 9-2320-387-10 HEADQUARTERS,
NO. 11033-OR DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY,
TECHNICAL ORDER THE AIR FORCE, AND MARINE CORPS
NO. 36A12-1A-3061-1 WASHINGTON, D.C., 17 OCTOBER 1997
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
TRUCK, UTILITY: S250 SHELTER CARRIER, 4X4, M1113
(2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B);
TRUCK, UTILITY: UP-ARMORED CARRIER, 4X4, M1114
(2320-01-413-3739) (EIC: B6C);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER, M1151
(2320-01-518-7330) (EIC: BA5);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER,
(2320-01-540-2038) (EIC: BEG);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY, ENHANCED, M1152
(2320-01-518-7332) (EIC: BA6);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY, ENHANCED, IAP/ARMOR READY, M1152A1
(2320-01-540-2007) (EIC: BEH);
TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL PURPOSE VEHICLE, M1165
(2320-01-540-1993) (EIC: BEK);
TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL PURPOSE VEHICLE, IAP/ARMOR
READY, M1165A1 (2320-01-540-2017) (EIC: BEJ);
TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED CAPACITY, TOW ITAS CARRIER, M1167
(2320-01-544-9638).
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

(Army) You can help improve this publication. If you find any errors, or if you would like to recommend any
improvements to the procedures in this publication, please let us know. The preferred method is to submit your DA Form
2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) through the Internet, on the Army Electronic Product
Support (AEPS) website. The Internet address is https://aeps.ria.army.mil. The DA Form 2028 is located under the Public
Applications section in the AEPS Public Home Page. Fill out the form and click on SUBMIT. Using this form on the AEPS
will enable us to respond quicker to your comments and better manage the DA Form 2028 program. You may also mail,
e-mail, or fax your comments or DA Form 2028 directly to the U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command.
The postal mail address is U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LC-LMPP / TECH
PUBS, 1 Rock Island Arsenal, Rock Island, IL 61299-7630. The e-mail address is tacomlcmc.daform2028@us.army.mil.
The fax number is DSN 793-0726 or Commercial (309) 782-0726. (Marine Corps) Submit notice of discrepancies or
suggest changes on a NAVMC 10772. Users without CAC/PKI certificates may submit the NAVMC via the Internet using
website http://www.ala.usmc.mil/navmc/part1.htm, You can then fill in and submit the automated NAVMC 10772 Form.
NAVMC forms may also be submitted by electronic mail to bmatcommarlogbases@logcom.usmc.mil
mailto:mbmatcommarlogbases@logcom.usmc.mil, or by mailing a paper copy of the NAVMC 10772 in an envelope
addressed to Commander, Marine Corps Systems Command, Attn: Assistant Commander Acquisition and Logistics
(LOG/TP), 814 Radford Blvd., Room 316E, Albany, Georgia 31704-0343. Problems or questions regarding the NAVMC
10772 program should be reported by calling DSN 567-5017 or DSN 567-6439. In addition to electronic submittal of the
NAVMC form via the above web links, forward an information copy (cc:) or mail a paper copy to the Logistics
Management Specialist at the following address: Logistics Management Specialist, Code PMM151, 814 Radford Blvd.,
STE 310W, Albany, Georgia 31704-0343.
Change 6 i
TM 9-2320-387-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Section I. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II. Equipment Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
III. Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
CHAPTER 2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. Description and Use of Operator’s Controls
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
II. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) . . . . . . . . 2-24
III. Operation Under Usual Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
IV. Operation Under Unusual Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
V. Cargo/Troop Carrier and S250 Shelter Carrier Operation . . . . . . 2-124
VI. M1114 Up-Armored Carrier Stowage Net Operation . . . . . . . . . 2-132
VII. Removal and Installation of TOW Gunner’s
Protection Kit (T-GPK) in Preparation for Air Drop . . . . ...... 2-136
CHAPTER 3. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Section I. Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
II. Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
III. Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
APPENDIX A. REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
APPENDIX B. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Section I. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
II. Components of End Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
III. Basic Issue Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
APPENDIX C. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL) . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Section I. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
II. Additional Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
APPENDIX D. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND
MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Section I. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
II. Expendable/Durable Supplies and Materials List . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
APPENDIX E. STOWAGE AND SIGN GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
APPENDIX F. ON-VEHICLE EQUIPMENT LOADING PLANS . . . . . . . . . . F-1
APPENDIX G. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
INDEX .............................................. Index 1
ii Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ABOUT YOUR MANUAL

Spend some time looking through this manual. You’ll find that it takes a
positive approach and clearly states only what you can do. Before attempting any
questionable operation which is not specifically authorized in this manual, clearance
must be obtained from your supervisor.
Features added to improve the convenience of this manual and increase your
efficiency are:
a. Accessing Information – Troubleshooting guides for specific systems lead
directly to step-by-step directions for problem solving. Maintenance tasks use
preventive maintenance checks and services for each vehicle.
b. Illustrations – A variety of methods are used to make locating and
identifying components easier. Locator illustrations with keyed text, exploded
views, and cut-away diagrams make the information in this manual easier to
understand and follow.
c. Keying Text With Illustrations – Instructions/text are located together with
figures that illustrate the specific task you are working on. Generally, the task
steps and figures are located side by side.
USING YOUR MANUAL: EXAMPLE 1

TASK: You are starting your TM 9-2320-387-10
ECV vehicle engine and are in

TABLE OF CONTENTS
need of instructions to complete Page
this procedure. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
OPERATING INSTRUCTION Section I.

II.
General Information . .
Equipment Description
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-3
STEPS: III.
CHAPTER 2.
Principles of Operation.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Section I. Description and Use of Operator’s Controls

1. Look for OPERATING II.
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) . .
2-1
2-24
INSTRUCTIONS in the III.
IV.
Operation Under Usual Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Under Unusual Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
2-103
V. Cargo/Troop Carrier and S250 Shelter Carrier Operation 2-124
table of contents (page ii) of VI. M1114 Up-Armored Carrier Stowage Net Operation . . . 2-132
VII. Removal and Installation of TOW Gunner’s
this manual. Protection Kit (T-GPK) in Preparation for Air Drop . . . . 2-136
CHAPTER 3. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Look through the list of Section I.

II.
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-2
III. Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
section titles until you find APPENDIX A. REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
section III, Operation Under APPENDIX B. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Usual Conditions. Section I.
II.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Components of End Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-1
B-2
III. Basic Issue Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
3. Turn to page 2-60.3 as APPENDIX C. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL) . . . . . . . C-1
Section I. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
indicated. II. Additional Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
APPENDIX D. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND
MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Section I. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
II. Expendable/Durable Supplies and Materials List. . . . . . D-2
APPENDIX E. STOWAGE AND SIGN GUIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
APPENDIX F. ON-VEHICLE EQUIPMENT LOADING PLANS . . . . . . F-1
APPENDIX G. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
INDEX ......................................... Index 1
ii Change 6
Change 6 iii
TM 9-2320-387-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL (Cont’d)

4. On page 2-60.3 look through the
Operation Under Usual
Conditions reference index for
starting the engine.
5. Starting on page 2-62 and

continuing through page 2-64,
you will find directions for
starting the engine listed in
progressive order.
6. Before performing the operating

instruction steps, take time to
examine and familiarize your-
self with the complete operation
procedure and required PMCS.
7. Procedures include everything

you must do to accomplish a
basic operations task.
8. Numbered callouts, found with TM 9-2320-387-10
the art and text and arranged in 2-11. BREAK-IN SERVICE

a clockwise pattern, will make CAUTION
Do not tow trailer during the first 500 mi (805) km) of operation.
it easier for you to identify and Damage to equipment may occur.
locate instruments and controls. Break-in precautions are no longer required during the first 500 mi (805 km) of
operation, with the exception of trailer towing.
2-12. STARTING THE ENGINE
9. Pay particular attention to all .WARNING.

• The automatic transmission has a PARK position. Never use the
notes, cautions, and warnings. shift lever in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake.
Make sure the transmission shift lever is in the P (park) position
and transfer case shift lever is NOT in the N (neutral) position.
They are designed to assist Damage to equipment and injury to personnel may occur if these
instructions are not followed.
you with your task, prevent • Chock blocks will be used when parking a vehicle with inoperative
parking brakes, operating in extreme cold conditions, parking on
damage to the vehicle and its inclines, or whenever and wherever maintenance is being performed.
Failure to do so may result in injury to personnel or damage to
equipment.
components, and protect you • Hearing protection is required for driver and passengers when
engine is running. Noise levels produced by these vehicles exceed
from injury. 85 dBA, which may cause injury to personnel.
a. Ensure transmission shift lever (3) is in P (park) position and transfer case
shift lever (4) is NOT in N (neutral) position.
NOTE
To apply parking brake, grasp handle firmly and pull upward until
handle is locked in a straight-up position.
a.1. Ensure parking brake (5) is applied.

b. Adjust driver’s seat (para. 2-16).
2-62 Change 5
iv Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
USING YOUR MANUAL: EXAMPLE 2
TASK: Your ECV engine cranks TM 9-2320-387-10
but does not start.

Section II. TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING STEPS:
3-5. GENERAL
1. Look for MAINTENANCE Troubleshooting, table 3-1, contains instructions that will help the operator identify
and correct simple vehicle malfunctions. The table also helps the operator identify
INSTRUCTIONS in the of major mechanical difficulties that must be referred to unit maintenance. The listing
of possible malfunctions come under major vehicle headings. They are:
table of contents (page ii) of •

•
Engine
Heating system
this manual. •
•
Transmission
Transfer case
• Brakes
2. Look through the list of •

•
Wheels and tires
Steering
section titles until you find •

•
Winch
Up-armored carrier
section II, Troubleshooting. 3-6. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
3. Turn to page 3-2 as a. Table 3-1 lists the common malfunctions which you may find during the
operation or maintenance of the vehicles or their components. You should perform
the tests/inspections and corrective actions in the order listed.
indicated. b. This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur, nor all tests or
inspections and corrective actions. If a malfunction is not listed or is not corrected
by listed actions, notify your supervisor.
4. Starting on page 3-3 and NOTE
continuing on page 3-4, you • Hydrostatic lock is caused by the entry of substantial amounts of
water into the engine through the air intake system and
subsequent contamination of the fuel system. Hydrostatic lock most
will find the troubleshooting frequently occurs during or just after fording. Water is forced into
the air intake system, is drawn into the engine, and effectively
table 3-1 instructions that locks up the engine.
• Notify unit maintenance if you suspect hydrostatic lock and they
will identify and correct will test the engine.
simple engine malfunctions.

Look at item 3. ENGINE
CRANKS BUT DOES NOT
START. 3-2
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting.
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ENGINE
1. ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK
Step 1. Check to see if transmission shift lever is in P (park).
If not, place lever in P (park).
Step 2. Check battery fluid level and check battery cable connections for
looseness, damage, or corrosion.
If any of these conditions exist, notify unit maintenance.
Step 3. Attempt to slave-start vehicle (para. 2-23).
Step 4. Other causes.
Notify unit maintenance.
2. ENGINE CRANKS SLOWLY

3. ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START

Step 1. Check to see if fuel gauge indicates E (empty).
Fill fuel tank, and start engine.
Step 2. Purge fuel system of air (para. 3-11).
Step 3. Check to see if wait-to-start lamp assembly fails to light or does not
go out.
Notify unit maintenance if wait-to-start lamp assembly fails to
light or does not go out.
4. VEHICLE NOT CHARGING ACCORDING TO VOLTMETER

Step 1. Check battery cable connections for looseness, damage, or corrosion.
Notify unit maintenance of any damage to battery cables.
Step 2. Check for broken or missing drivebelt.
Notify unit maintenance if drivebelt is broken or missing.
3-3
Change 5 v
TM 9-2320-387-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL (Cont'd)
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES: TM 9-2320-387-10
3-22. TIRE CHAIN INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

5. Procedures include everything
CAUTION
you must do to accomplish a Tire chains are only used when extra traction is required and must be
used as an axle set. Any other combination may cause damage to the
basic maintenance task. drivetrain.
a. Tire Chain Installation.
6. Before beginning a maintenance (1) Spread out tire chain assembly (1) and line up with tire.
(2) Cautiously move or drive vehicle over tire chain assembly (1) until wheel
task, familiarize yourself with is positioned at either end of chain assembly (1), allowing tire chain assembly (1) to
be draped up and over tire.
the entire maintenance (3) Maneuver tire chain assembly (1) until cross-link sections are evenly
spaced around tire. Secure one side of tire chain assembly (1) to tire by hooking
inside fastener (2) to chain assembly (1). Tighten chain assembly (1) as much as
procedure. possible.
(4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all tire chain assemblies have been
properly installed.
7. Pay particular attention to all (5) Hook end fastener (3) to chain assembly (1) and secure with locking
retainer (4) to tighten chain assembly (1). Ensure as many chain links as possible
notes, cautions, and warnings. lay between the sidewall head lugs (5) on both sides of tires.
(6) Move vehicle forward a few feet and retighten chain assembly (1) to
They are designed to assist you remove any slack from where tire was resting on chain assembly (1). Secure loose
chain linkage to chain assembly (1) with wire or other field expedient method.
with your task, prevent damage

to the vehicle and its
components, and protect you
from injury or death.
8. An exploded diagram of the
component, removed from the
vehicle, shows part locations,
attachments, and assembly
relationships.
9. Numbered callouts, found with 3-24 Change 1
the art and text and arranged in

a clockwise pattern, will make it TM 9-2320-387-10
easier for you to identify parts (7) After vehicle is driven one or two miles, stop and retighten tire chains.
Ensure as many chain links as possible lie between sidewall head lugs (5) on both
and locations. sides of tires.
(8) After final tightening, secure loose chain linkage to chain assembly (1)
with wire or other field expedient method.
10. Examine this manual and you (9) Occasionally check tire chains (1) during operations to ensure tire
chains (1) have not slipped.
will discover it is easier to use b. Tire Chain Removal.

CAUTION
when you understand its design. Remove tire chains from tires as soon as possible after leaving area
requiring their use. Prolonged use of tire chains may damage
We hope it will encourage you to drivetrain.
(1) Detach locking retainer (4) from end fastener (3) and unhook end fastener (3)
use it often. from chain assembly (1).

(2) Unhook inside fastener (2) from chain assembly (1) and remove chain
assembly (1) from tire.
(3) Drive vehicle off chain assembly (1).
(4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all tire chain assemblies (1) have been
removed from tires.
(5) Stow tire chain assemblies (1).
3-25
vi Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Section I. GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1. SCOPE
a. This manual contains instructions for operating and servicing the following
HMMWVs (High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles):
• M1113 S250 Shelter Carriers
• M1114 Up-Armored Carriers
• M1151 Armament Carriers
• M1151A1 Armament Carriers, IAP/Armor Ready
• M1152 Expanded Capacity Utility Trucks
• M1152A1 Expanded Capacity Utility Trucks, IAP/Armor Ready
• M1165 Command and Control/General Purpose Vehicles
• M1165A1 Command and Control/General Purpose Vehicles, IAP/Armor Ready
• M1167 Expanded Capacity TOW ITAS Carriers
b. The material presented here provides operators with information and
procedures needed to provide the safest and most efficient operation of these
vehicles. This information includes:
(1) Operator forms and records.

(2) Descriptions of each vehicle and its operation.
(3) The purpose of each vehicle.
(4) Vehicle limitations.
(5) The function of all controls and indicators.
(6) Operating instructions for each vehicle.
(7) Cautions and warnings to operators regarding safety to personnel and
equipment.
(8) How and when to use special purpose kits.
(9) Operator maintenance checks and service procedures.
(10) Troubleshooting procedures to be followed by operators if the vehicle
malfunctions.
1-2. MAINTENANCE FORMS AND RECORDS
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance
will be those prescribed by DA Pam 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management
System (TAMMS) Users Manual (Marine Corps) refer to 4700-13/1 series.
Change 6 1-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-3. HAND RECEIPT MANUAL

This operator’s manual has a companion document with a TM number followed
by -HR (which stands for Hand Receipt). TM 9-2320-387-10-HR consists of
preprinted hand receipts (DA Form 2062) that list end item related equipment
(i.e., COEI, BII, and AAL) you must account for. As an aid to property
accountability, additional -HR manuals may be requisitioned from the following
source in accordance with procedures in chapter 12, AR 25-30:
Commander
U.S. Army Publications Distribution Center
2800 Eastern Blvd.
Baltimore, MD 21220-2896
1-4. CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC)
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It

is important that any corrosion problems with this item be reported so that the
problem can be corrected and improvements made to prevent the problem in future
items. While corrosion is typically associated with rusting of metals, it can also
include deterioration of other materials, such as rubber and plastic. Unusual
cracking, softening, swelling, or breaking of these materials may be a corrosion
problem. If a corrosion problem is identified, it can be reported using SF 368 Product
Quality Deficiency Report (PQDR). Use of key words such as corrosion, rust,
deterioration, or cracking will ensure that the information is identified as a CPC
problem. The form should be submitted to the address specified in DA Pam 750-8.
1-5. REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT

RECOMMENDATIONS (EIRs)
If your vehicle needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the
only one who can tell us what you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why you
don’t like the design or performance. The preferred method for submitting QDRs is
through the Army Electronic Product Support (AEPS) website under the Electronic
Deficiency Reporting System (EDRS). The web address is: https://aeps.ria.army.mil. This is
a secured site requiring a password which can be applied for on the front page of the
website. If the above method is not available to you, put it on an SF 368, Product Quality
Deficiency Report (PQDR), and mail it to us at: U.S. Army Tank-automotive and
Armaments Command, ATTN: AMSTA-TR-E/PQDR MS 267, 6501 E. 11 Mile Road,
Warren, MI 48397-5000. We’ll send you a reply.
1-2/(1-2.1 and 1-2.2 deleted) Change 5

TM 9-2320-387-10
1-6. EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT REPORT

AND MAINTENANCE DIGEST (EIR MD)
The quarterly Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Digest,
TB 43-0001-62 series, contains valuable field information on equipment covered in
this manual. Information in TB 43-0001-62 series is compiled from some of the
Equipment Improvement Reports you prepared on vehicles covered in this manual.
Many of these articles result from comments, suggestions, and improvement
recommendations that you submitted to the EIR program. The TB 43-0001-62 series
contains information on equipment improvements, minor alterations, proposed
Modification Work Orders (MWOs), warranties (if applicable), actions taken on some
of your DA Form 2028s (Recommended Changes to Publications), and advance
information on proposed changes that may affect this manual. The information will
help you in doing your job better and will help in keeping you advised of the latest
changes to this manual. Also refer to DA Pam 25-30, Consolidated Index of Army
Publications and Blank Forms, and appendix A, References, of this manual.
1-7. BREAK-IN SERVICE

CAUTION
Do not tow trailer during the first 500 mi (805 km) of operation.
Damage to equipment may occur.
Break-in precautions are no longer required during the first 500 mi (805 km) of
Section II. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
1-8. EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES,

AND FEATURES
The 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, ECV series of vehicles are tactical vehicles designed for use over
all types of roads, as well as cross-country terrain, in all weather conditions. The
vehicles have four driving wheels, powered by a V-8 liquid-cooled turbocharged
diesel engine. Four-wheel hydraulic service brakes and a mechanical parking brake
are standard. All vehicles are equipped with a pintle hook for towing. Tiedowns and
lifting eyes are provided for air, rail, or sea shipment.
1-9. METRIC SYSTEM

The equipment/system described herein contains metric components and requires
metric, common, and special tools; therefore, both metric and standard units will be
used throughout this publication. In addition, a metric conversion table is located on
the inside back cover of this publication.
Change 5 1-3
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-10. S250 SHELTER CARRIER (M1113)

a. Purpose of Vehicle. The M1113 shelter carrier provides the capability to
secure and transport the S250 electrical equipment shelter. The optional winch
permits recovery operations of similar vehicles. Refer to table 1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully-loaded M1113 shelter carriers will climb road grades as
steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30% (17°). The vehicle fords hard
bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording
kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-10 for cruising
range.
c. Special Limitations. None.
d. Special Instructions in the Manual.
(1) Refer to para. 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment.
(2) Refer to chapter 2, section V, S250 Shelter Carrier Operation.
M1113
1-4 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11. UP-ARMORED CARRIER (M1114)

a. Purpose of Vehicle. The M1114 up-armored vehicle carrier provides added
ballistic protection for armament components, crew, and ammunition. The optional
rear winch permits recovery operations of similar vehicles. Refer to table 1-10.1 for
payload.
b. Performance. The M1114 up-armored vehicle carrier will climb road grades
as steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30% (17°). The vehicle fords
hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters). Refer to table 1-10 for
cruising range.
(1) Refer to para. 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment.
(2) Refer to para. 2-33, Up-Armored Weapon Station Operation.
M1114
Change 5 1-4.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11.1. EXPANDED CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER (M1151)
a. Purpose of Vehicle. The M1151 expanded capacity armament carrier

provides mounting and firing of the MK19 automatic grenade launcher, M2, caliber
.50 machine gun; M60, 7.62 mm machine gun; M240B, 7.62 mm machine gun; and
M249, 5.56 mm Squad Assault Weapon (SAW); ring-mounted with a 360° arc of fire,
with armor protection for crew, weapon components, and ammunition. For higher
payload capacity, the M1151 is equipped with a reinforced frame, crossmemebers,
lifting shackles, heavy-duty variable rate rear springs, shock absorbers, reinforced
control arms, heavy-duty tires and rims, and a transfer case and differential with a
modified gear ratio. The optional front winch permits recovery operations of similar
vehicles. Refer to table 1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully-loaded M1151 armament carriers will climb road grades
as steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30% (13.5°). The vehicles
ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep
water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-10
for cruising range.
(1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment.
(2) Refer to chapter 2, section III, Operation Under Usual Conditions.
M1151
1-4.2 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11.2. EXPANDED CAPACITY, ARMAMENT CARRIER

IAP/ARMOR READY (M1151A1)
a. Purpose of Vehicle. The M1151 expanded capacity armament carrier

provides mounting and firing of the MK19 automatic grenade launcher, M2, caliber
.50 machine gun; M60, 7.62 mm machine gun; M240B, 7.62 mm machine gun; and
M249, 5.56 mm Squad Assault Weapon (SAW); ring-mounted with a 360° arc of fire,
with armor protection for crew, weapon components, and ammunition. For higher
payload capacity, the M1151 is equipped with a reinforced frame, crossmemebers,
lifting shackles, heavy-duty variable rate rear springs, shock absorbers, reinforced
control arms, heavy-duty tires and rims, and a transfer case and differential with a
vehicles. Refer to 1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully-loaded M1151A1 armament carrier will climb road
grades as steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30% (13.5°) The
vehicle fords hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a
deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table
1-10 for cruising range.
(2) Refer to chapter 2, section III, Operation Under Usual Conditions.
M1151A1
Change 5 1-4.3
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11.3. EXPANDED CAPACITY, ENHANCED (M1152)

a. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1152 expanded capacity, enhanced truck is
used to transport personnel. The M1152 provides the capability to secure and
transport the S250 electrical equipment shelter. For higher payload capacity, the
M1152 is equipped with a reinforced frame, crossmembers, lifting shackles, heavy-
duty variable rate rear springs, shock absorbers, reinforced control arms, heavy-duty
tires and rims, and a transfer case and differential with a modified gear ratio. The
optional front winch permits recovery operations of similar vehicles. Refer to table
1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully-loaded M1152 utility trucks will climb road grades as
steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30% (13.5°). The vehicle fords
hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water
fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-10 for
cruising range.
(2) Refer to paragraph 2-53.1, Troop Seat Kit Operation.
M1152
1-4.4 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11.4. EXPANDED CAPACITY, ENHANCED, IAP/ARMOR READY

(M1152A1)
a. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1152A1 expanded capacity, enhanced,
IAP/armor ready is used to transport personnel. The M1152A1 come equipped with
Integrated Armor protection (IAP) which provides added ballistic protection for
armament components, crew, and ammunition. The M1152A1 vehicles are capable of
transporting a two-man or four-man crew and eight passengers. The M1152A1
provides the capability to secure and transport the S250 electrical equipment
shelter. For higher payload capacity, the M1152A1 is equipped with a reinforced
frame, crossmembers, lifting shackles, heavy-duty variable rate rear springs, shock
absorbers, reinforced control arms, heavy-duty tires and rims, and a transfer case
and differential with a modified gear ratio. The optional front winch permits
recovery operations of similar vehicles. Refer to table 1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully loaded M1152A1 expanded capacity, enhanced,
IAP/armor ready will climb road grades as steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side
slope of up to 30% (13.5°) The vehicle fords hard bottom water crossings up to 30
inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152
centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-10 for cruising range.
M1152A1
Change 5 1-4.5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11.5. COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL PURPOSE VEHICLE

(M1165)
a. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1165 command and control/general purpose
vehicle is used to transport personnel. The M1165 vehicles are capable of
transporting a two-man or four-man crew and eight passengers. For higher payload
capacity, the M1165 is equipped with a reinforced frame, crossmembers, lifting
shackles, heavy-duty variable rate rear springs, shock absorbers, reinforced control
arms, heavy-duty tires and rims, and a transfer case and differential with a
vehicles. Refer to table 1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully loaded M1165 expanded capacity, enhanced, will climb
road grades as steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30% (13.5°) The
vehicle fords hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a
deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table
M1165
1-4.6 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11.6. COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL PURPOSE VEHICLE,

IAP/ARMOR READY (M1165A1)
a. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1165A1 command and control/general
purpose vehicle is used to transport personnel. The M1165A1 comes equipped with
Integrated Armor protection (IAP) which provides added ballistic protection for
armament components, crew, and ammunition. The M1165A1 vehicles are capable of
transporting a four-man crew. For higher payload capacity, the M1165A1 is
equipped with a reinforced frame, crossmembers, lifting shackles, heavy-duty
variable rate rear springs, shock absorbers, reinforced control arms, heavy-duty
tires and rims, and a transfer case and differential with a modified gear ratio.
The optional front winch permits recovery operations of similar vehicles. Refer to
table 1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully loaded M1165A1 expanded capacity, enhanced, will
climb road grades as steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30%
(13.5°) The vehicle fords hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76
centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with
the kit. Refer to table 1-10 for cruising range.
M1165A1
Change 6 1-4.7
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-11.7. EXPANDED CAPACITY VEHICLE, TOW IMPROVED TARGET

ACQUISITION SYSTEM (ITAS): M1167
a. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1167 expanded capacity vehicle is equipped

with an improved target acquisition system (ITAS) used to mount and operate the
missile launcher system with armor ballistic protection for crew, missile stowage,
secondary weapons mount for close range, and ammunition These tactical vehicles
are designed for use over all types of roads, as well as cross-country terrain, in all
weather conditions. All vehicles are able to stow a minimum of six missiles mounted
in the cargo area and are equipped with a pintle hook for towing, tiedowns, and
lifting eyes for air, rail, or sea shipment. The optional front winch permits recovery
operations of similar vehicles. Refer to table 1-10.1 for payload.
b. Performance. Fully loaded M1167 expanded capacity TOW ITAS carrier will
climb road grades as steep as 40% (22°) and traverse a side slope of up to 30%
(13.5°) The vehicle fords hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76
centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with
the kit. Refer to table
M1167
1-4.8/(1-5 blank) Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-12. TABULATED DATA

This paragraph organizes vehicle specifications, special equipment, and model
differences in table form for easy reference by operators.
Table 1-1. Differences Between Models.
EQUIPMENT/ VEHICLE
FUNCTION M1113 M1114 M1151 M1151A1 M1152 M1152A1 M1165 M1165A1 M1167
Armament
X X X X X
Mounting
S250 Shelter
X X X
Configuration
Vehicle Winch (if
X X X X X X X X X
equipped)
Basic Armor X
Up-Armor X
Integrated Armor
X X X X
Protection (IAP)
TOW ITAS
X
Launcher Mounting
Table 1-2. Capacities.

Capacity
Description Standard Metric
Cooling system 27.25 qt 25.8 L
Engine (crankcase only) 7 qt 6.6 L
Engine (crankcase with new filter) 8 qt 7.6 L
Differential (each) 2 qt 1.9 L
Transmission (drain and refill) 7.7 qt 7.3 L
Transfer case 3.35 qt 3.17 L
Fuel tank 25 gal. 94.6 L
Brake master cylinder (Serial numbers 299999 and below) 1.12 pt 0.53 L
Brake master cylinder (Serial numbers 300000 and above) 2.36 pt 1.12 L
Total brake system (Serial numbers 299999 and below) 1.63 pt 0.77 L
Total brake system (Serial numbers 300000 and above) 3.47 pt 1.64 L
Windshield washer 1 qt 0.95 L
Geared hub 1 pt 0.47 L
Geared fan drive 1.2 pt 0.47 L
1-6 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-12. TABULATED DATA (Cont’d)
Table 1-2.1. Steering System Capacities.
Capacity
System Description
Standard Metric
Serial Numbers Without front hydraulic winch

196901 and 3.3 qt 3.12 L
(with rear differential cooler)
Above (M1113)
(M1151/M1151A1/
M1152/M1152A1/
M1165/M1165A1/ With front hydraulic winch (with 3.7 qt 3.50 L
M1167 without rear differential cooler)
winch only)
Serial Numbers Without rear hydraulic winch

196901 and 3.3 qt 3.12 L
Above
(M1114)
With rear hydraulic winch (with 4.0 qt 3.78 L
rear differential cooler)
Serial Numbers Without front hydraulic winch

196900 and 1.8 qt 1.70 L
(without rear differential cooler)
Below
(M1113)
Without front hydraulic winch 2.7 qt 2.55 L
With front hydraulic winch 2.2 qt 2.10 L

With front hydraulic winch (with 3.1 qt 2.93 L

Serial Numbers Without rear hydraulic winch

196900 and 1.8 qt 1.70 L
Below (M1114)
Without rear hydraulic winch 2.7 qt 2.55 L
With rear hydraulic winch 2.5 qt 2.37 L

With rear hydraulic winch (with 3.4 qt 3.22 L

Change 6 1-6.1/(1-6.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 1-3. General Service Data.
Expected Temperatures
Description
Above +15° F +40° to -15°F +40° to -65°F
(above -9°C) (+4° to -26°C) (+4° to -54°C)
Cooling system 1/2 ethylene 1/2 ethylene 3/5 ethylene

glycol, glycol, glycol,
1/2 water 1/2 water 2/5 water
Engine OE/HDO 30 OE/HDO 10 OEA -30**
Fuel tank DF1, DF2 DF1 DF1, DFA*
All Temp. JP-8

Differentials GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 75
Geared hubs GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 75
Geared Fan Drive GO 80/90 N/A All Temperatures

GO 75 +40° to -65°F
(+4° to -54°C)
Transmission Dexron® VI Dexron® VI Dexron® VI
Transfer case Dexron® VI Dexron® VI Dexron® VI
Steering system Dexron® VI Dexron® VI Dexron® VI

(Serial Numbers)
196900 and Below)
Steering system Dexron® VI Dexron® VI Dexron® VI
(Serial Numbers
196901 and Above)
Brake system Brake Fluid Brake Fluid Brake Fluid
(Serial Numbers Silicone (BFS) Silicone (BFS) Silicone (BFS)
299999 and Below)
Brake system Brake Fluid Master Cylinder: All Temperatures
(Serial Numbers Silicone (BFS) 2.36 pt (1.12 L)
300000 and Above) Complete Systems
3.09 pt (1.46 L)
Windshield 1/3 cleaning 1/2 cleaning 2/3 cleaning

washer compound compound compound
reservoir 2/3 water 1/2 water 1/3 water
* Use below -20°F (-29°C)
** All temperatures +120° to -55°F
Change 6 1-7
TM 9-2320-387-10

Table 1-4. Engine Data.
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 liter diesel, turbocharged, liquid-cooled

Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8(V)
Brake horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 horsepower @ 3,400 rpm
Idle speed (engine rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 ± 25 rpm
Operating speed (engine rpm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,500–2,300 rpm
Oil pressure at idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 psi (69 kPa)
Normal operating oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50 psi (207-345 kPa)
Table 1-5. Cooling System Data.
Surge tank cap pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 psi (103 kPa)

Thermostat:
Starts to open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190°F (88°C)
Fully open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212°F (100°C)
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downflow type
Fan (serial numbers 299999 and below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 blade, 19 in. (48 cm)
Fan (serial numbers 300000 and above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 blade, 23 in. (58 cm)
Normal operating coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185°–250°F (85°-120°C)
Table 1-6. Transmission Data.

General Information
Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turbo Hydra-Matic 4L80-E
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four-speed automatic
Oil type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dexron® VI
Transmission Range Selection
Recommended Shift Lever Position Operating Condition

P (park) Vehicle stopped with parking brake applied.
R (reverse) Clear of traffic and obstructions, using ground

guide.
N (neutral) Vehicle stopped with parking brake applied.
D (overdrive) Normal driving and fording.
D (drive) Hilly terrain and towing a trailer.
2 (second) Hill climbing and engine braking to slow
vehicle when descending steep hills.
1 (first) Maximum engine braking when descending
very steep hills, climbing steep hills, or
driving through deep mud, sand, or snow.
1-8 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 1-7. Transfer Case Data (Serial Numbers 299999 and Below).
General Information
Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Venture Gear
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magna Powertrain (Serial Numbers 300000 and Above)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-speed, locking, chain-driven
Oil type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dexron® VI
CAUTION
Damage to drivetrain will occur if transfer case ranges are
not selected properly. Refer to paragraph 2-13 for specific
instructions on placing vehicle in motion, and to paragraph
2-40 for operating on unusual terrain.
Transfer Case Range Selection
Recommended Shift Lever Position Operating Condition

H (high range) This drive range shall be selected whenever
possible. High range should be used when
operating on all primary, secondary, and off-
road surfaces, where little or no wheel slippage
exists. This range is also to be used when
encountering sharp, continuous turns on high
traction surfaces.
H/L (high/lock range) This drive range shall be selected for off-
highway hilly terrain or when continuous
wheel slippage is evident; i.e., when operating
in mud, snow, loose sand, or on ice, and
increased control or additional traction is
required.
L (low range) This drive range shall be selected only when

high ranges do not provide sufficient power to
negotiate steep hills or downgrades. This range
shall also be used when the vehicle is mired
and cannot be extracted using the high/ lock
range.
N (neutral) Vehicle is disabled and must be towed.
Change 6 1-9
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 1-8. Maximum Vehicle Operating Speeds.

Transmission Transfer Case Range Selection
Range Selection L (Low Range) H (High Range) H/L (High/Lock Range)
R (reverse) 9 mph 23 mph 9 mph
(14 kph) (37 kph) (14 kph)
D (overdrive) 21 mph 55 mph 55 mph
(34 kph) (88 kph) (88 kph)
D (drive) 21 mph 55 mph 55 mph
(34 kph) (88 kph) (88 kph)
2 (second) 15 mph 40 mph 40 mph
(24 kph) (64 kph) (64 kph)
1 (first) 9 mph 23 mph 23 mph
(14 kph) (37 kph) (37 kph)
Table 1-9. Vehicle Dimensions.
Height Minimum
Length Overall Height Overall
Vehicle Reducible
Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
M1113 196.5 499 76 193 56 142
M1114 196.5 499 76 193 76 193
M1151 194 493 79 201 N/A N/A
M1151A1 194 493 80 203 N/A N/A
M1152 194 493 75 191 N/A N/A
M1152A1 194 493 76 193 N/A N/A
M1165 194 493 75 191 N/A N/A
M1165A1 194 493 76.25 193 N/A N/A
M1167 194 493 79 201 N/A N/A
Width Overall Ground Clearance Under Axle
Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
M1113 86 218 17.5 56
M1114 90.5 230 15.5 39
M1151 86 218 16.5 42
M1151A1 87 221 18.1 46
M1152 86 218 16.75 43
M1152A1 87 221 18 46
M1165 86 218 16.5 42
M1165A1 87 221 18.2 46
M1167 86 218 18.1 46
1-10 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

Table 1-10. Vehicle Cruising Range.
NOTE
When vehicle is driven on hard surface and hilly terrain at a
speed of 30-40 mph (48-64 kph), the cruising range shown for each
vehicle can be expected.
Gross Vehicle
Vehicle Cruising Range
Weight (GVW)
M1113 11,500 lb (5,221 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1114 12,100 lb (5,493 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1151 11,500 lb (5,221 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1151A1 12,100 lb (5,493 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1152 11,500 lb (5,221 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1152A1 12,100 lb (5,493 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1165 11,500 lb (5,221 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1165A1 12,100 lb (5,493 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
M1167 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 250 mi (402 km)
Table 1-10.1. Vehicle Payload (Including Crew)

Payload
Vehicle
Standard Metric
M1113 5,100 lb 2,313 kg
M1114 2,300 lb 1,043 kg
M1151 4,000 lb 1,814 kg
M1151A1 3,950 lb 1,792 kg
M1151A1 w/Perimeter B Kit 1,800 lb 816 kg
M1152 5,100 lb 2,313 kg
M1152A1 5,000 lb 2,268 kg
M1152A1 w/Perimeter B Kit 3,340 lb 1,515 kg
M1165 4,950 lb 2,245 kg
M1165A1 4,870 lb 2,209 kg
M1165A1 w/Perimeter B Kit 2,230 lb 1,012 kg
M1167 2,300 lb 1,043 kg
Change 6 1-10.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 1-11. 9,000 lb Winch Data.

Capacities
Max. Load (Fifth Layer) 6,200 lb 2,815 kg
Max. Load (Fourth Layer) 7,000 lb 3,178 kg
Max. Load (Third Layer) 8,000 lb 3,632 kg
Max. Load (Second Layer) 8,500 lb 3,859 kg
Max. Load (First Layer) 9,000 lb 4,086 kg
Table 1-11.1. 10,500 lb Winch Data.

Capacities
Minimum Load 4,700 lb 2,134 kg
Max. Load (Fifth Layer) 5,200 lb 2,361 kg
Max. Load (Fourth Layer) 6,000 lb 2,724 kg
Max. Load (Third Layer) 8,500 lb 3,859 kg
Max. Load (Second Layer) 9,600 lb 4,358 kg
Max. Load (First Layer) 10,500 lb 4,767 kg
1-10.2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 1-12. Curb Weight.
Vehicle Curb Weight

M1113 6,400 lb (2,906 kg)
M1114 9,800 lb (4,449 kg)
M1151 7,500 lb (3,402 kg)
M1151A1 8,150 lb (3,697 kg)
M1152 6,400 lb (2,903 kg)
M1152A1 7,100 lb (3,221 kg)
M1165 6,500 lb (2,971 kg)
M1165A1 7,230 lb (3,279 kg)
M1167 10,800 lb (4,899 kg)
Table 1-13. Vehicle Bridge Classification.
Loaded
Model Empty
Cross-Country Highway
M1113 2 4 4
M1114 3 4 4
ALL
OTHER 2 5 5
VEHICLES
Change 6 1-11
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 1-14. Axle Weight.
Less Payload and Crew
Front Rear Total

Axle Lbs Axle Lbs Lbs
Vehicle (kgs) (kgs) (kgs)
3,450 2,950 6,400
M1113
(1,566) (1,339) (2,906)
4,700 5,100 9,800
M1114
(2,134) (2,315) (4,449)
3,730 3,770 7,500
M1151
(1,692) (1,710) (3,402)
4,110 4,040 8,150
M1151A1
(1,864) (1,833) (3,697)
M1151A1 10,300
4,980 5,320
W/B1 (4,672)
3,450 2,950 6,400
M1152
(1,565) (1,338) (2,903)
3,850 3,250 7,100
M1152A1
(1,746) (1,474) (3,221)
M1152A1 8,760
4,790 3,970
W/B2 (3,973)
3,450 1,100 6,550
M1165
(1,565) (1,406) (2,971)
3,870 3,360 7,230
M1165A1
(1,755) (1,524) (3,279)
M1165A1 9,870
4,900 4,970
W/B3 (4,477)
11,250
M1167 5,360 5,890
(5,103)
1-12 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 1-15. Tire Pressure (Radial Tire) (Load Range D Tire).

Front Rear
Vehicle Standard Metric Standard Metric
psi kPa psi kPa
Unloaded*
M1113, M1151, M1152, M1165 20 138 20 138
M1114, M1151A1, M1151A1 W/B1,
M1152A1, M1152A1 W/B2,
M1165A1, M1165A1 W/B3, M1167 35 241 45 310
At GVW
M1113, M1151, M1152, M1165 30 207 40 138
M1114, M1151A1, M1151A1 W/B1,
M1152A1, M1152A1 W/B2,
M1165A1, M1165A1 W/B3, M1167 40 276 50 345
Mud, Sand, and Snow
(30 mph [48 km] max. speed) 20 138 30 207
*Driver plus one passenger
Table 1-15.1. Tire Pressure (Radial Tire) (Load Range E Tire).

Front Rear
Vehicle Standard Metric Standard Metric
psi kPa psi kPa
Unloaded*
M1113, M1151, M1152, M1165 18 124 25 172
M1114, M1151A1, M1151A1 W/B1,
M1152A1, M1152A1 W/B2,
M1165A1, M1165A1 W/B3, M1167 35 241 45 310
At GVW
M1113, M1151, M1152, M1165 30 207 45 310
M1114, M1151A1, M1151A1 W/B1,
M1152A1, M1152A1 W/B2,
M1165A1, M1165A1 W/B3, M1167 40 138 50 345
Mud, Sand, and Snow
(30 mph [48 km] max. speed) 20 138 30 207
*Driver plus one passenger
Change 6 1-12.1/(1-12.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
Section III. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
1-13. GENERAL
This section explains how components of the ECV series vehicles work together. The
systems (functional groups) covered are listed in the Principles of Operation
Reference Index, paragraph 1-14.
1-14. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION REFERENCE INDEX
REF. TITLE PAGE

PARA. NO.
1-15. Drivetrain Operation 1-14

1-16. Fuel System Operation 1-15
1-17. Cooling System Operation
(Serial Numbers 299999 and Below) 1-16
1-17.1. Cooling System Operation
(Serial Numbers 300000 and Above) 1-16.2
1-18. Starting System Operation 1-18
1-19. Generating System Operation 1-20
(200-Ampere Alternator)
1-20. Battery System Operation 1-22
1-21. Windshield Wiper/Washer System Operation 1-23
1-22. Service/Parking Brake System Operation 1-24
1-23. Service Brake System Operation 1-25
1-24. Steering Control System Operation
(Serial Numbers 299999 and Below) 1-27
1-24.1. Steering Control System Operation
(Serial Numbers 300000 and Above) 1-27
1-25. Suspension System Operation 1-29
1-26. 200-Ampere Umbilical Power Cable 1-31
1-27. Air Conditioning System Operation (M1114) 1-32
1-28. Air Conditioning System Operation 1-33
(Two-Man and Four-Man)
Change 6 1-13
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-15. DRIVETRAIN OPERATION
The drivetrain converts horsepower into mechanical force to move the vehicle. Major
components of the drivetrain are:
A
B C D E
~
F
F
D
E G
A ENGINE – The 6.5 liter V-8 turbocharged engine develops approximately

190 horsepower at 3,400 rpm. Engines equipped for deep water fording have a
specially-sealed dipstick, dipstick tube, and vented CDR valve.
B TRANSMISSION – Adapts engine power to meet different driving

conditions. The automatic transmission has four forward speeds, a reverse, a
neutral and a park. A neutral safety switch prevents the vehicle from being
started with the transmission in any selector lever position except park and
neutral.
C TRANSFER CASE – Directs engine-to-transmission power to front and rear

differentials simultaneously. This condition means the vehicle is always in
four-wheel drive. The transfer case allows for selection of three drive ranges
and a neutral position. (See table 1-7).
D PROPELLER SHAFTS – Link transfer case to differentials. Universal

joints, located at either end of the front and rear propeller shafts, permit
inline driving power between the transfer case and differentials even though
they are mounted at different angles.
E HALFSHAFTS – Transmit power from differentials to geared hubs.
F DIFFERENTIALS – Transmit driving power, via halfshafts and geared

hubs, to left and right wheels. The differential ensures power is applied to
the wheel having traction. This feature is called torque biasing.
G GEARED HUBS – Serve as the front wheel steering spindle and act as the
final drive components to front and rear wheels.
1-14 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-16. FUEL SYSTEM OPERATION

The diesel fuel system stores, cleans, and supplies fuel for the engine. Major
components of the fuel system are:
A FUEL PUMP – Draws fuel from fuel tank through the supply line and
pumps it to the fuel filter.
B FUEL RETURN LINE – Directs unused fuel from the injection pump back
to the fuel tank.
C FUEL SUPPLY LINE – Directs fuel from fuel tank to the system.
D FUEL TANK – Stores 25 gallons (95 liters) of diesel fuel.
E FUEL FILLER CAP – Located at right rear side of vehicle, the cap is
removed to permit fuel tank servicing.
F FUEL INJECTORS – Receive metered fuel from the injection pump and
sprays fuel into the combustion chamber.
G FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR – Filters water and sediment from

fuel before fuel enters the injection pump.
H INJECTION PUMP – Directs metered and pressurized fuel to the eight

injector nozzles. It is mounted on top of the engine under the intake
manifold.
1-15
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-17. COOLING SYSTEM OPERATION

(SERIAL NUMBERS 299999 AND BELOW)
The cooling system removes excess heat from the engine, engine oil, transfer case
oil, and transmission oil. Major components of the cooling system are:
A ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENDING UNIT – Sends signal indicating

coolant temperature to gauge on instrument cluster.
B ENGINE TEMPERATURE SWITCH – Sends signal to activate control

valve system to operate fan when engine temperature exceeds 220°F (104°C)
and deactivates control valve system when engine temperature drops below
190°F (88°C).
C WATER CROSSOVER – Collects coolant from cylinder heads and channels
it to the thermostat housing where it is redirected through the cooling
system.
D THERMOSTAT – Shuts off coolant return flow to radiator until

temperature reaches 190°F (88°C). Coolant is then directed to the radiator
through the radiator inlet hose.
E RADIATOR – Directs coolant through a series of fins and baffles so outside

air can dissipate excess engine heat before the coolant is recirculated
through the engine.
F OIL COOLER – Directs engine oil (lower half of cooler) and transmission
oil (upper half of cooler) through a series of fins or baffles so outside air can
remove heat from oil.
G SURGE TANK – Filling and expansion point for cooling system.
H PERSONNEL HEATER – Provides heat for personnel and interior of

vehicle.
1-16 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
I FAN – Pulls outside air through radiator to remove heat from coolant.
J HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE – Directs hydraulic fluid to provide

required pressure to actuate fan clutch as required by engine temperature.
Hydraulic pressure supplied by power steering pump.
K TIME DELAY MODULE – Sends delayed signal to fan clutch solenoid for
delay of fan actuation to provide needed horsepower for engine acceleration.
L FAN CLUTCH SOLENOID – Actuates hydraulic control valve as required

by coolant temperature.
M WATER PUMP – Driven by serpentine belt, provides circulation of coolant

through cooling system.
N FAN CLUTCH – Hydraulically actuated by pressure from hydraulic control

valve to control operation of fan. Hydraulic pressure supplied by power
steering pump.
O DRAINVALVE – Draining point for radiator and cooling system.
P RADIATOR SHROUD – Permits a greater concentration of air to be pulled

through the radiator.
Change 6 1-16.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-17.1. COOLING SYSTEM OPERATION

(SERIAL NUMBERS 300000 AND ABOVE)
The cooling system removes excess heat from the engine, engine oil, transfer case
oil, and transmission oil. Major components of the cooling system are:
B C D
A
F E
H
G
A TRANSFER CASE – Directs engine coolant through a series of fins or
baffles so coolant can remove heat from transfer case oil.
B ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENDING UNIT – Sends signal indicating

coolant temperature to gauge on instrument cluster.
C WATER CROSSOVER – Collects coolant from cylinder heads and channels

it to the thermostat housing where it is redirected through the cooling
system.
D THERMOSTAT – Shuts off coolant return flow to radiator until

temperature reaches 190°F (88°C). Coolant is then directed to the radiator
through the radiator inlet hose.
E RADIATOR – Directs coolant through a series of fins and baffles so outside

air can dissipate excess engine heat before the coolant is recirculated
through the engine.
F OIL COOLER – Directs engine oil (lower half of cooler) and transmission
oil (upper half of cooler) through a series of fins or baffles so outside air can
remove heat from oil.
G SURGE TANK – Filling and expansion point for cooling system.
H DIFFERENTIAL COOLER – Directs engine coolant through a series of

fins or baffles so coolant can remove heat from differential oil.
1-16.2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
L
M
J
K
I WATER PUMP – Driven by serpentine belt, provides circulation of coolant

through cooling system.
J DRAINVALVE – Draining point for radiator and cooling system.
K GEARED FAN DRIVE – Transmits engine power and torque to drive the
radiator cooling fan and clutch.
L FAN – Pulls outside air through radiator to remove heat from coolant.
M TWO-PIECE RADIATOR SHROUD – Permits a greater concentration of

air to be pulled through the radiator.
Change 6 1-17
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-18. STARTING SYSTEM OPERATION
The starting system consists of the following components and circuits:
1-18
TM9-2320-387-10
ROTARY SWITCH - When in START position, provides battery power to

the starter solenoid and to the neutral start switch through circuit 14.
NEUTRAL STARTER SWITCH - When transmission shiR lever is in P

(park) or N (neutral) position, this switch closes, allowing battery power to
reach the starter solenoid.
PROTECTIVE CONTROL BOX -Acts as a link between body harness

and engine harness.
STARTER SOLENOID -A magnetic relay that transmits 24volt battery

power to the starter motor.
STARTER MOTOR - Cranks the engine for starting, and is supplied

24-volt battery power through circuit 6A
l-19
TM 9-2320-387-10
1- 19. GENERATING SYSTEM OPERATION (200~AMPERE

ALTERNATOR)
The 200-ampere generating system maintains battery charge and provides electrical
power to operate vehicle circuits. Major components of the generating system are:
TM 9-2320-387-10
A BATTERY GAUGE – Indicates electrical system voltage. It is connected to

the electrical system through circuit 567.
B ALTERNATOR (200-AMPERE) – Is a dual volt, rated at 14/28 volts,

200 amperes, with external regulator. The alternator assists and recharges
vehicle batteries during operation.
C PROTECTIVE CONTROL BOX – Protects vehicle electrical system in the

event battery polarity is reversed. Provides load dump, glow plug operation,
and interfacing of engine and body harnesses.
D CIRCUIT 2 – Sends AC signal, indicating alternator shaft rpm, to frequency

switch in protective control box to prevent operation of starter solenoid when
engine is running.
E POSITIVE CABLE 6 – Provides 28-volt alternator output to maintain

charge across two batteries.
F POSITIVE CABLE 68A – Provides 14-volt alternator output to maintain

charge across the lower battery.
G GROUND STRAP – Connects negative stud on alternator with engine

ground strap to provide a ground circuit to alternator.
1-21
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-20. BATTERY SYSTEM OPERATION
The battery system consists of the following circuits and components:
A CIRCUIT 6A – Connects batteries (through buss bar) to starter and

protective control box through circuit 74A.
BATTERIES – Two 6TN batteries are connected in a series to provide 24
B
volts DC for the electrical starting system and to assist alternator during
operation.
C BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE – Connects battery positive to buss bar.
24 VOLT MAIN POSITIVE BUSS BAR – Provides a primary junction for

D
24 volt circuits.
12 AND 24 VOLT TERMINAL BOARDS – (Optional on M114) Provides
E
circuit protected 12 or 24 volt auxiliary power for accessories.
SLAVE RECEPTACLE – Links an external power source directly to slaved
F vehicle’s batteries to assist in cranking engine when vehicle’s batteries are
not sufficiently charged.
12 VOLT AUXILIARY POWER OUTLET – (Optional) Provides circuit
G
protected 12 volt power to compatible accessories.
SHUNT – Used when measuring current draw from batteries utilizing
H STE/ICE-R.
PROTECTIVE CONTROL BOX – Protects vehicle electrical system in the

I event battery polarity is reversed. Provides frequency lockout, load dump,
glow plug operation, and interfacing of engine and body harness.
NEGATIVE BUSS BAR – Provides adequate grounding points when using

J
external accessories.
K ROTARY SWITCH – When in START position, actuates starter solenoid

through circuits 11A and 74A. When in RUN position, closes circuit 29A to
activate instrument cluster gauges through circuit 27.
L CIRCUIT 7A – Connects starter negative circuit terminal to engine ground

while 7E connects shunt to engine ground.
M STARTER SOLENOID – Actuates starter motor gear to crank vehicle

engine.
1-22 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 6 1-22.1/(1-22.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
i l-21. WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM OPERATION 1

The following miscellaneous components and circuits are not covered in any of
the other electrical systems:
0A WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR - When knob is turned to LOW or HIGH

position, circuit 27 carries battery power to wiper motor to activate
windshield wipers.
0B CIRCUIT 57 - Provides a ground circuit for wiper motor.
0C WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR - When knob is pushed, the washer

motor is activated through circuit 71 to spray water onto windshield.
l-23
TM 9-2320-387-10
l-22. SERVICE/PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION

The parking brake system is a mechanically-actuated system that keeps the vehicle
still once it stops. It also assists in emergency stopping if there is a complete service
brake system failure. Major components of the parking brake system are:
0A PARKING BRAKE ROTORS - Attached to output flanges on rear

differential, rotors prevent output flanges from turning when parking brake
is applied.
0B BRAKE PADS - Apply friction to rotors when hand lever is applied.
0C PARKING BRAKE CALIPERS

hand lever is applied.
- Force brake pads against rotors when
0D PARKING BRAKE CABLES - Connect parking brake hand lever to

equalizer bar.
0E EQUALIZER
rotors.
BAR - Evenly distributes braking pressure to the rear brake
0F PARKING BRAKE ROD - Connects parking brake hand lever to equalizer

bar.
0G PARXING BRAKE HAND LEVER - Permits operator to engage the

parking brake.
0H PARKING BRAKE HAND LEVER ADJUSTING CAP - Permits operator

to make minor tension adjustment of parking brake.
l-24
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-23. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION

The service brake system is an inboard-mounted, four-wheel, disc brake,
hydraulically-assisted system. Major components of the braking system are:
S/N 300000
AND ABOVE
S/N 299999 AND BELOW
A HYDRO-BOOSTER – Converts hydraulic power from the steering pump to

mechanical power to the master cylinder, providing power assist during
braking.
B MASTER CYLINDER/RESERVOIR – Stores brake fluid and converts
mechanical pedal pressure to hydraulic pressure.
C PROPORTIONING VALVE – Provides balanced front-to-rear braking and
activates brake warning lamp in case of brake system malfunction.
D ACCUMULATOR – Stores hydraulic pressure for additional power-assisted

braking in case of loss of pressure in steering system.
E BRAKE PEDAL – Provides operator control for stopping vehicle.
F BRAKE LINKAGE – Directs brake pedal pressure to hydro-booster.
G BRAKE PRESSURE LIMITER – Limits front brake line pressure to

prevent brake lockup.
Change 6 1-25
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-23. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION (Cont’d)
A
A
C
C D
D
C
S/N 299999 AND BELOW B
B
S/N 300000 AND ABOVE
A HYDRAULIC BRAKE LINES – Direct brake fluid under pressure to all

four brake calipers from master cylinder.
B BRAKE CALIPER – Converts hydraulic pressure to mechanical force to

compress brake pads against brake rotors.
C BRAKE ROTOR – Attached to output flange on front and rear differentials,

rotor prevents output flange from turning when brakes are applied.
D BRAKE PADS – Apply friction to brake rotor when brake pedal is

depressed.
1-26 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-24. STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

(SERIAL NUMBERS 299999 AND BELOW)
Major components of the steering system are:
A HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE – Directs hydraulic fluid to provide

required pressure to actuate and deactuate fan clutch as required by engine
temperature. Hydraulic pressure supplied by power steering pump.
B HYDRO-BOOSTER – Converts hydraulic power from the steering pump to
braking.
C SERPENTINE BELT – Transmits mechanical driving power from crank-
shaft drive pulley to steering pump pulley which drives the steering pump.
D POWER STEERING COOLER – Directs power steering fluid through a
series of fins or baffles so outside air can dissipate excess heat before the
fluid is recirculated through the steering system.
E OIL RESERVOIR AND STEERING PUMP – Combined in one unit, the
reservoir serves as an oil filling point and the pump supplies the oil under
pressure throughout the steering system.
F FAN CLUTCH – Hydraulically-actuated by pressure from hydraulic control
valve to control operation of fan. Hydraulic pressure is supplied by the power
steering pump.
Change 6 1-27
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-24. STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

(SERIAL NUMBERS 299999 AND BELOW) (Cont’d)
A STEERING WHEEL – Serves as manual steering control for the operator.
B STEERING COLUMN – Transmits turning effort from steering wheel to

intermediate steering shaft.
C INTERMEDIATE STEERING SHAFT – Permits angle of torque from

steering column to input shaft of power steering gear.
D STEERING GEAR – Converts hydraulic power from steering pump to

mechanical power at pitman arm.
E PITMAN ARM – Transfers steering torque from power steering gear to cen-
ter link.
F TIE ROD ASSEMBLY – Transmits movement from center link to geared hub.
G GEARED HUB – Serves as the pivot point and link for the front wheels via
the tie rod assembly.
H CENTER LINK – Transmits movement from pitman arm to tie rods.
I IDLER ARM – Supports right side of center link.
1-28 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-24.1. STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

(SERIAL NUMBERS 300000 AND ABOVE)
Major components of the steering system are:
F C
E
D
A OIL RESERVOIR – The oil reservoir serves as an oil filling point.
B HYDRO-BOOSTER – Converts hydraulic power from the steering pump to

braking.
C STEERING GEAR – Converts hydraulic power from steering pump to
D POWER STEERING COOLER – Directs power steering fluid through a
series of fins or baffles so outside air can dissipate excess heat before the
fluid is recirculated through the steering system.
E SERPENTINE BELT – Transmits mechanical driving power from crank-
shaft drive pulley to steering pump pulley which drives the steering pump.
F STEERING PUMP – Supplies the oil under pressure throughout the steer-
ing system.
Change 6 1-28.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-24.1. STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

(SERIAL NUMBERS 300000 AND ABOVE) (Cont’d)
A STEERING WHEEL – Serves as manual steering control for the operator.
B STEERING COLUMN – Transmits turning effort from steering wheel to

intermediate steering shaft.
C INTERMEDIATE STEERING SHAFT – Permits angle of torque from

steering column to input shaft of power steering gear.
D STEERING GEAR – Converts hydraulic power from steering pump to

E PITMAN ARM – Transfers steering torque from power steering gear to cen-
ter link.
F TIE ROD ASSEMBLY – Transmits movement from center link to geared hub.
G GEARED HUB – Serves as the pivot point and link for the front wheels via
the tie rod assembly.
H CENTER LINK – Transmits movement from pitman arm to tie rods.
I IDLER ARM – Supports right side of center link.
1-28.2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
I l-25. SUSPENSION SYSTEM OPERATION 1

The suspension system is an independent coil spring-type system. Major
components of the suspension system are:
0A BALL JOINTS - Connect geared hub to control arms, and allow change of
angle between geared hub and control arms during suspension movement.
0
B UPPER CONTROL ARM - Connects geared hub to frame rail.
0
C STABILIZER
cornering.
BAR (FRONT ONLY) - Prevents vehicle sway when
0
D GEARED HUB - Serves as a mounting point for wheel and tire assembly
and provides 1.921 gear reduction to increase torque to wheel and tire
assembly.
0
E LOWER CONTROL ARM - Connects geared hub to crossmember.
0
F SHOCK ABSORBER
of suspension travel.
- Dampens suspension movement and limits amount
0
G COIL SPRING - Supports weight of vehicle and allows suspension travel
to vary depending on terrain and vehicle loading.
l-29
TM 9-2320-387-l 0
l-25. SUSPENSION SYSTEM OPERATION (Cont’d)
0A RADIUS ROD GUWR ONLYI - Connects geared hub to frame to

rear end alignment.
l-30
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-26. 200-AMPERE UMBILICAL POWER CABLE

The 200-ampere umbilical power cable covered in this manual applies to the M1113,
M1152, and M1152A1 and consists of the following major component:
A POWER CABLE – Located behind the companion seat, provides power for
shelter equipment.
Change 6 1-31
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-27. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION (M1114)
Major components of the air conditioning system are:
A COMPRESSOR – Inside the compressor, low-pressure gas refrigerant is

compressed into a high-pressure gas that is pushed into the condenser by
the compressor.
B CONDENSER – Refrigerant enters the condenser as a high-pressure gas.

When condensed, it gives up its heat to the outside air and becomes a
high-pressure liquid.
C EVAPORATOR – Refrigerant enters evaporator as a liquid spray. It

absorbs heat from the air in the crew compartment and vaporizes into a
low-pressure gas.
B
FRONT
REAR
1-32 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1-28. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION (TWO-MAN AND

FOUR-MAN)
Major components of the air conditioning system are:
A COMPRESSOR – Inside the compressor, low-pressure gas refrigerant is

compressed into a high-pressure gas that is pushed into the condenser by
the compressor.
B CONDENSER – Refrigerant enters the condenser as a high-pressure gas.

When condensed, it gives up its heat to the outside air and becomes a
high-pressure liquid.
C EVAPORATOR – Refrigerant enters evaporator as a liquid spray. It

absorbs heat from the air in the crew compartment and vaporizes into a
low-pressure gas.
B
FRONT
REAR
Change 5 1-33/(1-34 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
CHAPTER 2
Section I. DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR’S

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
2-1. KNOW YOUR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Before you attempt to operate your equipment, make sure you are familiar with the
location and function of all controls and indicators. The location and function of
controls and indicators are described in this section.
WARNING
• This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently
within the limits specified in this TM. Operation beyond these
limits is prohibited IAW AR 750-1 without written approval from
the Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments
Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
• Do not use hand throttle as an automatic speed or cruise control.

The hand throttle does not automatically disengage when brake is
applied, resulting in increased stopping distances and possible
hazardous and unsafe operation. Injury to personnel or damage to
equipment may result.
NOTE
• Except where noted, the controls and indicators in this section are
applicable to all vehicle models covered in this manual.
• In this manual, left side indicates the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Right side indicates the opposite side of the vehicle.
Change 3 2-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND EQUIPMENT

a. Driver’s Compartment.
6 7
2 3 4 5 8
10
1 11
12
14
13
M1113, M1114
15
16
ALL OTHER VEHICLES
2-2 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
KEY ITEM AND FUNCTION

1 Rotary switch has ENG STOP, RUN, and START positions. When positioned
to RUN, glow plugs are activated to heat engine precombustion chambers.
When positioned to START, starter will engage and crank engine.
2 Wait-to-start lamp assembly illuminates when glow plugs are activated; goes
out when engine is ready to be started.
3 Brake warning lamp assembly illuminates if parking brake is applied or if a
hydraulic imbalance (leak, etc.) exists between the front and rear brake
systems.
4 Air restriction gauge signals the operator that a restriction exists in the air
cleaner.
5 Engine oil pressure gauge indicates oil pressure when engine is running.
6 High beam lamp assembly illuminates when front headlights are switched to
HIGH beam position.
7 Coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature.
NOTE
Item 8 applies to M1113/M1114 vehicles only.
8 Defroster control knob directs heated air to windshield on the M1113. For the
M1114, control knob directs outside air in for circulation.
9 Instrument panel lights illuminate instrument panel gauges.
NOTE
Items 10 and 11 apply to M1113/M1114 vehicles only.
10 Heater control knob controls the temperature of the air output.
11 Heater fan switch controls blower motor fan speed. The switch has HI (high),
OFF, and LO (low) settings to regulate defroster and heater air flow into
vehicle.
12 Voltmeter indicates the charging level and activity of the battery charging
system.
13 Speedometer/odometer indicates vehicle speed and accumulated mileage.
14 Fuel gauge indicates amount of fuel in fuel tank.
NOTE
Items 15 and 16 apply to M1151/M1151A1/M1152/M1152A1/
M1165/M1165A1/M1167 vehicles only.
15. A/C / Heat switch controls the temperature of air output.
16. Fan switch controls blower motor fan speed.
Change 6 2-3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND EQUIPMENT (Cont’d)
7 8
6
9
5 2
4
2-4 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10

1 Directional signal/emergency flasher indicator light illuminates during
directional signal or emergency flasher use.
2 Hand throttle increases engine speed for use during cold weather starting,
winch operation, deep water fording, and to obtain maximum alternator
output for communications/electrical requirements; is not to be used as an
automatic speed or cruise control.
3 Accelerator pedal is the operator’s foot control for varying engine speed.
4 Service brake pedal is depressed to slow or stop vehicle.
5 Dimmer switch permits the operator to select high or low headlight beam.
6 Light switch controls operation of vehicle service lights and blackout lights.
NOTE
Items 7 through 9 apply to the M1114 vehicle only.
7 Defroster register opens and closes the defroster to direct heated air to
windshield for defrosting.
8 Windshield de-icer switch operates the windshield de-icer by moving the
switch to on or off position.
9 Air conditioner on/off switch allows operation of the air conditioning
compressor, condenser fans, and rear blower fan (rear blower fan will only
operate if fan speed is on high).
Change 2 2-5
TM 9-2320-387-10

1 Directional signal lever activates turn signal lights.
2 Warning hazard control activates the warning flashers.
3 Horn button activates vehicle horn.
4 Baffle operating rods slide open to allow heated air into crew compartment.
5 Fresh air intake lever (M1113/M1114) is pulled back to allow fresh air into
crew compartment, or pushed forward to close.
6 Simplified Test Equipment/Internal Combustion Engine-Reprogrammable
(STE/ICE-R) diagnostic connector is attaching point for the Vehicle Test Meter
(VTM) to facilitate vehicle electrical and engine systems diagnoses.
7 Transmission indicator lamp comes on when ignition switch is turned on, and
goes off when vehicle is started and is also used to flash diagnostic trouble
codes when Transmission Control Module (TCM) is placed in diagnostic mode.
8 Transmission shift lever is used to select vehicle driving range, P (park),
R (reverse), N (neutral), D (overdrive), D (drive), 2 (second), and 1 (first).
9 Transfer case shift lever is used to select vehicle driving range, H/L (high/lock
range), H (high range), N (neutral), and L (low range).
10 Transfer case indicator lamp illuminates when transfer case has completed
the low-range shift and high/lock-range shift.
11 Parking brake lever is used to apply parking brake. Safety release button
must be depressed to release parking brake.
12 Fording control switch (M1113/M1151/M1152) (deep water fording kit only)
allows operator to select VENT during normal operating conditions or DEEP
FORD for deep water fording.
13 Steering wheel lock cable permits steering wheel to be locked to prevent
unauthorized use of vehicle.
2-6 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

14 Windshield washer/wiper control
knob operates a two-speed electric
wiper motor; when depressed,
operates windshield washer.
14
15 16
17
17 Battery box latches release to

permit removal of companion seat
for access to batteries.
18 Batteries provide 24-volt power to
18 vehicle electrical system.
15 Companion seat is removed to 19 Slave receptacle is located at
provide access to batteries. outside front of battery box. It is
16 Optional 12-volt auxiliary power the connecting point for the slave
outlet provides 12-volt power to cable for slave-starting the
accessories. vehicle.
19
Change 6 2-7
TM 9-2320-387-10
KEY ITEM AND FUNCTION 1

1 Engine access cover is removed to
provide access to rear of engine.
2 Radio rack serves as mounting
point for AN/GRC-121.3 or
AN/VRC-91 radio.
3 2
3 Microphone bracket serves as mounting point for microphone.

4 Catch assembly holds M16A2/A4 rifle safely in place for travel. Adjustable
catch assembly configuration holds M16A2/A4 rifle when positioned all the
way in, or M203 grenade launcher when extended out.
5 Stock brace holds stock end of M16A2/A4 rifle or M203 grenade launcher in
position for travel.
6 Driver’s seat adjusters permit driver’s seat to be adjusted in forward,
rearward, up, or lower positions.
7 First aid kit is used for crew emergency first aid treatment. Actual location
shall be determined by mission profile.
8 Fire extinguisher is located on the side of the driver’s seat.
4 4
5
5
6
7 8 ALL OTHER
M1114
VEHICLES
2-8 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
8.1

8.1. Front Blower Assembly for M1114 consists of a fan blower and evaporator
that blows cool air through the A/C vents located in the front of the passenger
compartment.
8.2. Rear Blower Assembly for M1114 consists of a fan blower and evaporator that
blows cool air from the rear of the passenger compartment when the A/C
switch is on and blower switch is on high.
8.2
Change 3 2-8.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

8.3. Front Blower Assembly for M1151/M1151A1/M1152/M1152A1/
M1165/M1165A1/M1167 consists of a fan blower, heater and evaporator that
blows air through the vents located in the front of the passenger
compartment when the heater switch is on high or low.
8.4. Rear Blower Assembly for M1151/M1151A1/M1152/M1152A1/
M1165/M1165A1/M1167 consists of a fan blower and evaporator that blows
cold air through the A/C vents located on the rear blower assembly when the
heater switch is on high or low.
8.3
8.4
2-8.2/(2-8.3 blank) Change 6

TM 9-2320-387-10

8.5. Automatic fire extinguishing system master control module for M1114/
M11151A1/M1152A1/M1165A1/M1167 is located on the driver’s side of the
radio rack; allows for visual and physical access to check system status, reset
after discharge and power removal during maintenance operations.
8.6. Automatic fire extinguishing system sensors for M1114/M11151A1/
M1152A1/M1165A1/M1167 are located in the crew area (two-man, four-man)
and cargo area (four-man) of the vehicle.
8.7. Automatic fire extinguishing system extinguishers for M1114/M11151A1/
M1152A1/M1165A1/M1167 are located in the crew area (two-man, four-man)
and cargo area (four-man) of the vehicle.
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.7
TWO MAN
2-8.4 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.7
FOUR MAN
Change 5 2-8.5
TM 9-2320-387-10

8.8. The AFES system is powered only when the engine run switch is in the ON
position. When all sensors and extinguishers are properly connected, the
control module SYSTEM OK lamp will show continuous green.
8.9. A gauge on the valve indicates extinguisher pressure. Normal extinguisher
pressure is 900 psi at 70° F. Minimum operational pressures at various
temperatures are indicated on the extinguisher and in table 2-2.
8.8
8.9
2-8.6 Change 6
qj=VJOPOMJPUTJNM

hbv fqbj=^ka=crk`qflk
1 (

"

;

9
(& (

"

<

=

10
(( ,

"%

#"

<

=
11
B

`Ü~åÖÉ=N OJV
TM 9-2320-387-10
KEY ITEM AND FUNCTION 1

1 Engine oil filler cap (located
front center of engine) is
removed from oil filler neck to
add oil to engine.
2 Engine oil dipstick is located

behind alternator on left side of
engine; is removed to check
engine oil level.
2
M1113, M1151, AND M1152
VEHICLES WITH DEEP WATER
FORDING KIT
2-10 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

3 Radiator drainvalve (located beneath right front of engine on lower radiator
crossover pipe) is turned counterclockwise to drain coolant from radiator.
4 Coolant surge tank cap (located right rear of engine) is removed from surge
tank to add coolant to cooling system.
Change 1 2-11
TM 9-2320-387-10

1 Fuel filter (located left rear of engine on firewall) filters water from fuel
system.
2 Windshield washer reservoir cap (located left rear of engine) unsnaps to add
windshield washer fluid to reservoir.
3 Fuel filter drainvalve (located left rear of engine compartment on cowl,
beneath and in front of windshield washer reservoir) is draining point for
water collected in fuel filter.
4 Master cylinder cover (located left of engine) is removed to fill and/or check
brake fluid level.
4
1
5 Air cleaner assembly (located

right rear of engine) houses air 5
cleaner element which filters dirt
and dust from air before it enters
combustion chamber.
6 Air cleaner dump valve, when
squeezed, releases dirt, mud, or
water from air cleaner body
assembly.
6
2-12 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
c. Vehicle Exterior.
9
10
11
13
12
M1113, M1152, 9
M1152A1, M1165,
M1165A1, M1167

7 Tailgate chains and hooks secure tailgate to rear of vehicle body.
8 Tailgate opens and closes to allow access to vehicle cargo area.
9 Lifting shackles (located at front and rear of vehicle) are used to lift or
tie down vehicle.
10 Trailer receptacle provides electrical power for towed equipment.
11 Towing pintle (rear bumper) provides connection point for towing.
12 Pintle pin locks pintle latch to towing pintle.
13 Pintle latch pulls up to open towing pintle; pushes down to lock towing
pintle.
Change 6 2-13
TM 9-2320-387-10

1 Windshield folddown hinges (M1113, M1152) are used as a hinge point when
lowering windshield. Hinge pins are removed when detaching windshield
assembly.
2 Hitch pin and hinge pin (M1113, M1152) are removed to allow windshield to
be lowered or detached.
3 Windshield hinges (M1113, M1152) secure windshield in the raised (up)
position with hinge pins installed. Hinge pins are removed when lowering or
detaching windshield.
4 Fuel tank filler cap (located at right rear side of
vehicle) is removed to permit fuel servicing.
5 Fuel door (M1114) (located at right
rear side of vehicle) covers fuel tank filler
cap.
2-14 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

6 Hood latches (one on each side of hood) unlatch to release hood.
7 Hood support rod (on left side of vehicle) supports hood in the raised position.
2-15
TM 9-2320-387-10
WARNING
Do not attempt to operate cargo shell door forward latch. The
cargo shell door is not to be opened from inside the vehicle.
Opening cargo shell door from inside the vehicle may cause
damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
NOTE
Items 1 through 7 apply to M1114 and M1151A1 vehicles w/perimeter
B-Kit armor only.
1 Cargo shell door strap serves as a grab strap to lower cargo shell door.
2 Cargo shell door assist cylinders provide a lift boost for raising and holding
cargo shell door open.
3 Cargo shell door when door rear latch is released, door opens forward and
permits access to cargo area from rear of vehicle for stowing.
4 Cargo shell door rear latch is pulled upward to open cargo shell door from
rear of vehicle.
5 Cargo shell door retaining cables limit cargo shell door travel when opened
from either end.
5.1 Rear hatch support rod serves as an additional support for keeping cargo
shell door open.
6 C-pillar/partition door handle(s) and locking mechanism(s) serve(s) to open
or close, lock or unlock the cargo C-pillar/partition door.
7 C-pillar/partition door(s) provide(s) access from the crew compartment to
cargo shell.
2-16 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
5
5.1
7 7
6
M1114
ONLY
M1151A1
W/PERIMETER
B-KIT ARMOR
Change 5 2-17
TM 9-2320-387-10
d. Up-Armored (M1114) and Armament Carrier (M1151/M1151A1)

Equipment.

1 Gunner’s backrest provides back support for a gunner positioned in weapon
station.
2 Weapon station hatch cover provides sealed protective covering for roof
opening when weapons are not mounted to weapon station.
3 Hatch cover handle is grab handle to assist gunner in opening and closing
station cover.
NOTE
Items 4 and 5 apply to M1114 vehicles only.
4 Rods attached to cover serve to secure cover in the open position.

5 Catch blocks serve to support rods on weapon station while in the open
position.
6 Gunner’s sling serves as seat rest or restraint for a gunner positioned in
weapon station.
7 Hatch cover securing latches (three each) secure cover to weapon station.
8 Weapon station brake handle locks the weapon station at the gunner’s
desired azimuth. Handle is placed in the down position for locking.
NOTE
Some M1114 vehicles are equipped with a newly configured turret
brake assembly.
9 Armament mount is mounting bracket for weapon adapter.

10 Universal weapons adapter pin assembly secures weapon adapter to the
armament mount.
11 Universal weapons adapter provides mounting base for the MK19 automatic
grenade launcher, M2, caliber .50 machine gun; M60, 7.62 mm machine gun;
M240B, 7.62 mm machine gun; and M249, 5.56 mm Squad Assault
Weapon (SAW).
12 Weapon station serves as rotating mounting platform for weapon
components; can be continuously rotated 360°.
NOTE
Items 12.1 through 12.3 apply to M1151 and M1151A1 vehicles only.
12.1 Hatch Cover Retaining Latch secures the latch catch for retaining station
cover in the open position.
12.2 Hatch Cover Retaining Catch is the connecting point for retaining latch.
12.3 Turret Positioning Handle provides positive right-hand grip to rotate weapon
station.
2-18 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
3
2
1 4
5 NEW CONFIGURATION
7
8
12
11
9
10
M1114
2
3 9
12.2
8 11
7
12.1
1
10
12
12.3
M1151/M1151A1
Change 5 2-18.1/(2-18.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10

13 lFauersin.g Unit (TV,, mount adapter adapts TU to the TU stowage pedestal
or weapon station pedestal mount.
14 lYaver.sing unit stowage pedestal provides mounting base for TU mount
adapter.
15 Lower traversing unit mount adapter clamp secures TU mount adapter to the
stowage pedestal or weapon station pedestal mount.
16 Upper traversing unit mount adapter clamp secures TU to TU mount
adapter.
17 Camouflage screen stowage straps (four each) secure camouflage screen and
support to tailgate.
2-19
TM 9-2320-387-l 0

1 Rear seat stowage compartment net secures extra gear and ammo in crew
compartment.
2 Hatch stowate net secures three duffel bags to vehicle hatch.
f
‘I -7
a
I
I n n
II
d
2
2-20
TM 9-2320-387-10

3 Water can footman loop and strap secure water can to bracket.
4 Water can bracket provides stowage base for f&-gallon water can.
5 Fuel can footman loops and straps secure two fuel cans to fuel can stowage
brackets.
6 Fuel can stowage brackets permit stowage of two fuel cans.
7 Stowage compartment net secures items stowed in vehicle cargo area.
2-21
TM 9-2320-387-10

1 Ammo box racks provides stowage base for three 40 mm ammo boxes.
2 Ammo box footman loops and straps (two each) secure three 40 mm ammo
boxes to ammo box rack.
3 Ammo box racks serve as stowage base for two caliber .50 ammo boxes.
4 Ammo box footman loops and straps (two each) secure caliber .50 ammo
boxes.
5 Gunner platform provides a non-slip platform for gunner.
NOTE
Items 6 through 8 apply to the adjustable gunner platform only.
6 Adjustable gunner platform locking pins (two each) secure gunner platform to
selected height risers.
7 Adjustable gunner platform locking lugs and holes (two each) secure gunner
platform to fully lowered position when locking pin is installed.
8 Adjustable gunner platform risers provide support and height adjustment for
gunner platform.
3
1
4
7 5
8
ADJUSTABLE GUNNER PLATFORM
STATIONARY GUNNER PLATFORM

2-22 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
10 11 12
9
13
14
15

NOTE
Items 9 through 15 apply to M1151 and M1151A1 vehicles only.
9 Spare barrel and cleaning kit footman loops and straps (two each) secure
spare barrel and cleaning kit for M2, caliber .50 machine gun.
10 Ammo box rack provides stowage base for caliber .50 ammo box.
11 Ammo box footman loop and strap secure caliber .50 ammo box to ammo box
rack.
12 Water can footman loop and strap secure 5 gal. water can to water can
bracket.
13 Water can bracket provides stowage base for 5 gal. water can.
14 Ammo box rack provides stowage base for three 40 mm ammo boxes.
15 Tripod mounting brackets and straps (two each) provide stowage for M3
tripod.
Change 5 2-22.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

NOTE
Items 1 through 7 apply to M1151 and M1151A1 vehicles only.
1 Ammo box rack serves as stowage base for two caliber .50 ammo boxes.
2 Ammo box footman loops and straps (two each) secure two caliber .50 ammo
boxes to ammo box rack.
3 Night sight case stowage brackets (two each) provide mounting for night sight
case.
4 Night sight case footman loops and straps (two each) secure night sight case
to night sight stowage brackets.
5 Water can bracket provides stowage base for 5 gal. water can.
6 Antiskid strips (nine each) prevent cargo from sliding around in the cargo
area.
7 Stowage compartment net secures cargo to the cargo floor and limits
movement of cargo during vehicle operation.
2-22.2 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1 2 3
Change 5 2-22.3
TM 9-2320-387-10
e. S250 Shelter Carrier Equipment.

CAUTION
Shelter carriers are specifically designed to be operated with the S250
shelter installed. However they can be driven safely without the
shelter or an equivalent payload of 1,500 lb (681 kg) for short
distances (e.g., to and from maintenance, or from the railhead when
being delivered), but this should not be done often or for long
distances. Driving for long distances without the shelter installed, or
equivalent payload of 1,500 lb (681 kg) evenly distributed in center of
cargo area, will cause damage to equipment.
1 Shelter reinforcement brackets (four each) secure S250 shelter carrier to
vehicle body.
2 Rear suspension tiedown kit is used to compress rear suspension to obtain an
overall vehicle height of 102 in. (259 cm).
2-22.4 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
f. Troop/Cargo Winterization Kit Equipment.

1 Heater control assembly operates heater and controls blower motor speed.
2 Heater guard assembly protects personnel from accidental contact with hot
heater components.
3 Heater provides a flow of heated air to interior of troop/cargo enclosure
assembly.
4 Heater deflector directs heated air from heater to all areas of troop/cargo
enclosure assembly.
5 Circuit breaker protects heater assembly from damage caused by electrical
overloading. The circuit breaker is waterproof and automatically resets.
1
2
Change 6 2-22.5
TM 9-2320-387-10
g. TOW ITAS Carrier Equipment.
WARNING
Never open one end of the cargo shell door without first ensuring that
the opposite end is securely closed. Not doing so may cause both ends
to open at the same time causing damage to equipment, mission abort,
or injury to personnel.
NOTE
This manual identifies HMMWV equipment which permits the
mounting and operation of the Improved Target Acquisition System,
M41 (ITAS). Specific instructions for employing the Improved Target
Acquisition System, M41 (ITAS) on the HMMWV are covered in
FM 3-22.32.
1 Cargo shell door is a double-actuating door which pivots at either end. When
door forward latch is released from inside vehicle, door opens rearward and
functions TOW ITAS M41 loader’s door to facilitate mounting of TOW ITAS
launcher and missile loading. When door rear latch is released, door opens
forward and permits access to cargo area from rear of vehicle for stowing
TOW ITAS launcher and equipment or ground mounting TOW ITAS
launcher.
2 Tripod legs mounting straps secure tripod to mounting bracket.
3 Tripod legs mounting bracket provides stowage for tripod.
4 Launch tube mounting straps (two each) located on left and right side of
missile rack secure TOW ITAS launch tube to missile rack tier.
5 Tier mounting straps (three each) located on left and right sides of missile
rack secure three missile rounds to second tier of rack.
6 Missile rack tier locking pins secure tier of missile rack to base of missile
rack.
7 Missile rack support braces (two each) support rack tier and pivot to outside
to allow easy access to missiles for stowage or reloading.
8 Missile stowage rack provides stowage for six TOW ITAS missile rounds. It
consists of a base and a first tier. Tiers pivot upward to facilitate missile
stowage and quick access to missiles during reload operations. Missiles
stowed between rack base and first tier are held in without straps. Missiles
mounted on top of the first tier are secured with straps located left and right
sides of rack.
9 Missile guidance set (LBB) battery stowage box provides stowage for the LBB
battery.
2-22.6 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2
3
9 4
5
8 6
7
Change 6 2-22.7
TM 9-2320-387-10

10 Missile guidance set retaining straps (four each) secure MGS to MGS weapon
station mounting plate.
11 Missile guidance set weapon station mounting plate is mounting point for the
MGS when the TOW ITAS launcher is assembled on the weapon station.
12 Weapon station pedestal mount cover protects pedestal mount opening when
TOW ITAS launcher is not mounted.
13 Weapon station pedestal mount is mounting point for TU adapter bracket and
TOW ITAS launcher.
14. Weapon station hatch cover provides sealed protective covering for roof
opening when TOW ITAS is not mounted to weapon station.
15 Weapon station serves as rotating mounting platform for TOW ITAS
components during the launcher mode of operation. It can be continuously
rotated 360° without vehicle power conditioner (VPC) cables connected.
11
10
12
13
14
2-22.8 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
15
Change 6 2-23
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
2-3. GENERAL
NOTE
The army has an agreement with the door manufacturer to issue free
patch kits to repair armor doors that exhibit cracks originating from
the window area (M1114 doors only). If you find cracks within 1.25 in.
(31.75 mm) from either side or 6.25 in. (158.75 mm) below the window
opening, notify unit maintenance.
1.25 in. 1.25 in.
6.25 in.
A permanent record of the services, repairs, and modifications made to these

vehicles must be recorded. See DA Pam 750-8 for a list of the forms and records
required and how to complete them.
2-4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES

REFERENCE INDEX
REF. PAGE
TITLE
PARA. NO.
2-5. Cleaning Instructions 2-24

2-6. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) 2-27
2-7. Fluid Leakage 2-28
2-8. Lubrication Requirements 2-28
2-5. CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS

a. Cleaning. An after operation service performed by the operator/crew
to keep the vehicle in a state of readiness. Facilities and material available to
operators for vehicle cleaning can vary greatly in differing operating conditions.
However, vehicles must be maintained in as clean a condition as available cleaning
equipment, materials, and tactical situations permit.
2-24 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
.WARNING .
• Drycleaning solvent is flammable and will not be used near an open
flame. A fire extinguisher will be kept nearby when the solvent is
used. Use only in well-ventilated places. Failure to do this may
result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.
• Protective gloves, clothing, and/or respiratory equipment must be
worn whenever caustic, toxic, or flammable cleaning solutions are
used. Failure to do this may result in injury to personnel and/or
damage to equipment.
CAUTION
• Do not allow cleaning compounds to come into contact with rubber,
leather, vinyl, or canvas materials. Damage to equipment will result.
• Do not use compressed air when cleaning vehicle interiors. Damage
to equipment will result.
• Do not allow water to enter air cleaner assembly air intake
weathercap. Damage to engine will occur.
b. Cleaning Instructions for Ballistic Glass.
CAUTION
• Do not clean interior surfaces of ballistic glass by any other means
than specified below.
• Do not use a scraper or other objects with sharp edges that may
scratch the inside surfaces of ballistic glass.
• Do not apply stickers, labels, solvents, abrasive materials, or
cleaners to ballistic glass.
(1) Remove dust and loose abrasive particles using clean, filtered air at 20 psi
(138 kPa) maximum.
(2) Wash with mild detergent and warm water. Dry using a clean, soft, lint-free
cloth.
(3) Remove stubborn marks and stains using a clean, soft, lint-free cloth and
equal parts of isopropyl alcohol or ethanol and water.
(4) Repeat step 2.
NO TE
Clean windshield wipers of debris on a regular basis to ensure proper
vision.
c. Deleted.
d. General Guidelines. Table 2-1 provides a general guide of cleaning
materials used in removing contaminants from various parts of the vehicle.
Change 6 2-25
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-5. CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS (Cont’d)

Table 2-1. General Cleaning Instructions.
Cleaning Materials Used to Remove
Surface Oil/Grease Salt/Mud/Dust/Debris Surface Rust/Corrosion
Body Detergent; water; rags. Soapy water; soft brush; Corrosion-removing com-
damp and dry rags. pound; bristle brush; dry
rags; lubricating oil.*
Vehicle Interior Detergent; damp and Damp and dry rags. Corrosion-removing com-
(Metals) dry rags. pound; bristle brush; dry
Glass Window cleaning Window cleaning Not applicable.
compound; dry rags. compound; dry rags.
Ballistic Glass Detergent; soapy water; Detergent; soapy water; Not applicable.
dry rags. dry rags.
Plastic Windows Soapy water; cream Soapy water; cream Not applicable.
cleaner; dry rags.*** cleaner; dry rags.***
Vehicle Interior Water; damp and dry Soapy water; damp and Not applicable.
(Seats and Straps) rags. dry rags.
Frame Detergent rinsed with Soapy water; damp and Corrosion-removing com-
water; dry rags. dry rags. pound; wire brush; dry
Engine and Drycleaning solvent; Soapy water; soft wire Bristle brush; warm
Transmission water; rags. brush; damp and dry rags. water; dry rags.
Radiator Not applicable. Low pressure water or Not applicable.
air; soapy water; damp
and dry rags.
Oil Cooler Not applicable. Low pressure water or Not applicable.
air; soapy water; damp
and dry rags.**
Master Cylinder Detergent; rinsed with Soapy water; damp and Not applicable.
soapy water; dry rags. dry rags.
Rubber Damp and dry rags. Damp and dry rags. Not applicable.
Insulation
Tires Soapy water; damp rags. Soapy water; damp rags. Not applicable.
Wood Detergent; water; Low pressure water; Not applicable.
damp and dry rags. soapy water; damp and
dry rags.
* After cleaning, apply light grade of lubricating oil to all unprotected surfaces to prevent
continued rust.
** If more space is needed to clean mud and debris between the oil cooler and radiator, refer
to unit maintenance.
Operator may perform this cleaning procedure under the supervision
of unit level maintenance.
***After cleaning window zippers, apply zipper lubricant (appendix D, item 19).
2-26
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)

a. Designated Intervals.
NO TE
Designated intervals are performed under usual operating conditions.
PMCS intervals must be performed more frequently when operating
under unusual conditions.
(1) BEFORE checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE must be
performed prior to placing vehicle or its components in operation.
(2) DURING checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE must be
performed while the vehicle and/or its components/systems are in operation.
(3) AFTER checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are
performed upon completion of mission.
(4) WEEKLY checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are
performed once every 7 days.
(5) MONTHLY checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are
performed once every 30 days.
b. Procedures.
(1) For troubleshooting malfunctions, refer to table 3-1 or notify your
supervisor.
(2) Use DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E (automated) and report malfunctions
to unit maintenance at once.
(3) Tools included with vehicle are to be used when making PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE checks and services. Wiping cloths are needed to remove dirt or grease.
(4) Refer to appropriate TMs for PMCS requirements on mounted systems
(i.e., missiles systems, radios, etc.).
c. Troublespots.
NO TE
Dirt, grease, oil, and debris may cover up a serious problem. Clean as
you check. Following precautions printed on container, use
drycleaning solvent (SD-3) on all metal surfaces. On rubber or plastic
material, use soap and water.
(1) Check all bolts, nuts, and screws. If loose, bent, broken, or missing, either
tighten or report conditions to unit maintenance.
(2) Look for loose or chipped paint, and rust or cracks at welds. Remove rust
and loose paint, and spot-paint as required. If a cracked weld is found, report situation
to unit maintenance.
(3) Inspect electrical wires and connectors for cracked or broken insulation.
Also look for bare wires and loose or broken connections. Tighten loose connections.
Report other problems to unit maintenance.
(4) Check hoses and fluid lines for wear, damage, and leaks. Ensure clamps and
fittings are tight. (Refer to para. 2-7 for information on leaks.)
(5) Check hinges for security and operation.
(6) Check data, caution, and warning plates for security and legibility.
Change 1 2-27
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)

(Cont’d)
d. Not Ready/Available. If a vehicle is not able to perform the mission,

equipment will be reported as not ready/available. Refer to DA Pam 750-8.
e. Correct Assembly or Stowage. Check each component for installation as
an assembly, that it is in the right place, and has no missing parts.
2-7. FLUID LEAKAGE
Wetness around seals, gaskets, fittings, or connections indicates leakage. A stain

also denotes leakage. If a fitting or connector is loose, tighten it. If broken or
defective, report it. Use the following as a guide:
a. Class I. Leakage indicated by wetness or discoloration, but not great enough
to form drops.
b. Class II. Leakage great enough to form drops, but not enough to cause drops
to drip from item being checked/inspected.
c. Class III. Leakage great enough to form drops that fall from the item being
checked/inspected.
CAUTION
Operation is allowable with class I or II leakage except for brake
system. Any brake fluid leakage must be reported. WHEN IN DOUBT,
NOTIFY YOUR SUPERVISOR. When operating with class I or II
leaks, check fluid levels more frequently. Class III leaks must be
reported immediately to your supervisor or to unit maintenance.
Failure to do this may result in damage to vehicle and/or components.
2-8. LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS

For lubrication requirements and procedures, refer to appendix G.
2-28 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services.
Location
Item Crewmember Not Fully Mission
Interval Item to
No. Check/ Procedure Capable If:
Service
WARNING
Always remember the
WARNINGS, CAU-
TIONS, and NOTES
before operating this
vehicle and prior to
PMCS.
NOTE
Perform your before, after,
and weekly checks if:
a. You are the assigned
driver but have not operated
the vehicle since the last
weekly inspection.
b. You are operating the
vehicle for the first time.
c. See separate manual for
TOW ITAS PMCS.
DRIVER
1 Before Left Front, CAUTION
Side If leaks are detected in
Exterior the area of the transfer
case oil cooler, do not
attempt to tighten
retaining nuts; internal
damage to the transfer
case oil cooler may result.
NOTE
If leakage is detected,
further investigation is
needed to determine the
location and cause of
the leak.
a. Visually check underneath a. Any brake fluid

vehicle for any evidence of leaks; class III leak
fluid leakage. of oil, fuel, or
coolant.
Change 6 2-29
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont’d).

Location
Interval Item to
Service
1 Before Left Front, b. Visually check front and b. Any damage
Side left side of vehicle for obvious prevents operation.
Exterior damage that would impair
(Cont’d) operation.
DRIVER
2 Before Left Side WARNING
Tires Operating a vehicle with
a tire in an underinflated
condition or with a ques-
tionable defect may lead
to premature tire failure
and may cause equipment
damage and injury or
death to personnel.
NOTE
The radial tire is a
bidirectional tire and the
tread may be positioned
in either direction.
Visually check tires for under- Tire missing,
inflation and defects. deflated, or
unserviceable.
DRIVER
3 Before Rear NOTE
Exterior If leakage is detected,
the leak.
vehicle for evidence of fluid leaks; class III
leakage. leak of oil, fuel, or
coolant.
b. Visually check rear of b. Any damage
vehicle for obvious damage prevents operation.
that would impair operation.
c. Inspect bumper supports c. Any damage
for cracks before towing trailer. that would prevent
operation.
2-30 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
4 Before Right NOTE
Front, If leakage is detected,
Side further investigation is
Exterior needed to determine
the location and cause
of the leak.

coolant.
b. Visually check front and b. Any damage
right side of vehicle for obvi- prevents operation.
ous damage that would
impair operation.
DRIVER
5 Before Right Side WARNING

condition or with a ques-
and may cause equipment
damage and injury or
death to personnel.
NOTE
The radial tire is a
Visually check tires for under- Tire missing,
inflation and defects. deflated, or
unserviceable.
Change 2 2-31
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
6 Before Front NOTE
If leakage is detected,
investigation is needed
to determine the location
and cause of the leak.
a. Visually check front of a. Any damage

vehicle for obvious damage prevents operation.
that would impair operation.
b. Visually check underneath b. Any brake
coolant.
DRIVER
6.1 Before Power CAUTION
Steering • Do not permit dirt,
Reservoir dust, or grit to enter
(P/N RCSK power steering reservoir.
18330) Damage to power
steering system will
result if power steering
fluid becomes contam-
inated.
• Do not overfill power
steering reservoir.
Damage to power
result.
2-32 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
6.1 Before Power
Steering
Reservoir
(P/N RCSK
18330)
(Cont’d) HOT
COLD
ADD
Check fluid in power steering

reservoir (para. 3-20). Fluid
should be between HOT and
COLD marks. Add fluid if level
is below COLD mark.
DRIVER
6.2 Before Power CAUTION
Steering • Do not permit dirt,
Reservoir dust, or grit to enter
(P/N power steering reservoir.
94252A) Damage to power
result if power steering
fluid becomes contam-
inated.
• Do not overfill power
steering reservoir.
Damage to power
result.
Change 2 2-32.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
6.2 Before Power
Steering
Reservoir
(P/N
94252A)
(Cont’d)
HOT
COLD
ADD
Check fluid in power steering

reservoir (para. 3-20.1). Fluid
should be between HOT and
COLD marks. Add fluid if level
is below COLD mark.
DRIVER
7 Before Serpentine a. Visually check drive and a. Pulleys worn,
Drivebelt idler pulleys for evidence of broken, or
and Pulleys excessive wear or misalignment. misaligned.
b. Check if serpentine b. Serpentine
drivebelt is missing, broken, drivebelt is missing
cracked, frayed, loose, or broken. Drivebelt
misaligned, or split. fiber has more than one
crack 1/8 in. (3.2 mm)
in depth or 50%, or
frays more than 2-in.
(5.1-cm) long. Drivebelt
is loose or misaligned
(off one or more grooves
on any pulley).
2-32.2 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
8 Before Cooling
System WARNING
If engine has been recently
operated, do not remove
radiator cap to check coolant
level. Cooling system is under
pressure, and escaping steam
or coolant can cause burns.
CAUTION
• Type 1, ethylene glycol
(green), and Type 2, propylene
glycol (purple), should never
be mixed due to their
difference in toxic properties.
Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment.
• Using antifreeze without
mixing it with water can
cause high operating
temperatures, blockage of
cooling system passages, and
damage to water pump seals.
NOTE
Type 1 antifreeze is an
ethylene glycol based coolant,
green in color. Type 1 can be
added to factory-filled pink
coolant. When it becomes
necessary to flush factory
coolant, Type 1, ethylene
glycol, will be used. When
mixing Type 1 antifreeze with
water, distilled water is
recommended. Tap water
should only be used in
emergency situations.
Check coolant level in coolant
tank. Level should be at or
above the FULL COLD line.
Add coolant if below the FULL
line.
Change 3 2-33
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER (M1114 ONLY)
8.1 Before Doors Check door for proper Door does not lock.
operation of door lock.
DRIVER (M1114, M1151A1,
M1152A1, M1165A1, M1167)
8.2 Before Doors a. Check door for proper a. Excessive force
(Frag 5/ operation. is required to operate.
Armored)
b. Check door latch for b. Door does not
proper operation. latch.
c. Check combat lock for c. Combat lock
proper operation. does not lock.
DRIVER
9 Before Seat and NOTE
Seatbelts Vehicle operation with
inoperative seatbelts
may violate AR 385-55.
a. Check all seatbelts
for security, damage,
and operation of buckle and
clasp ends.
b. Check operation of seat b. Seat adjustment
adjusting mechanism lock broken or
(driver’s seat only). missing.
DRIVER
10 Before Fire Extin- a. Check for missing or a. Fire extinguisher
guisher damaged fire extinguisher. missing or damaged.
b. Check gauge for proper b. Pressure gauge
pressure of about 150 psi needle in recharge
(1,034 kPa). area.
c. Check for damaged or c. Seal broken
missing seal. or missing.
SEAL
FIRE
EXTINGUISHER
GAUGE
2-34 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
10.1 Before Automatic NOTE
Fire Extin- • Smoking in a vehicle with
guisher Automatic Fire Extinguishing
System System (AFES) installed may
(AFES) activate the sensor and cause
system to discharge.
• Large, high intensity

spotlights may activate the
sensor and cause system to
discharge.
CAUTION
Do not handle the fire
extinguisher unless the anti-
recoil plug is installed in the
valve outlet port and manual
lever lock pin is installed in
the lever lock holes.
a. Check that pressure a. Pressure gauge

gauges on both fire extin- reads below pressure
guishers read at or above shown on label.
minimum pressure on extin-
guisher label using the chart
below.
TEMP. °F -40 -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 140 158
TEMP. °C -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
P min, PSIG 585 620 655 690 730 770 810 850 905 955 1005 1060
WARNING
Do not remove manual lever
lock pin. Injury to personnel
may happen if fire suppression
system is accidently discharged.
Change 5 2-34.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
CAUTION
• Ensure that stowed items
do not interfere with fire
suppression system
operation. Do not stow any
items around the valve
outlet port nozzles that may
negate the extinguishers
disbursement radius in the
case of a fire. Failure to do
so could prevent proper fire
suppression system operation.
• Ensure optical fire sensors
are kept clean. If optical fire
sensors are not kept clean,
it could decrease the system
ability to quickly and
correctly identify a fire
and activate the automatic
fire extinguishing system.
b. Check system wiring b. Wiring harness

harness and sensors for or sensor box is
presence, security and damage. disconnected,
improperly installed,
damaged or missing.
c. Check for loose, improperly c. Fire extinguisher,

installed, or missing fire manual lever lock pin
extinguisher, manual lever lock or tube assembly
pin or tube assembly. missing.
2-34.2 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
d. Check that anti-recoil

plugs are properly stowed.
e. Turn rotary switch to RUN e. Green LED

position, check control module indictor light is off,
LED indicator for a contin- steady blink, slow
uous ON green light to see if blink, or double
system is fully functional. blink.
f. Check fire sensors LED f. LED light does

for continuous green light and not come on, is
cleanliness. blinking, or covered
with dust or any
foreign object.
11 Before Gear a. Check transmission shift a. Lever inoperable
Shifter lever operation. Shift trans- or binds between
Lever mission lever through all range detents.
operating ranges. Lever
should move freely through
all range positions.
b. Check transfer shift lever b. Lever inoperable
operation. With transmission or does not engage
in N, shift transfer lever in all ranges with
through all range positions. engine not running.
Lever should move freely
through all range positions.
Change 5 2-35
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
12 Before Instrument WARNING

Panel If gauges, instruments, or
instrument lights are
inoperable or not within
ranges described in these
checks, immediately
shut off engine and notify
your supervisor or unit
maintenance personnel.
Continued operation of
vehicle may result in
injury to personnel or
NOTE
If engine is warm, wait-to-
start light may not come on.
During cranking or after
starting, light may go on
and off a few times.
a. Check wait-to-start light a. Wait-to-start
and brake warning light. Turn light does not come
rotary switch to RUN. Wait- on when engine is
to-start and brake warning cold, or wait light
light should come on. stays on continually.
Brake warning light
does not come on.
BRAKE
WAIT-TO-START WARNING
LAMP LAMP
ROTARY
SWITCH
2-36 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
12 Before Instrument b. Start engine and check b. Engine will
Panel the following: not start.
(Cont’d) c. Engine oil pressure c. Oil pressure is
gauge. less than 6 psi
(41 kPa) at idle or
15 psi (103 kPa)
under load.
d. Voltmeter. d. Voltmeter
needle stays in
yellow or red range.
e. Air restriction gauge. e. Air restriction
indicator reaches
red zone.
f. Brake warning light f. Brake warning
should go off when hand light stays on after
brake is released. hand brake is
released or comes on
while driving.
g. Check fuel gauge.
h. Check coolant h. Coolant tem-
temperature gauge. perature gauge
inoperative or reads
greater than 250°F
(120°C) and/or
overheat lamp
BRAKE illuminates.
WARNING AIR ENGINE OIL COOLANT
LIGHT RESTRICTION PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE VOLTMETER
Change 3 2-37
qj=VJOPOMJPUTJNM

içÅ~íáçå
fíÉã `êÉïãÉãÄÉê kçí=cìääó=jáëëáçå
fåíÉêî~ä fíÉã=íç
kçK `ÜÉÅâL mêçÅÉÇìêÉ `~é~ÄäÉ=fÑW
pÉêîáÅÉ

! !"

#

"
#$
%

&
klqb
#! # "
"" #
'$ "$ (

)'( "
! "
#

+
! "$ +

$ "
$
) "#
$ #$
"
*$ #$ %"
! "+ "
"$ ,-
'-./#(!
!
"*
!
" "#% 0 "
,-'-./#(
$ 1#
,
! ,
+!
!
% !
" # ! "
"
) $ $
"#$
-
! -
+!
$
%# # $
%
# #
!

" %
OJPU
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER (M1114, M1151,
M1151A1, AND M1167
ONLY)
15 Before Weapon NOTE

Station Weapon station binding
should be checked with
weapon system or equivalent
weight applied to turret.
Refer to appropriate system
TM to determine weight
of weapon system.
a. Check weapon station for a. Weapon station
binding by rotating 360° in both binds.
directions at least five times.
b. Check armament mounting b. Armament weapons
plate and bearing sleeve for required for missions
security of mounting and and mounting plate or
obvious damage that would bearing sleeve missing,
impair operation. or any damage that will
prevent or impair
mounting of armament
weapons.
DRIVER
16 During Controls a. Monitor fuel gauge.
and
Indicators
b. Monitor engine oil pressure b. Engine oil pressure
gauge. gauge reads less than
approximately 30 psi
(207 kPa) under
normal driving con-
ditions or less than
10 psi (69 kPa) at
idle.
c. Monitor coolant temperature c. Coolant
gauge. temperature gauge
reads greater than
250°F (120°C) and/or
overheat lamp
illuminates.
Change 6 2-38.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
No. Procedure Capable If:
Check/Service
15.1 Before Traversing DRIVER (M1114, M1151A1,
Unit M1167 ONLY)
NOTE
If equipped with an operational
Battery Powered Motorized
Traversing Unit (BPMTU), a not
fully mission capable Manual
Traversing Unit (MTU) does not
deadline the weapon system.
a. Check Manual Traversing Unit a. Gear linkage
(MTU) gear linkage assembly for assembly bent,
bent, broken or missing linkage.broken, or missing
b. Inspect MTU support bracket linkage.
for loose or missing linkage. b. Loose or missing
c. Inspect traversing handle formounting hardware.
cracks or loose screws and quickc. Handle missing or
release pin for damage or unserviceable, or quick
missing. release pin damaged
or missing.
d. Check disengage handle for d. Check disengage
proper operation. handle for proper
operation.
e. Check operation of MTU while e. MTU is inoperable.
engaged with weapon station by
rotating 360 degrees in both
directions at least five times.
15.2 Before Battery DRIVER (M1114, M1151A1
Powered ONLY)
Motorized
Traversing NOTE
Unit If equipped with an operational
(BPMTU) MTU, a not fully mission
capable BPMTU does not
deadline the weapon system.
WARNING
Push in emergency stop switch
to the “OFF” position before
joystick or other components
are removed or replaced.
Failure to do so may cause
injury to personnel or damage
to equipment.
2-38.2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Location
Interval Item to
No. Procedure Capable If:
Check/Service
15.2 Before Battery a. Inspect power cables for a. Power cable broken,
Powered exposed wiring, breaks, frayed frayed, or damaged.
Motorized insulation, loose or damaged Mounting hardware
Traversing connectors and loose, damaged, or loose, damaged, or
Unit (cont’d) missing mounting hardware. missing.
NOTE
Emergency stop switch must be
in the “ON” position to charge
batteries.
b. Check control box emergency b. Control box
stop switch, battery status emergency stop switch
indicator button, and LED inoperable.
display light for proper operation.
NOTE
Turret has no brake when
motor engagement control is in
the “NEUTRAL” (vertical)
position.
c. Check operation of drive c. Drive assembly
assembly motor engagement motor engagement
control, and chain for proper control will not
adjustment. engage.
CAUTION
Turn emergency stop switch to
the “OFF” position prior to
plugging in the joystick cable.
Failure to comply may result in
d. Check joystick operation. d. Joystick inoperable
Ensure joystick moves freely, and or housing is not
ensure housing is sealed properly. properly sealed.
NOTE
Allowing batteries to fully
discharge greatly reduces life
span and rechargability of
battery. To prolong battery life,
recharge when single bar
flashes on the battery status
indicator.
Change 6 2-39
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
16 During Controls d. Monitor air restriction d. Air restriction
and gauge. gauge indicates
Indicators restriction in the air
(Cont’d) cleaner
e. Monitor voltmeter. e. Voltmeter indicates
a loss of voltage.
f. Monitor brake warning f. If light stays lit,
light. brakes may not
function properly.
g. Check speedometer g. Speedometer
operation. needle does not
move, jerks unevenly
during sustained
speeds, or appears
stuck.
DRIVER
17 During Brakes Check brakes for pulling or Brakes pull or grab.
grabbing.
DRIVER
18 During Steering Be alert for vibration, excessive Handling is unsta-
sway, leaning to one side, or ble; turning is
unstable handling. Check difficult or free play,
steering response for unusual binding, or shimmy
free play, binding, or shimmy. detected.
DRIVER
18.1 During Accelerator Check response to accelerator Pedal sticking or
Pedal feed. Check for sticking or binding.
binding pedal.
DRIVER
19 During Power- Be alert for unusual noises or Unusual noise or
train vibrations from engine, trans- vibration detected.
mission, transfer, differentials,
propeller shafts, axle shafts,
or wheels.
DRIVER
20 During Trans- Check transmission for Transmission slips
mission proper operation. or will not shift.
2-40 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
ALL MODELS EXCEPT
M1113
21 During Air NOTE
Conditioner Perform the following
inspection only if the air
conditioner is required
for climatic conditions.
Turn air conditioner on. Refer to Climatic conditions
para. 2-35 for M1114 and require air-condition-
para. 2-35.1 for M1151/M1151A1/ ing and A/C is
M1152/M1152A1/M1165/M1165A1/ inoperable, or
M1167. Wait 5 minutes to allow outlet duct air is not
temperature to stabilize. cooler than ambient
Check vents for cool air. If air temperature.
is not cooler than ambient
temperature, notify your
supervisor and record on
DA Form 2404.
DRIVER (M1114 ONLY)
21.1 During De-Icer NOTE
Perform the following
inspection only if the
de-icer is required for
climatic conditions.
Turn de-icer on. Refer to para. De-icer does not
2-36. Check to see if de-icer operate and mission
functions by removing steam, requires de-icer.
frost, or ice from windshield.
DRIVER
21.2 After Gear a. Start engine and check a. Lever inoperable
Shifter transmission shift lever or binds between
Lever operation. Shift transmission range detents.
through all operating ranges.
b. Check transfer shift lever b. Lever inoperable
operation. With transmission or does not engage
in N, shift transfer lever in all ranges with
through all range positions. engine not running.
Change 6 2-41
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
22 After Trans- CAUTION
mission • Do not permit dirt, dust,
Fluid fluid or grit to enter trans-
mission oil dipstick tube.
Internal transmission
damage will result if
transmission oil becomes
contaminated.
• Do not overfill transmission.
Damage to transmission will
result. An over-full
transmission can also
indicate a transfer case fluid
leak. Notify unit
maintenance if transmission
fluid is above crosshatch
mark.
NOTE
• Transmission fluid level
should be checked with
engine running, parking
brake set, transmission shift
lever in P, and vehicle on
level ground. Fluid level
should be at crosshatch
marks on dipstick.
• Let vehicle idle with
all accessories off for three
minutes.
• Engine operating temp-
erature of 185-250°F (85-
120°C) must be reached
before performing AFTER
checks.
Check transmission fluid level.
Apply brake and move shift
lever through each gear range.
Pause for about three seconds
in each range, ending in P. If
level is below the crosshatch
marks, add sufficient fluid to
bring the level to the
crosshatch marks.
2-42 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
23 After Fuel Filter WARNING
Do not perform fuel
system checks, inspec-
tions, or maintenance
while smoking or near
fire, flames, or sparks.
Fuel may ignite, causing
damage to vehicle and
injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
A rubber hose can be
attached to drainvalve
to catch fuel in container
before opening drainvalve.
If fuel is clear, put fuel
back in fuel tank.
a. Check fuel for contamin- a. Fuel is not clear
ation. With engine running, after draining 1 pt.
open drainvalve. Allow fuel (0.47 L).
to drain into suitable container
until it runs clear. Close valve.
Change 1 2-43
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
23 After Fuel Filter NOTE
(Cont’d) Fuel retained in the drain-
valve may drip when
vehicle vibrations occur.
This is normal and does
not constitute a leak.
DRAIN- Wipe drainvalve with
VALVE rag until excess fuel is
removed.
b. Check for leaks. b. Class III

leakage evident.
c. Stop engine and remove
rubber hose from drainvalve,
if installed.
DRIVER
24 After Left Side WARNING
condition or with
questionable defect may
lead to premature tire
failure and may cause
equipment damage and
injury or death to
personnel.
Visually check tires for under- Tire deflated or
inflation, cuts, gouges, otherwise unser-
cracks, or bulges. Remove viceable.
all penetrating objects.
2-44 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
25 After Mirror NOTE
(Left Side) Vehicle operation with
damaged or missing
outside rearview mirrors
Check mirror for defects,
cracks, and serviceability.
DRIVER
26 After Left Front, NOTE
Side If leakage is detected,
Exterior further investigation is
location and cause of the
leak.

vehicle for evidence of fluid leaks; class III leak
leakage. of oil, fuel, or
coolant.
b. Visually check halfshaft
cv boots and ball joint boots
for rips, tears, or cuts.
c. Inspect frame cross- c. Crossmembers or
members and underbody underbody support
support for missing hardware, are missing any
cracks, bends, and breaks. hardware, are cracked,
Notify unit maintenance if rust broken, or bent or
is present, but the base metal rusted-through
is sound. condition is present
that would affect
vehicle operation.
d. Visually check for body d. Any damage
damage that would impair will prevent
operation of vehicle. operation.
Change 1 2-45
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
27 After Rear NOTE
Exterior If leakage is detected,
the leak.
vehicle for evidence of fluid leaks; class III leak of
leakage. oil, fuel, or coolant.
cv boots and ball joint boots for
rips, tears, or cuts.
c. Inspect frame crossmem- c. Crossmembers or
bers and underbody support underbody support
for missing hardware, cracks, are missing any
bends, and breaks. Notify unit hardware, are
maintenance if rust is present, cracked, broken, or
but the base metal is sound. bent or rusted-through
condition is present
that would affect
vehicle operation.
d. Inspect bumper or cross- d. Bumper, cross-
member and inner braces in member or an inner
area around towing pintle for brace is cracked or
cracks or breaks. broken.
2-46 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
28 After Right Side WARNING
Tires
Operating a vehicle with
condition or with ques-
and may cause equip-
ment damage and injury
Visually check tires for under- Tire deflated
inflation, cuts, gouges, cracks, or otherwise
or bulges. Remove all unserviceable.
penetrating objects.
DRIVER
29 After Mirror NOTE
(Right Vehicle operation with
Side) damaged or missing
outside rearview mirrors
Check mirror for defects,

cracks, and serviceability
DRIVER
30 After Right NOTE
Front, If leakage is detected,
Side further investigation is
Exterior needed to determine the
the leak.
a. Visually check underneath a. Any brake
vehicle for evidence of fluid fluid leaks; class III
coolant.
cv boots and ball joint boots
for rips, tears, or cuts.
Change 1 2-47
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
30 After Right c. Inspect frame crossmem- c. Crossmembers or
Front bers and underbody support underbody support
Side, for missing hardware, cracks, are missing any
Exterior bends, and breaks. Notify unit hardware, are
(Cont’d) maintenance if rust is present, cracked, broken, or
but the base metal is sound. bent or rusted-
through condition is
present that would
affect vehicle
operation.
d. Visually check front and d. Any damage will
right side of vehicle for obvi- prevent operation.
ous damage that would im-
pair operation.
DRIVER
31 After Engine Oil CAUTION
• Do not permit dirt,
dust, or grit to enter
engine oil dipstick tube.
Internal engine damage
will result if engine oil
becomes contaminated.
• Do not overfill engine
crankcase. Damage to
engine will result.
Check engine oil level. Level Oil appears milky.
ADD
should be between ADD and

FULL. If level is below
ADD, add oil to bring level
between the ADD and
FULL marks.
DRIVER
CAUTION
32 After Power Notify unit maintenance
Steering if power steering system
Lines and has class III leak. Loss
Fittings of power assist could
occur if this condition
exists.
2-48 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
32 After Power Check power steering lines and Class III leakage
Steering fittings for leaks. evident.
Lines and
Fittings
(Cont’d)
DRIVER
33 After Cooling Inspect radiator hoses for Class III leakage
System leakage. evident.
DRIVER
34 After Master Visually check master cylinder Any leak, or cover
Cylinder lines for leaks and security of missing.
cover.
35 After Lights CAUTION
Never set the rotary
switch to RUN to check
the lights. This drains
the batteries and can
burn out the glow plugs
and control box.
NOTE
Vehicle operation with
damaged or inoperable
headlights may violate
AR 385-55.
a. Check for presence and
operation of service drive,
turn signal, blackout marker,
marker, blackout drive, and
side marker lights.
b. Check operation of tail/stop-
lights. Push down brake pedal
approximately 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
Tail/stoplights should come on.
Change 1 2-48.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
36 After Horn NOTE
inoperative horn may
violate AR 385-55.
Check operation of horn if

tactical situation permits.
DRIVER
37 After Wind- NOTE
shield and Vehicle operation with
Wipers damaged windshield
a. Check windshield for dam- a. Windshield is

age that would impair opera- cracked, broken, or
tor’s vision. discolored (cloudy)
sufficiently to impair
operator’s vision.
NOTE
inoperative wipers may
violate AR 385-55.
b. Check windshield wiper,

blade, and washer fluid
reservoir for defects, damage,
and proper operation.
c. Check windshield wiper
motor for proper operation.
d. Check washer reservoir
fluid level.
2-48.2 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
37 After Wind- e. Inspect inner surface of e. The bond between
shield and windshield glass (spall liner) glass and frame is
wipers for complete breaks, delami- separated from glass
(Cont’d) nation, scratches, gouges, tape, or frame. Any com-
decals, adhesives, or blurred plete break on inner
vision. surface of glass. Any
digs, gouges, or
scratches on inner
surface of glass. Any
complete break on
inner surface of
glass.
f. Inspect outer surface of f. Any complete
windshield glass for a complete break on the outer
break. surface of windshield
glass.
DRIVER
38 After Light NOTE
Switches Ensure all switches are
in the OFF position.
Failure to turn switches
to the OFF position
when not in use will
drain the batteries.
Check and ensure all switches
are in the OFF position.
DRIVER
38.1 Weekly Hand a. Check hand throttle and
Throttle mounting bracket for security.
Check throttle release button
to ensure hand throttle cable
operates properly.
b. Check hand throttle cable
for corrosion, nicks, breaks, or
burns.
Change 1 2-49
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
WARNING
39 Weekly Tires • Do not exceed 50 psi
(345 kPa) cold radial
tire inflation pressure.
Overinflation of tire
may result in damage
to equipment and injury
• Load Range D valves and
tires are not compatible
with Load Range E
wheels. Load Range E
valves and tires are not
compatible with Load
Range D wheels. Failure
to comply may result in
damage to equipment
and injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
• The radial tire is a
• Refer to tables 1-15 and

1-15.1 for vehicle tire
pressures.
2-50 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
39 Weekly Tires a. Check tire tread depth. a. Any tread is worn
(Cont’d) Tread should not be worn be- even to height of
yond level of wear bar (1/16 in.) tread wear indicator
THREAD WEAR (15.9 mm or less). Wear (1/16 in. (1.59 mm)
INDICATOR (TWI) bars are molded across the or less). Any cut,
WEAR BAR tread pattern in the valley be- gouge, or crack that
tween the center rib and lugs. extends to the cord
The Tread Wear Indicator body or any bulges.
letters (TWI) are molded on Tires exhibit
the sidewall to aid in locating excessive inner and
the wear bar. outer wear or
balance
NOTE
• The wear bars are not
evident on new or very
low mileage tires. The
TIRE TREAD wear bars will appear
DEPTH after usual use.
• Some tires will show a
diamond instead of
TWI indicating where
the wear bar is located.
b. Check for missing or loose b. Any wheel stud
wheel stud nuts and lug nuts. nut or lug nut is
Tighten loose lug nuts and broken or missing.
have unit maintenance tighten
stud nuts and lug nuts to
proper torque.
STUD NUTS
LUG NUTS
Change 6 2-51
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
39 Weekly Tires WARNING
(Cont’d) Do not exceed 50 psi
(345 kPa) cold radial tire
inflation pressure. Over-
inflation of tire may result
in premature tire failure,
damage to equipment, and
c. Gauge tires for correct air
pressure using tire inflation
gauge. Adjust as necessary.
CAUTION
The M1113 shelter carriers are
specifically designed to be operated
with the S250 shelter installed.
They can be driven safely without
the shelter installed, or with
equivalent payload of 1,500 lb
(681 kg), for short distances
(e.g., to and from maintenance, or
from the rail head when being
delivered), but this should not be
done often or for long distances.
Driving for long distances without
the shelter installed, or equivalent
payload of 1,500 lb (681 kg)
evenly distributed in center
of cargo area, will cause
DRIVER
40 Weekly Exhaust Check exhaust system for Any mounts are
System security of all mounts, broken, pipes are
tightness of clamps and bolts, rusted through or
rusted conditions, damaged broken, or any
pipes, and any indication of an indication of an
exhaust leak. exhaust leak.
DRIVER
41 Weekly Shock Visually inspect shock absorb- Class III leakage or
Absorbers ers for leaks, damage, and damage is evident;
security of mounting. mounting damaged
or loose.
2-52 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER (M1113, M1152,
AND M1165 ONLY)
42 Weekly Doors and a. Check operation of doors
Windows and windows.
b. Check crew door assembly b. Visible cracks
for visible cracks that would or door does not
make door unserviceable or secure properly.
unable to secure properly.
c. Check crew door assembly c. Loose, missing,
latch, hinges, and door handle or unserviceable
for damage, looseness, or parts.
missing parts.
DRIVER (M1114, M1151,

M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1,
AND M1167 ONLY)
42.1 Weekly Doors and a. Inspect crew door locks
Windows for proper operation.
b. Inspect inner surface of
door glass (spall liner) for
complete breaks, delamination,
scratches, gouges, tape, decals,
adhesives, or blurred vision.
c. Inspect outer surface of
door glass for a complete
break.
d. Inspect door armor for
cracks. If cracks are found
notify unit maintenance.
For M1114 vehicles only,
see note in para. 2-3.
DRIVER
43 Weekly Tailgate Check operation of tailgate.
Check that tailgate latches
securely and operates properly.
Change 6 2-52.1/(2-52.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER (M1114, M1151,
M1151A1, AND M1167 ONLY)
44 Weekly Body a. Inspect cargo shell door a. Lift cylinders or
for bends, warping, binding, latches bent, warped,
and ease of operation. In- binding, or inopera-
spect latching mechanisms tive.
for proper operation. Inspect
lift cylinders for bends
and security of mounting.
a.1. Inspect retaining wire a.1. Retaining wire
rope for damage and security rope is damaged,
of mounting. missing, or not
secured.
b. Inspect strap assembly
for frays and security of
mounting.
c. Check cargo shell door
for alignment as follows:
(1) Insert a piece of paper
between the door seal and
door opening.
(2) With door closed, seal
should offer resistance to
pulling out paper. If door seal
does not offer resistance,
adjustment is required.
d. Check crew compartment
armor for security of mounting.
e. Check armor for loose or

missing fasteners. Notify unit
maintenance if any are found.
f. Check armor components f. Armor

for cracks. components are
cracked.
Change 6 2-53
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
WARNING
Unauthorized welds and/or
drilling of vehicle armor
will degrade armor protec-
tion capabilities and could
result in severe injury to
personnel.
g. Inspect underbody armor g. Vehicle missing

for missing retainer plates a retainer plate or
or screws. more than one screw.
h. Inspect underbody plates h. Deformation is

for any deformation (buckling, visually detected.
collapsing, or bending).
i. Check operation of i. C-partition door

C-partition door and ensure it will not close and
will lock in all three positions. lock in all three posi-
tions, or inoperative.
44.1 Weekly Geared Check for missing grease fittings. One or more grease
Fan Drive fittings missing.
(Serial
Numbers
3000000
and Above
Only)
2-54 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
45 Weekly Vehicular (Vehicle w/Vehicular
Heater Winterization Kit)
a. Check heater and heater a. Heater inoper-
controls for proper operation. able and mission
requires heater.
b. Check fuel lines and fittings b. Class III fuel
for leaks, cracks, or breaks. leakage is evident
and mission requires
heater.
c. Check electrical cables c. Wires frayed or
and connections for security, broken.
or frayed or broken wires.
d. Check heater exhaust pipe d. Heater exhaust
for damage, security of mount- damaged or com-
ing, and missing components. ponents missing.
e. Check fuel filter for leaks e. Class III leak
or damage. evident.
DRIVER
46 Weekly Air WARNING

Cleaner If NBC exposure is sus-
pected, all air filter media
should be handled by per-
sonnel wearing protective
equipment. Consult your
unit NBC officer or NBC
NCO for appropriate
handling or disposal
instructions.
Check air cleaner weathercap, Damage to air

air cleaner assembly, air intake cleaner weathercap,
hose, and air horn for security body, air intake
of mounting and damage. hose, or mounting
allows unfiltered
air to enter the
engine.
Change 1 2-55
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
47 Weekly Alternator Visually check power steering Bracket is cracked
Brackets and alternator brackets for or bolts damaged
cracks, damage, or loose or loose.
bolts.
DRIVER
48 Weekly Cooling a. Check fan and fan pulley a. Fan blade or
System for damage. pulley is bent,
broken, cracked, or
loose.
b. Check radiator for leaks, b. Class III
clogged or damaged fins, and leakage evident.
loose or damaged hoses to and
from the engine.
c. Check support mounts, c. Support mounts
side brackets, and side bracket broken, damaged,
weldments on radiator for or missing hardware.
missing hardware, damage, Side brackets
or broken welds. damaged or two or
more weldments
broken, allowing
movement of
radiator.
SIDE
BRACKET
WELDMENTS
SUPPORT
MOUNTS
2-56 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
48 Weekly Cooling d. Deleted d. Deleted
System e. Check fan shroud for e. Fan shroud broken
(Cont’d) damage. cracked, or loose.
f. Check engine oil cooler and f. Class III leak
hoses for damage and leaks. evident.
DRIVER
49 Weekly Batteries WARNING
• Do not smoke, have open
flames, or make sparks
around batteries, espe-
cially if the caps are off.
Batteries can explode
and may cause injury or
death.
• Remove all jewelry such
as rings, dog tags, bracelets,
etc. If jewelry contacts
battery terminal, a direct
short may result, causing
severe injury to personnel,
or damage to equipment.
a. Remove companion seat a. One or more bat-
and check batteries for dam- teries missing, un-
aged casing, terminal posts, serviceable, or leaking;
and security of mounting. terminal or cables
Notify unit maintenance if loose, corroded, or
any defects are found. holddowns not secure.
49.1 Weekly Battery a. Check the BPMTU batteries a. One or more

Powered for loose or corroded batteries missing,
Motorized connections, damaged casing, unserviceable, or
Traversing terminal posts, cables, and leaking; terminal or
Unit loose mounting. cables loose,
(BPMTU) corroded, or
Batteries holddowns not
secure.
Change 6 2-57
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
49 Weekly Batteries b. Electrolyte should be
(Cont’d) filled to the level/split ring
in the battery filler opening
(vent). If fluid is low, fill with
distilled water to split ring
(appendix D, item 7).
If fluid is gassing (boiling),
NOTE
Water in battery box can
be caused by debris plugging
battery box drain holes. If
water is present, clean
debris from battery box
drain holes.
c. Check battery box for cor-
rosion or water on bottom of
battery tray.
DRIVER
50 Weekly Weapon a. Inspect weapon station a. Hatch or hinges
Station hatch and hinge for bends, inoperable.
cracks, warped, or damaged
areas.
b. Inspect brake for ease b. Brake does not
of operation. operate.
c. Inspect gunner’s sling c. Sling is torn,
for tears, frays, or damaged shows wear, or
hook. hook is damaged.
DRIVER
51 Weekly Tiedowns a. Inspect stored equipment
footman loops for presence
and security of mounting.
Inspect straps for tears
or frays.
b. Inspect stowage brackets,
footman loops, and tiedowns
for security of mounting,
damage, and missing
components.
2-58 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
51 Weekly Tiedowns c. Inspect all tiedown strap

(Cont’d) assemblies for proper operation,
frays, damage, cleanliness, and
security of mounting.
DRIVER
52 Weekly Tow Pintle Check pintle hook for looseness,
damaged locking mechanism,
and presence of cotter pin.
DRIVER (M1114 ONLY)
53 Weekly Environment a. Check security of wind-

Control shield de-icer control box
System mounting.
NOTE
Insufficient cooling could
be a result of loss of R134a
refrigerant. This is a gas,
therefore leaks cannot be
detected. If leaks in lines or
fittings are suspected, the
vehicle is to be considered
non-mission capable. Notify
your supervisor.
b. Check Heating, Ventilation, b. Leaks in lines or

and Air Conditioning (HVAC) fittings.
vents, and mounting hardware
for damage, leaks, missing
components, and security of
mounting.
c. Inspect exposed wiring c. Wiring harness
harnesses for breaks, frayed broken, frayed, or
insulation, loose or damaged damaged. Mounting
connectors, and loose, damaged, hardware missing.
or missing mounting hardware.
Change 3 2-59
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
54 Weekly Parking Check combination service/ Actuating lever or
Brake parking brake assemblies; spring is broken or
inspect parking brake for ob- missing.
struction of the actuating lever
or broken or missing spring.
DRIVER
54.1 Weekly Steering With vehicle running, observe Any movement
Gear steering gear mounting observed in
Mounting area for movement while steering gear
assistant turns steering mounting area.
wheel left and right.
DRIVER
55 Weekly Wind- a. Visually check windshield
shield washer reservoir for damage.
Washer b. Check windshield washer
fluid level.
DRIVER
55.1 Weekly Rear (Vehicle w/Troop/Cargo
Troop/ Winterization Kit)
Cargo a. Check heater and heater a. Heater inoper-
Heater controls for proper operation. able and mission
requires heater.
b. Check fuel lines and b. Class III fuel
fittings for leaks, cracks, or leakage is evident
breaks. and mission requires
heater.
c. Check electrical cables c. Frayed or
and connections for security broken wires.
and frayed or broken wires.
d. Check heater exhaust pipe d. Heater exhaust
for damage, security of damaged or
mounting, and missing components missing.
components.
e. Check fuel filter for leaks e. Class III leak
or damage. evident.
2-60 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
DRIVER
55.2 Weekly Deep Inspect vent lines and connectors Vent lines cracked,
Water for security, cracks, and plugged, or missing.
Fording deterioration.
Kit (if
installed)
DRIVER
55.3 Weekly TOW ITAS a. Inspect TOW ITAS missile a. Rack will not
Missile Rack rack locking pins and support stow six TOW ITAS
braces for presence and ease of missiles.
operation.
b. Inspect straps for tears and
frays.
55.4 Weekly Floorboard Check for presence of TU adapter. TU adapter missing or
damaged.
DRIVER
56 Monthly Corrosion Visually inspect vehicle for Any corroded-through
indication of corrosion or condition, cracks or
cracks and/or breaks. breaks that would
affect vehicle operation.
DRIVER
57 Monthly Tailgate Check tailgate for corroded- Any corroded-
through condition and/or dam- through condition, or
age. If tailgate does not latch damage that would
securely or is damaged, notify affect vehicle
unit maintenance. operation.
DRIVER
58 Monthly Winch a. Check winch controls for
proper operation.
b. Check winch cable for
kinks, frays, or breaks.
c. Inspect tree saver strap
for cuts and abrasions. If red
safety thread is visible in
main body of strap, notify unit
maintenance for replacement
of strap.
Change 6 2-60.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

Location
Interval Item to
Service
58 Monthly Winch d. If it is known the strap

(cont’d) has been overloaded, notify unit
maintenance for replacement
of strap.
e. Wrap winch cable
(para. 2-28.1).
DRIVER
59 Monthly Zippers a. Check canvas top and door
zippers for corrosion and/or
damage.
b. Clean zippers with
toothbrush. Apply interlock
lubricant (appendix D, item 19)
to canvas top, door zippers, and
threads that hold zipper in place.
DRIVER
60 Monthly TOW ITAS Inspect TOW ITAS power Wire inside the cable
Power cable at the point where it exits is exposed.
Cable the battery box. Chafing of the
nylon braid that covers the cable
is acceptable. If wire inside the
cable is exposed, notify unit
maintenance.
2-60.2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section III. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS

2-9. GENERAL
This section provides instructions for vehicle operations under moderate
temperature, humidity, and terrain conditions. For vehicle operation under unusual
conditions, refer to section IV of this chapter.
2-10. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS REFERENCE INDEX

REF. PAGE
TITLE
PARA. NO.
2-11. Break-In Service 2-62
2-12. Starting the Engine 2-62
2-13. Placing Vehicle in Motion 2-66
2-14. Stopping the Vehicle and Engine 2-68
2-15. Operation of Vehicle Light Switch 2-70
2-16. Adjusting Driver’s Seat 2-72
2-17. Companion Seat Assembly and Battery Box Cover Replacement 2-73
2-18. Seatbelt Operation – Three-Point System 2-74
2-18.1. Seatbelt Operation – Improved Personal Restraint System 2-74.1
2-19. Defroster Operation (M1113) 2-75
2-20. Defroster Operation (M1114) 2-76
2-20.1. Defroster Operation (M1151, M1151A1, M1152, M1152A1
M1165, M1165A1, M1167) 2-76.1
2-21. Heater Operation (M1113, M1114) 2-76.2
2-21.1. Rear Heater Assembly Operation (M1114) 2-76.3
2-21.2 Heater Operation (M1151, M1151A1, M1152, M1152A1
M1165, M1165A1, M1167) 2-76.4
2-22. Tailgate Operation 2-78
2-22.1 12-Volt Auxiliary Power Outlet Operation (Optional) 2-78.1
2-23. Slave Starting Operation 2-79
2-24. Max Tool Kit Stowage (M1113) Operation 2-80
2-24.1. Max Tool Kit Stowage (M1152, M1152A1, M1165, M1165A1)
Operation 2-80.2
2-25. Max Tool Kit Stowage (M1114, M1151, M1151A1, M1167)
Operation 2-82
2-26. Towing Operation 2-84
2-27. Trailer Towing 2-89
2-28. Electric Winch Operation (M1113, M1114) 2-90
2-28.1. Hydraulic Winch Operation 2-92.2
2-29. Fire Extinguisher Operation 2-94
2-30. Crew Door Operation (M1114) 2-94.1
2-30.1. Crew Door Operation (M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1. M1167)
(With Perimeter Armor) 2-94.2
2-30.2 Frag 5 Crew Door Operation (M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1,
M1167) 2-94.4
2-30.3 Frag 5 Crew Door Operation (M1114) 2-94.6
2-31. C-Pillar Door Operation (M1114) 2-94.8
2-31.1. C-Pillar Door Operation (M1151A1, M1167)
(With Perimeter Armor) 2-94.9
Change 6 2-60.3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-10. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS REFERENCE INDEX

(Cont’d)
REF. PAGE
TITLE
PARA. NO.
2-31.2. Emergency Rescue Wrench Operation (Old Configuration)
(M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1) 2-94.10
2-31.3. Emergency Rescue Wrench Operation (New Configuration)
(M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1, M1167) 2-94.12
2-31.4. Emergency Frag 5 Door Removal (M1114) 2-94.14
2-31.5. Frag 5 Door Crew Emergency Bracket (CEB) Operation (M1114) 2-94.16
2-32. Cargo Shell Door Operation (M1114, M1151, M1151A1,
M1167) 2-96
2-33. Up-armored Weapon Station Operation (M1114) 2-98
2-33.1. Armament Weapon Station Operation (M1151, M1151A1) 2-98.2
2-33.2. Battery Powered Motorized Traversing Unit (BPMTU) 2-98.4
2-33.3. Manual Traversing Unit Operation 2-98.8
2-33.4 Turret Brake Operation 2-98.10
2-34. Fuel Door Operation (M1114) 2-100.1
2-35. Air Conditioner Operation (M1114) 2-100.2
2-35.1. Air Conditioner Operation
(M1151, M1151A1, M1152, M1152A1, M1165, M1165A1,
M1167) 2-101
2-36. Windshield De-icer Operation (M1114) 2-102
2-36.1. Adjustable Gunner Platform Operation (M1114) 2-102.1
2-36.2 Gunner’s Restraint System Operation (M1114, M1151,
M1151A1, M1167) 2-102.2
2-60.4/(2-61 blank) Change 6

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-11. BREAK-IN SERVICE

CAUTION
Do not tow trailer during the first 500 mi (805) km) of operation.
Break-in precautions are no longer required during the first 500 mi (805 km) of
2-12. STARTING THE ENGINE
.WARNING .
• The automatic transmission has a PARK position. Never use the
shift lever in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake.
Make sure the transmission shift lever is in the P (park) position
and transfer case shift lever is NOT in the N (neutral) position.
Damage to equipment and injury to personnel may occur if these
instructions are not followed.
• Chock blocks will be used when parking a vehicle with inoperative
parking brakes, operating in extreme cold conditions, parking on
inclines, or whenever and wherever maintenance is being performed.
Failure to do so may result in injury to personnel or damage to
equipment.
• Hearing protection is required for driver and passengers when
engine is running. Noise levels produced by these vehicles exceed
85 dBA, which may cause injury to personnel.
a. Ensure transmission shift lever (3) is in P (park) position and transfer case
shift lever (4) is NOT in N (neutral) position.
NOTE
To apply parking brake, grasp handle firmly and pull upward until
a.1. Ensure parking brake (5) is applied.

b. Adjust driver’s seat (para. 2-16).
2-62 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
.WARNING .
Right rearview mirror may restrict visibility.
c. Adjust left and right rearview mirrors. Ensure both mirrors provide a clear
view (para. 3-24).
d. Ensure all windows are clean. If not, clean windows before attempting to move
vehicle (table 2-1).
.WARNING .
Ensure all slack from seatbelt is removed. Seatbelt retracts and will
lock only during sudden stops or impact. Injury to personnel will result
if an accident occurs and seatbelt is not used or adjusted properly.
NOTE
Fasten unused seatbelts to protect the belt ends from damage or dirt
contamination.
e. Fasten and adjust seatbelt (para. 2-18).
CAUTION
• Do not leave rotary switch in RUN position for extended periods of
time. Glow plugs will continue to cycle and batteries will discharge
leading to a no-start condition.
• Glare from the sun may make it difficult to tell if the wait-to-start
lamp assembly is illuminated. If this occurs, shade the light with
your hands to ensure that the wait-to-start lamp assembly goes out
before attempting to start the vehicle.
• Starting the engine before the wait-to-start lamp goes out can
result in starting problems.
e.1. Ensure all electrical switches (lights, wipers, and blower motor) in vehicle are
turned to OFF.
f. Turn rotary switch (1) to RUN and wait until wait-to-start lamp
assembly (2) goes out. Transmission indicator lamp (2.1) will be illuminated.
2 2.1
5
Change 2 2-63
4
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-12. STARTING THE ENGINE (Cont’d)

CAUTION
• If ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C), do not operate starter
continuously for more than 20 seconds; wait 10 to 15 seconds
between periods of starter operation. Failure to do this may result
in damage to the starter.
• If any instrument reading is not normal, stop engine. Failure to do
this may result in damage to the engine. Refer to troubleshooting,
table 3-1.
• If engine does not start, leave rotary switch in RUN position and
wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying to restart. Failure to do this
may result in damage to glow plugs or starter.
• If you accidentally turn the rotary switch to ENG STOP position after
an unsuccessful attempt to start, wait 90 seconds before trying to
restart. Failure to do this may result in damage to glow plugs.
g. Place rotary switch (1) to START. Release lever after engine starts. Lever will
return automatically to RUN. Transmission indicator lamp (5.1) goes out when
engine starts.
NOTE
• Before the engine reaches operating temperature, the wait-to-start
lamp may flicker and a clicking noise may be heard. This is due to
glow plug relay cycling and is a normal condition.
• If the transmission lamp stays illuminated, notify maintenance.
Transmission damage can result if cause of light illumination is not
determined.
h. Allow engine to warm up for approximately one minute and ensure
instruments indicate the following:
(1) Oil pressure gauge (3) should register above approximately 6 psi (41 kPa)
with engine at idle.
(2) Voltmeter (5) should register in green area.
(3) Fuel gauge (6) should indicate fuel level in fuel tank.
(4) Air restriction gauge (2) should not register within the red zone.
i. Stop engine if any of the following conditions occur:
(1) Excessive engine vibration.
(2) Oil pressure does not register or suddenly drops to or less than
approximately 6 psi (41 kPa) with engine at idle.
(3) Air restriction gauge (2) is within the red zone.
j. If engine overheating occurs:
(1) Park vehicle, allow engine to idle.
(2) Observe coolant temperature gauge (4) for steady cooling.
2-64 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
CAUTION
Stop engine if coolant temperature gauge suddenly increases beyond
approximately 250°F (120°C), or damage to engine will result.
(3) If engine coolant temperature continues to increase, or does not decrease,
as indicated by coolant temperature gauge (4), stop engine. Perform troubleshooting
procedures in table 3-1.
3
1 2 4
5
5.1
Change 3 2-65
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-13. PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION

.WARNING .
• This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently
within the limits specified in this TM. Operation beyond these
limits are prohibited IAW AR 750-1 without written approval from
the Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments
Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
• Communications shelters AN/GRC-122 and AN/GRC-142 RATT
may overload truck by up to 500 lbs (227 kg). Use caution when
driving to avoid damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
CAUTION
Do not tow trailer during the first 500 mi (805 km) of operation.
NOTE
• The following procedures apply to a vehicle being driven in good
weather on high traction surfaces where little or no wheel slippage
is evident. For operating the vehicle under unusual conditions; i.e.,
unusual terrain, cold weather, ice, snow, dusty or sandy areas, mud
or rain, refer to section IV.
• Before you operate your vehicle, be sure to perform the Preventive
Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) shown in table 2-2.
a. Be sure all auxiliary equipment and tools are stored for travel.
CAUTION
• Vehicle must be stopped, and transmission shift lever placed in P
(park) or N (neutral), before transfer case can be shifted. Failure to
do this will result in damage to drivetrain.
• Do not place transfer case shift lever in H/L (high/lock range) or L
(low range) on high traction surfaces where little or no wheel
slippage is evident, particularly when encountering sharp,
continuous turns. Failure to operate the vehicle with transfer case
in H (high range) on high traction surfaces, particularly when
encountering sharp, continuous turns, can damage drivetrain.
b. With transmission shift lever (2) in P, select H transfer case driving gear
range using transfer case shift lever (3). This range is for normal driving in good
weather or on high traction surfaces.
c. Start engine (para. 2-12).
d. Set vehicle light switch (7) (para. 2-15).
CAUTION
Ensure parking brake is released completely before operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment.
NOTE
• To release parking brake, grasp handle firmly and push forward
until handle is seated in its most forward position.
• Parking brake handle has a safety release button which must be
depressed to release the parking brake.
• If covering warning lamp with tape, put a pinhole in the tape to see
when the light is on.
2-66 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
2
7
6
3
5 4
e. Depress service brake pedal (6). Depress parking brake release button and
release parking brake lever (4). The brake warning lamp assembly (1) should go out.
f. Place transmission shift lever (2) in D (overdrive) for normal driving.
g. Release service brake pedal (6), and depress accelerator pedal (5). Accelerate
at a safe, steady speed.
h. Upshift or downshift transmission shift lever (2) when road and/or traffic
conditions change.
.WARNING .
• Use extreme caution when transporting personnel. Although certain
design characteristics of the vehicle, such as vehicle width, ground
clearance, independent suspension, etc., provide improved
capabilities, accidents can still happen.
• Operators are reminded to observe basic safe driving
techniques/skills when operating the vehicle, especially when
transporting personnel. Vehicle speed must be reduced consistent
with weather and road/terrain conditions. Obstacles such as stumps
and boulders must be avoided. Failure to use basic safe driving
techniques/skills may result in loss of control and an accident or
rollover resulting in injury or death to personnel and damage to
equipment. Since the troop/cargo area has minimal overhead
protections and does not have seatbelts, personnel seated here are
at greater risk of serious injury.
NOTE
To help judge clearance more accurately, guide rods can be used at the
discretion of the unit commander.
i. Deleted.
Change 6 2-67
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-13. PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION (Cont’d)

j. Operators are reminded to observe basic safe driving techniques/skills when
operating the vehicle, especially when transporting personnel.
2-14. STOPPING THE VEHICLE AND ENGINE

a. Release accelerator pedal (5).
b. Depress service brake pedal (6) to bring vehicle to a gradual stop.
.WARNING .
• Never use the transmission shift lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake. Make sure the transmission shift
lever is in the P (park) position and transfer case shift lever is NOT
in the N (neutral) position. Damage to equipment and injury to
personnel may occur if these instructions are not followed.
• Chock blocks shall be used when parking a vehicle with inoperative
parking brakes, in extreme cold conditions, parking on inclines, or
whenever and wherever maintenance is being performed. Failure to
do this may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
NOTE
To apply parking brake, grasp handle firmly, and pull upward until
c. Once vehicle is completely stopped, apply parking brake lever (4).
d. Move transmission shift lever (3) to P (park).
e. Turn light switch (7) to OFF.
f. Place rotary switch (1) to ENG STOP.
NOTE
If there is engine run-on, pinch the fuel return line with your fingers
or a pair of pliers to stop the engine. Notify unit maintenance.
g. Lock steering wheel with cable (2), and chock wheels if tactical situation
permits.
2-68 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
1 3
6
5
4
Change 1 2-69
TM 9-2320-387-l0
2-15. OPERATION OF VEHICLE LIGHT SWITCH
a. Tt, illuminate instrument panel:

(1) Lift unlock lever (2) to UNLOCK and hold in position.
(2) Turn selector switch lever (1) to any ON position except B.O. MARKER.
(3) Turn auxiliary lever (3) to DIM or PANEL BRT (bright).
b. For normal daylight driving, turn selector lever (1) to STOPLIGHT.
c. For night driving, turn selector lever (1) to SERVICE DRIVE. The headlight
dimmer foot switch is depressed to provide high beam service light operation. The
indicator light (4) on the instrument panel should illuminate when high beams are
operating.
d. In blackout operations:
(1) When driving vehicle, turn selector lever (1) to B.O. DRIVE.
(2) When vehicle is parked, turn selector lever (1) to B.O. MARKER.
e. To illuminate parked vehicle at night (if tactical situation permits):
(1) Keep selector lever (1) in SERVICE DRIVE.
(21 Turn auxiliary lever (31 to PARK_
f. Move turn signal lever up for right turns, and down for left turns.
NOTE
l When activated, the warning flashers override operation of the
brake lights.
l The headlights cannot be turned on when auxiliary lever (3) is in
the PARK position.
g. For hazard warning lights (blinking lights):
(1) Turn selector lever (1) to SERVICE DRIVE or STOPLIGHT.
(2) Pull warning hazard tab out and move turn signal lever up to lock lever in
place.
(3) ‘Ib deactivate, move turn signal lever back to NEUTRAL.
h. For horn oneration. turn selector lever (1) to either STOPLIGHT or SERVICE
DRIVE. * ’
FRONT
2-70
TM 9-2320-387-10
NOTE:
TO MOVE SELECTOR SWITCH NOTE:
LEVER FROM OFF TO ANY ON
POSITION EXCEPT B.O. RETURN ALL LIGHT SWITCH
MARKER, UNLOCK SWITCH LEVERS TO THE OFF
LEVER MUST BE LIFTED TO POSITION AFTER EACH
UNLOCK. PERIOD OF OPERATION.
2-71
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-16. ADJUSTING DRIVER’S SEAT

a. Adjusting Seat Horizontally.
(1) Pull seat slide lever (2) upward and slide seat (3) to desired position.
(2) Release seat slide lever (2) to lock seat (3) into position.
b. Adjusting Seat Vertically.
(1) To lower seat (3), pull seat height adjustment lever (1) upward and allow
body weight to lower seat (3).
(2) To raise seat (3), pull seat height adjustment lever (1) upward and remove
body weight from seat (3).
(3) Release seat adjustment lever (1) to lock seat (3) in desired position.
ALL MODELS EXCEPT M1113
2-72 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-17. COMPANION SEAT ASSEMBLY AND BATTERY BOX COVER

REPLACEMENT
a. Removal.
(1) Release two latches (3) from strikers (4) securing companion seat assembly (1)
and battery box cover (5) to battery box (2).
(2) Lift and pull companion seat assembly (1) and battery box cover (5)
forward and remove from battery box (2).
b. Installation.
(1) Install companion seat assembly (1) and battery box cover (5) on battery
box (2).
(2) Secure seat assembly (1) and battery box cover (5) to battery box (2) by
connecting two latches (3) to strikers (4).
ALL MODELS EXCEPT M1114 M1114
Change 5 2-73
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-18. SEATBELT OPERATION – THREE-POINT SYSTEM
.WARNING.
Ensure all slack from seatbelt is removed. Seatbelt retracts and will
lock only during sudden stops and/or impact. Injury and/or death to
personnel will result if an accident occurs and seatbelt is not in use or
adjusted properly.
a. Seatbelt Fastening:
Pull shoulder harness and seatbelt (3) across body and fasten latch plate (2) to
belt buckle (1).
b. Seatbelt Adjustment:
Pull shoulder harness strap through latch plate (2) and remove slack from
seatbelt (3). Seatbelt (3) must fit snugly across operator’s and passenger’s hips,
shoulders, and chests.
c. Seatbelt Unfastening:
Push release button (4) on belt buckle (1) to release seatbelt (3).
2-74 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-18.1 SEATBELT OPERATION – IMPROVED PERSONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
WARNING
• Ensure all slack from shoulder strap and lap strap is removed. The
straps will lock only during sudden stops and/or impact.
• Lap strap and shoulder strap must be worn together. Injury and/or
death to personnel may result if shoulder strap is worn without the
lap strap or lap strap is worn without the shoulder strap.
NOTE
If strap is allowed to retract suddenly, it is possible for the retractor to
lock with the webbing fully retracted in which case it may not
automatically unlock. To unlock, pull slowly on the strap in order to
pack the webbing and allow the strap to extend an inch. Allow the
strap to retract slowly allowing the retractor to unlock.
a. Shoulder Strap/Lap Fastening:
(1) Pull shoulder strap (1) across body and fasten latch plate (9) to upper
slot (8) of buckle assembly (5).
(2) Pull lap strap (2) across body and fasten latch plate (3) to lower slot (4)
of buckle assembly (5).
b. Shoulder Strap/Lap Strap Unfastening:
Pull up on buckle assembly latch (6) to release both the shoulder strap (1)
and lap strap (2).
c. Buckle Assembly Adjustment:
(1) Lift the buckle adjuster knob (7) observing it is springloaded and moves
freely.
(2) Ensure adjuster can move freely throughout its full range.
(3) Ensure adjuster knob (7) can lock into each of the adjustment positions.
2
9
3
8
4
5
7 6
Change 5 2-74.1/(2-74.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-19. DEFROSTER OPERATION (M1113)

a. Start engine (para. 2-12).
b. Push fresh air intake lever (3) forward to close grille.
c. Turn heater fan switch (4) to desired setting, HIGH/LOW.
d. Position heater control knob (2) to desired setting.
e. Push in defroster control knob (1).
Change 3 2-75
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-20. DEFROSTER OPERATION (M1114)

a. Operation.
(1) Start engine (para. 2-12).
(2) Slide defroster register (1) to the right to open defroster.
(3) Pull fresh air control knob (2) in to close vents (5).
(4) Position heater control knob (3) to desired setting.
(5) Flip heater fan switch (4) up to turn on heater.
b. After Operation.
(1) Flip heater fan switch (4) down to turn off heater.
(2) Slide defroster register (1) to the left to close defroster.
(3) Stop engine (para. 2-14).
2-76
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-20.1. DEFROSTER OPERATION (M1151, M1151A1, M1152,

M1152A1, M1165, M1165A1, M1167)
a. Operation.
(2) Slide defroster register (2) to the right to open defroster.
(3) Adjust vents (1) to closed position.
(4) Flip fan switch (4) to desired setting, HIGH/LOW.
(5) Flip A/C / HEAT switch (3) down to turn on heater.
b. After Operation.
(1) Flip fan switch (4) to OFF position.
(2) Slide defroster register (2) to the left to close defroster.
4 3
Change 6 2-76.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-21. HEATER OPERATION (M1113, M1114)

NOTE
Perform step b for M1113 models only.
b. Push fresh air intake lever (3) forward to close grille.
c. Turn heater fan switch (4) to desired setting, HIGH/LOW.
NOTE
For maximum heat, pull heater control knob all the way out.
d. Position heater control knob (2) to desired setting.
e. To shut off outside air, pull out control knob (1).
2-76.2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-21.1. REAR HEATER ASSEMBLY OPERATION (M1114)

b. Pull valve (2) to UP position to close vent (1).
c. Push valve (2) to DOWN position to open vent (1).
NOTE
Pull valve all the way down for maximum heat.
d. Position valve (2) to desired setting.
Change 3 2-76.3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-21.2. HEATER OPERATION (M1151, M1151A1, M1152, M1152A1,

M1165, M1165A1, M1167)
a. Operation.
(2) Flip A/C / HEAT switch (1) down to turn on heater.
(3) Flip fan switch (2) to desired setting, HIGH/LOW, to activate heated air
output.
b. After Operation.
(1) Flip fan switch (2) to OFF position.
1
2
2-76.4/(2-77 blank) Change 6

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-22. TAILGATE OPERATION

a. Lowering Tailgate.
WARNING.
Do not use tow pintle as a step when entering or exiting vehicle cargo
area. Using tow pintle as a step may result in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
The tailgate should not be lowered farther than the length of tailgate
chains. Tailgate chains should always be used to support tailgate
when open. Do not allow tailgate to slam against lifting shackles.
(1) Remove two tailgate chain hooks (2) securing tailgate (1) to rear of vehicle
body.
(2) Lower tailgate (1) and secure with two tailgate chain hooks (2).
b. Raising Tailgate.
(1) Raise two tailgate chain hooks (2) and raise tailgate (1).
(2) Secure tailgate (1) to rear of vehicle body with two tailgate chain hooks (2).
~
~
1
2
2
2-78 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-22.1. OPTIONAL 12-VOLT AUXILIARY POWER OUTLET OPERATION
a. Operating 12-Volt Auxiliary Power Outlet.

(1) Remove screw-on cover (2) from 12-volt auxiliary power outlet (1).
WARNING
Use only 12-volt accessories with compatible plug ends when
connecting to 12-volt auxiliary power outlet. Damage to equipment or
serious injury to personnel may result if non-compatible accessories
are connected to 12-volt auxiliary power outlet.
CAUTION
Use a twisting motion when connecting accessories to 12-volt
auxiliary power outlet. Forcefully pushing accessory plugs onto 12-volt
auxiliary power outlet may cause damage to equipment.
(2) Connect 12-volt accessory plug to 12-volt auxiliary power outlet (1).
CAUTION
Do not use 12-volt accessories for long periods of time while vehicle
engine is off. This will cause premature battery failure and will
prevent vehicle starting.
(3) When finished using 12-volt accessory, disconnect 12-volt accessory plug
from 12-volt auxiliary power outlet (1) and install 12-volt auxiliary screw-on cover (2).
1 2
Change 6 2-78.1/(2-78.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-23. SLAVE STARTING OPERATION
a. Position slaving vehicle and disabled vehicle close enough for cable hookup.
b. Stop slaving vehicle engine.
c. Remove cover from slave receptacle of disabled vehicle and slaving vehicle.
.WARNING .
Ensure all battery cables in disabled vehicle are properly connected
before connecting slave cable. Damage to batteries, cables, or serious
injury to personnel may result from improperly connected batteries.
CAUTION
Use a twisting motion when installing slave cable to the receptacle.
Forcefully pushing the cable onto the receptacle may cause damage to
the receptacle mount.
NOTE
Ensure all electrical switches in both vehicles are turned off.
d. Connect slave cable to the slave receptacle of both vehicles.
e. Start slaving vehicle engine.
f. Start disabled vehicle engine.
CAUTION
Use a twisting motion when disconnecting slave cable from the
receptacle. Forcefully pulling the cable from the receptacle may cause
damage to the receptacle mount.
g. After engine starts, disconnect slave cable from both vehicles.
NOTE
For ease of removal, apply hand cleaner (appendix D, item 16) on the
inside of the cover before installing receptacle covers.
h. Install receptacle covers on both vehicles.
2-79
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-24. MAX TOOL KIT STOWAGE (M1113) OPERATION
a. Tool Removal.
(1) Disconnect three strap assemblies (2) in right footwell area (1) securing
ax (4), max tool carrying bag (5), and jack and tools bag (3). Remove ax (4) and max
tool carrying bag (5).
(2) Remove the following attachments from max tool carrying bag (5):
• Reversible rake/hoe attachment (12)
• Rake/hoe thumbscrew attachment (11)
• Shovel attachment (6)
• Six safety locking pins (8)
• Broad pick attachment (10)
• Pick attachment (9)
• Mattock attachment (7)
NOTE
• Using the ax and attachments, the max tool kit can be incorporated
into seven basic hand tools.
• Ax blade must be covered with sheath before using kit.
• Read all safety and assembly instructions enclosed with max tool
kit before using kit.
b. Reversible Rake/Hoe Attachment.
(1) Connect rake/hoe attachment (12) (with either rake or hoe in the working
position) into socket (13) on end of ax (4).
NOTE
Thumbscrew must be seated tightly in rake/hoe attachment and socket
of ax. Check thumbscrew often to be sure it does not work loose.
(2) Install thumbscrew (11) on rake/hoe attachment (12) and in socket (13) of
ax (4). Tighten thumbscrew (11).
(3) To remove rake/hoe attachment (12), remove thumbscrew (11) from
rake/hoe attachment (12) and ax (4).
c. Shovel Attachment.
NOTE
Shovel attachment is shown. Broad pick, pick, and mattock
attachments are attached basically the same.
(1) Connect shovel attachment (6) into socket (13) on end of ax (4).
(2) Insert safety locking pin (8) into hole in end of taper on shovel attachment (6).
(3) To remove shovel attachment (6), remove safety locking pin (8) from
shovel attachment (6) and ax (4).
d. Tool Installation.
(1) Replace attachments in the max tool carrying bag (5).
(2) Install max tool carrying bag (5) and jack and tools bag (3) with three strap
assemblies (2) in right footwell area (1) of vehicle.
2-80
TM 9-2320-387-10
REVERSIBLE RAKE/HOE SHOVEL ATTACHMENT

ATTACHMENT
Change 3 2-80.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-24.1. MAX TOOL KIT STOWAGE (M1152, M1152A1, M1165,

M1165A1) OPERATION
NOTE
Stowage location on M1165 and M1165A1 vehicles is in left wheelwell.
Stowage location on M1152 and M1152A1 vehicles is in right wheelwell.
The following procedure is for M1152 and M1152A1 vehicles.
a. Tool Removal.
(1) Disconnect two strap assemblies (4) in right footwell (3) and remove ax (1)
and max tool kit case (2).
(2) Remove the following attachments from max tool kit case (2):
NOTE
• Using the ax and attachments, the max tool kit can be incorporated
into seven basic hand tools.
• Read all safety and assembly instructions enclosed with max tool
2-80.2 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10

NOTE
(2) Install thumbscrew (3) on rake/hoe attachment (2) and in socket (4) of ax (1).
Tighten thumbscrew (3).
(3) To remove rake/hoe attachment (2), remove thumbscrew (3) from rake/hoe
attachment (2) and ax (1).
NOTE
(2) Insert safety locking pin (6) into hole in end of taper on shovel attachment (5).
(3) To remove shovel attachment (5), remove safety locking pin (8) from shovel
attachment (5) and ax (1).
(1) Replace attachments in the max tool kit case (7).
(2) Install max tool kit case (7) and ax (1) with two strap assemblies (9) in right
footwell (8) of vehicle.
REVERSIBLE RAKE/HOE SHOVEL ATTACHMENT

ATTACHMENT
Change 3 2-81
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-25. MAX TOOL KIT STOWAGE (M1114, M1151, M1151A1, M1167) OPERATION
a. Tool Removal.
(1) Open cargo shell door (para. 2-32).
(2) Lower tailgate (para. 2-22).
(3) Disconnect four strap assemblies (2) securing ax (3) and max tool carrying
bag (1) to tailgate (4). Remove ax (3) and max tool carrying bag (1).
(4) Remove the following attachments from max tool carrying bag (1):
NOTE
• Using the ax and attachments, the max tool kit can be
incorporated into seven basic hand tools.
• Read all safety and assembly instructions enclosed with max
tool kit before using kit.
NOTE
(2) Install thumbscrew (10) on rake/hoe attachment (11) and in socket (12) of
ax (3). Tighten thumbscrew (10).
(3) To remove rake/hoe attachment (11), remove thumbscrew (10) from
rake/hoe attachment (11) and ax (3).
NOTE
(2) Insert safety locking pin (7) into hole in end of taper on shovel
attachment (5).
(3) To remove shovel attachment (5), remove safety locking pin (7) from
shovel attachment (5) and ax (3).
(1) Replace attachments in max tool carrying bag (1).
(2) Install max tool carrying bag (1) and ax (3) on tailgate (4) with four strap
assemblies (2).
(3) Raise tailgate (para. 2-22).
(4) Close cargo shell door (para. 2-32).
2-82 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-83
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-26. TOWING OPERATION

CAUTION
• Before initiating vehicle recovery, operator should be familiar with
basic vehicle recovery techniques and precautions. Refer to FM 20-22,
Vehicle Recovery Operations.
• Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph (48 kph), or a towing
distance of 50 mi (48 km), without first removing the front propeller
shaft and/or rear propeller shaft, as specified in table 2-3. Failure to
remove the necessary propeller shafts may result in damage to the
transmission and/or transfer case.
• Do not exceed 15 mph (24 kph) towing speed when towing a shelter
vehicle. Failure to comply may cause damage to equipment.
• Avoid sharp turns and U-turns when towing. Failure to comply may
cause damage to equipment.
NOTE
• Towing operations for ECV vehicles are basically the same.
• If propeller shafts are to be removed, notify unit maintenance
personnel.
• Towing pintle (front bumper) provides improved driver control when
moving trailers in hard-to-maneuver areas and during aircraft
loading operations.
Table 2-3. Towing Operations.

Vehicle Towing Mode Prop Shafts
Rear wheels up Front off
Front wheels up Rear off
Four wheels on ground Front and rear off
a. Towing Vehicle from Front (Four Wheels on Ground with Like Vehicle).
CAUTION
• Always use a towbar when towing vehicle. Failure to do so may
cause damage to equipment.
• Place transmission and transfer case in N (neutral) (para. 2-13) prior
to towing a HMMWV vehicle from the front by a like vehicle at GVW
with all wheels on the ground. Failure to comply may cause damage
to one or both vehicles.
(1) Attach towbar (2) to the towing shackle brackets (4) of the vehicle to be
towed and to the pintle hook (1) of the towing vehicle.
(2) Attach safety chain (5) to vehicle frames directly behind bumper (3) or
bumperette (6). Let safety chain (5) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.
(3) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in N (neutral) (para. 2-13).
(4) Turn on hazard warning lights on both towing and disabled vehicles
(para. 2-13).
(5) Depress parking brake release button and release parking brake lever
(para. 2-15).
(6) Proceed with towing operation. The vehicle is capable of towing a vehicle
of similar weight, fully loaded, for a distance of 50 mi (80 km).
2-84 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
1 2 3
6 5 4
b. Towing Vehicle from Front (Front Wheels Up).
NOTE
• Towing operations for ECV vehicles are basically the same.
• Ensure that towbar is connected to towing brackets as shown in
illustration.
(1) Attach towbars (2) to brackets (10) and to wrecker towing pintle.
CAUTION
• Ensure that wrecker hoisting boom and hook are centered over the
lifting shackles. Failure to do this may result in difficult turning
during towing operations.
• Ensure safety chain is connected correctly to vehicles equipped with
a front winch. Failure to do so may result in damage to front winch.
(2) Install chain assembly (8) through lifting shackles (7) and attach chain
assembly (8) to the wrecker’s hoisting hook (9).
(3) Secure safety chain (5) to towed vehicle’s frame and to wrecker’s rear
tiedown bracket. Let safety chain (5) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.
8
9
10
5
Change 5 2-85
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-26. TOWING OPERATION (Cont’d)

(4) Hoist vehicle to be towed.
(5) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in N (neutral) (para. 2-13).
(para. 2-15).
(para. 2-13).
(8) Lift front wheels from ground.
(9) Proceed with towing operation.
c. Towing Vehicle from Rear (Rear Wheels Up).

NOTE
It will be necessary to remove the wrecker lifting eyes (shackle) prior
to attaching the towbar arms.
(1) Attach the eye of the towbar (3) to the pintle (4) of the vehicle requiring
towing and the towbar arms to the wrecker rear lifting eye attaching bracket.
CAUTION
• Ensure safety chain is connected correctly to vehicles equipped with
a rear winch. Failure to do so may result in damage to rear winch.
• Ensure that wrecker hoisting boom and hook are centered over the
(2) Install chain assembly (1) through the rear lifting shackles (6) and attach
the chain assembly (1) to the wrecker’s hoisting hook (2).
(3) Secure safety chain (5) to towed vehicle’s frame and to wrecker’s rear
tiedown bracket. Let safety chain (5) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.
WARNING
Prior to towing vehicle with rear wheels up, secure steering wheel to
prevent front wheels from turning. Failure to do this may cause
(4) Secure steering wheel.
(5) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in N (neutral).
(para. 2-15).
(7) Depress parking brake release button and release parking brake lever.
(8) Lift rear wheels from ground.
(9) Proceed with towing operations.
2-86 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
d. Towing Shelter Vehicle from Rear (Rear Wheels Up).

NOTE
It will be necessary to remove the wrecker lifting eyes (shackle) prior
to attaching the towbar arms.
(1) Attach the eye of the towbar (3) to the pintle (4) of the vehicle requiring
towing and the towbar arms to the wrecker rear lifting eye attaching bracket.
CAUTION
Ensure that wrecker hoisting boom and hook are centered over the
NOTE
If necessary, relocate the rear lifting shackles from the ends of the
bumper to the location indicated.
(2) Install the two hooks of chain assembly (1) through the rear lifting
shackles (6) and attach the chain assembly (1) to the wrecker’s hoisting hook (2).
(3) Secure safety chain (5) to towed vehicle’s frame and to wrecker’s pintle.
Let safety chain (5) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.
Change 3 2-87
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-26. TOWING OPERATION (Cont’d)
.WARNING .
Prior to towing vehicle with rear wheels up, secure steering wheel to
prevent front wheels from turning. Failure to do this may cause
(4) Secure steering wheel.
(5) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in N (neutral)
(para. 2-13).
(para. 2-15).
(para. 2-13).
(8) Lift rear wheels from ground.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 15 mph (24 kph) towing speed when towing a shelter
vehicle. Failure to comply may cause damage to equipment.
(9) Proceed with towing operations.
2-88 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-27. TRAILER TOWING

.WARNING .
• Towing trailers too large or too small for the vehicle capacity is
dangerous. These trailers do not track vehicle properly, cargo
shifting occurs, and the likelihood of trailer capsizing during
movement is increased. This could result in damage to equipment
and injury or death to personnel.
• M1113 and M1114 vehicles are not authorized to tow M1101 or
M1102 trailers unless they have been retrofitted with
MWO 9-2320-280-20-6; Airlift Bumper Reinforcement. Towing these
trailers without the airlift bumper reinforcement MWO applied
could result in damage to equipment or injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
Be sure to close tailgate before towing trailer. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the master cylinder.
NOTE
• Towing any trailer with a HMMWV other than the authorized
M116 Series, M101 Series, M1101, and M1102 trailers or a M102
howitzer is not authorized.
• When towing a trailer, the maximum safe slope is reduced from
40% to 30%.
ECV vehicles are capable of towing a M116 Series, M101 Series, M1101, or M1102
trailers and the M102 howitzer. ECV vehicles have a maximum towed load capacity of
4,200 lb (1,907 kg) as specified in table 2-3.1.
Trailer payloads should be evenly distributed to prevent excessive tongue loads.
Table 2-3.1 Vehicle Trailer Towing Requirements.
MWO Requirements
HMMWV
Vehicle Description Remarks
Model Number <3400 lb <4200 lb
M1101 M1102
(1544 kg) (1907 kg)
M1113 S250 Shelter Carrier A A A A See Note
M1114 Up-Armored A A A A —
M1151/M1151A1 Armament Carrier B B B B —
M1152/M1152A1 Expanded Capacity B B B B —
M1165/M1165A1 Command and Control B B B B —
M1167 TOW ITAS Carrier B B B B —

A = MWO 9-2320-280-20-6
<3400 lb (1544 kg) = Any system mounted on LTT Chassis with GVW of 3400 lb (1544 kg) or less.
<4200 lb (1907 kg) = Any system mounted on LTT Chassis with GVW of 4200 lb (1907 kg) or less.
B = Comes equipped. No MWO required.
Note: Pintle extensions are required on vehicles with Shelter Standardized Integrated Command Post System
(SICPS) type II. If vehicle is equipped with SICPS (M788) mounted, MWO 9-2320-280-20-6 is not required.
Change 6 2-89
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-28. ELECTRIC WINCH OPERATION (M1113, M1114)

NOTE
The electric winch is an optional kit which may or may not be installed
on the vehicle.
a. General. The vehicle electrical system is used to power the winch. It is
recommended to have engine running while operating the winch so the alternator
recharges the battery. Increased engine rpm can be maintained by use of the hand
throttle. When engaging or disengaging the clutch, it may be necessary to rotate the
drum by hand to align gears.
b. Preparation for Use.
(1) Park vehicle directly facing object to be winched.
(2) Apply parking brake (para. 2-13).
(4) Chock wheels.
c. Unwinding Winch Cable.
CAUTION
Do not power out winch cable for more than 10 ft (3 m). Use FREE
SPOOL for paying out long lengths of winch cable. Failure to FREE
SPOOL long lengths of winch cable may cause damage to winch.
(1) Pull lever (4) out to FREE SPOOL.
.WARNING .
• Wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Do not handle
cable with bare hands. Failure to wear leather gloves may cause
injury to hands.
• When fully extending winch cable, ensure that four wraps of winch
cable remain on drum at all times. Failure to do this may cause
injury, death to personnel, or damage to winch.
NOTE
Allow 1 ft (30.5 cm) of slack in winch cable prior to start of winching
operations. This allows time for winch motor start up for maximum
pulling power.
(2) Pull cable (5) out by hand to desired length. Connect to load leaving
1 ft (30.5 cm) of slack in cable (5).
d. Pulling Load.
.WARNING .
Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch cable during winch
operation. A snapped winch cable may cause injury or death.
NOTE
Refer to table 1-11, Winch Data, for pulling load capacity.
(1) Install remote control switch (1) by connecting plug (2) to connector (3).
(2) Push lever (4) in to ENGAGED.
2-90 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
Ml 114 REARWINCH
Ml 113 FRONT WNCH
2-91
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-28. ELECTRIC WINCH OPERATION (Cont’d)

d. Pulling Load (Cont'd).
CAUTION
Do not fully apply hand throttle during engine NO LOAD condition.
Damage to engine may result.
NOTE
• The electric winch is equipped with an electronic current limiter
switch to prevent winch overload. If winch stops repeatedly during
operation and restarts in approximately five seconds, the electronic
current limiter is being activated, indicating an overload condition.
• The electric winch is equipped with a thermal cutoff switch to
prevent winch from overheating. If winch stops during operation, and
does not restart within five seconds, wait approximately two minutes
to let winch cool off and allow thermal switch to reset. If after five
minutes winch is still inoperative, notify unit maintenance.
• Engine speed is maintained for battery charging only and will not
change winch operating speed.
(3) Pull hand throttle (1) out until desired engine speed is obtained.
(4) Operate remote control switch (2) to IN or OUT until load has been
retrieved.
e. Securing Winch After Operation.
CAUTION
Winch cable must be wound onto drum under a load of at least 500 lb
(227 kg) or outer wraps will draw into the inner wraps and damage
winch cable.
(1) Wind winch cable (6) until hook (7) is 4 ft (1.2 m) from cable guide (8).
(2) Pull lever (5) out to FREE SPOOL and rotate drum by hand to retrieve
the remaining cable (6).
(3) Remove remote control switch (2) by disconnecting plug (3) from connector (4).
(4) Push lever (5) in to ENGAGED.
(5) Release hand throttle (1).
2-92
TM 9-2320-387-10
FREE SPOOL ENGAGED
M1114 REAR WINCH
FREE SPOOL ENGAGED
M1113 FRONT WINCH
Change 2 2-92.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-28.1. HYDRAULIC WINCH OPERATION
a. General. Vehicle must be running for power steering system to power

winch. Applying vehicle brakes or turning steering wheel can be done while
operating winch, but this may cause winch to stop. To achieve 100% pulling power,
do not brake or steer while operating winch. It is possible to pay out vehicle’s winch
cable without vehicle running. This is accomplished with the freespool method. Keep
no less than five cable wraps on drum during all winch operations.
b. Preparation for Use.
(1) Park vehicle directly facing object to be winched and place transmission
in P (park).
(2) Place transfer selector lever in low lock.
(3) Apply parking brake.
(4) Chock wheels.
c. Unwinding Winch Cable.
(1) Move selector levers (2) and (3) to FREE. This setting on winch is
FREESPOOL.
WARNING
• When fully extending winch cable, ensure that five wraps of winch
cable remain on drum at all times. Failure to do this may cause
damage to equipment or injury or death to personnel.
• Wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Do not handle
cable with bare hands.
• Do not even slide gloved hands across winch cable. Injury can
result.
NOTE
Allow 1 ft. (30.5 cm) of slack in winch cable prior to start of winching
operations. This allows time for winch motor start up for maximum
pulling power.
(2) Pull out winch cable (1) to desired length. Connect to load, leaving 1 ft.
(30.5 cm) of slack in cable (1).
(3) If retrieving load by moving vehicle and not winding winch cable, move
winch selector levers to WINCH LOCKED UP position.
2-92.2 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
DRUM ROTATION - REF
1
2
3
Change 2 2-92.3
TM 9-2320-387-10
d. Powering Winch In and Out.

CAUTION
• Do not power out winch cable for more than 10 ft. (3.5 m). Use free
spool for paying out long lengths of winch cable. Failure to free
spool long lengths of winch cable will cause damage to winch.
• Wind winch cable onto drum under a load of at least
500 lb (227 kg) or outer wraps will draw into inner wraps and
damage winch cable.
• Do not move winch selector levers with load on winch or when
powering winch in or out. Moving winch selector levers with load
on winch or when powering winch may cause damage to winch.
NOTE
• Refer to table 1-11.1 (optional 10,500 lb.), Winch Data for Pulling
Capacity.
• Wrapping winch cable is essential and should be done as soon as
winch is applied to vehicle. This procedure ensures winch cable is
tight on drum and should be accomplished during monthly PMCS,
or if winch cable has been powered or freespooled out more than
50% of cable length.
(1) Align drum gears.
(a) Remove remote control (6) from storage compartment (7) under
passenger seat.
(b) Remove cap (10) from controller plug (8) and connect hand controller
connector (9) to controller plug (8).
NOTE
LOCK LOW GEAR is the preferred winch speed for all recovery and
wrapping operations.
(c) Move winch selector lever (1) to LOW. Move winch selector
lever (5) to FREE.
WARNING
Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch cable during winch
operation. A snapped winch cable may cause injury or death.
CAUTION
Do not move winch levers with load on winch or when powering
winch in or out.
(d) Power winch in and out with no load on cable for 1/2 second at a
time until full engagement is accomplished.
(2) Attach winch cable (3) to load. Press OUT remote control button (11) or
IN remote control button (12) until load has been retrieved.
NOTE
This winch uses right-lay bottom feed method of winch cable on winch
drum. Ensure cable wrap begins from right side of winch drum.
(3) Power in winch cable (3), ensuring cable wraps (2) are tight.
2-92.4 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
(4) Continue powering in winch cable (3) under load until approximately
four feet (1.2 m) from hook. Disconnect load and power in, keeping cable taut, until
hook clevis touches fairlead roller (13). Clevis should hang freely with less than one
foot (.31 m) of cable exposed.
e. Securing Winch After Operation.
(1) Move levers (1) and (5) to FREE positions and rotate drum by hand to
retrieve remaining cable.
(2) Remove hand controller connector (9) from controller plug (8) and place
remote control (6) in stowage compartment (7).
(3) Move lever (1) to LOW position and lever (5) to HIGH position to lockup
winch (4)
(4) Install cap (10) on controller plug (8).
1
2 7
1 6
5
~
5
4 3
~
10 13
11
12
Change 2 2-93
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-29. FIRE EXTINGUISHER OPERATION

a. Before Operation.
(1) Ensure operator PMCS have been accomplished and needle of indicator
gauge (1) is in the green zone. Refer to table 2-2.
(2) Refer to para. 2-2a for fire extinguisher stowage location.
.WARNING .
• Avoid using fire extinguisher in unventilated areas. Prolonged
inhalation exposure to extinguishing agent or fumes from burning
materials may cause injury to personnel.
• Using fire extinguisher in windy areas will cause rapid dispersal of
extinguishing agent and reduce effectiveness in fire control.
b. During Operation.
(1) To operate fire extinguisher (4), remove from stowage bracket. Remove
locking pin (2).
(2) Squeeze handles (3) together and direct extinguishing agent to base of
flames. To extinguish burning liquid in a container, direct extinguishing agent
against inside of container, just above burning liquid.
c. After Operation.
(1) Stow fire extinguisher (4) in stowage bracket.
(2) Notify unit maintenance to replace or recharge fire extinguisher (4) after
use.
1 3
2-94
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-30. CREW DOOR OPERATION (M1114)
WARNING
• Use care when opening and closing doors. Do not rest fingers in
door opening. Personnel injury may result.
• Ensure crew doors are locked during vehicle operation. Ballistic
integrity cannot be maintained if crew doors are unlocked.
NOTE
Crew doors have a double-catch latching mechanism. Ensure door
is completely closed and there is no gap between vehicle body and
door.
a. Open crew door (5) by turning handle (1) on outside of crew door (5). Pull door
closed using strap handle (8) on inside of crew door (5).
b. Lock crew door (5) by pushing sliding door bar (6) into door latch cover (9) while
turning sliding door bar (6) downward, toward crew door (5). Unlock crew door (5) by
pushing sliding door bar (6) into door latch cover (9) while turning sliding door bar (6)
upward.
c. Lift up on window locking bar (10) until it is clear of locking hole (3) in
window frame (4). Slowly raise or lower window (2) to desired position. Engage
window locking bar (10) into locking hole (3) in window frame (4).
d. To exit vehicle, open crew door (5) by pulling up on crew door release handle (7)
located on inside of crew door (5). Close crew door (5).
1
2
3
10 4
DOOR DOOR
~
LOCKED UNLOCKED 5
6 6 7
6
Change 3 2-94.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-30.1. CREW DOOR OPERATION (M1151A1, M1152A1,

M1165A1, M1167) (WITH PERIMETER ARMOR)
WARNING
• Use care when opening and closing doors. Do not rest fingers in
door opening. Injury to personnel may result.
integrity cannot be maintained if crew doors are unlocked. Failure
NOTE
Crew doors have a double-catch latching mechanism. Ensure door
is completely closed and there is no gap between vehicle body and
door.
a. Open crew door (5) by turning handle (1) on outside of crew door (5). Pull door
closed using strap handle (6) on inside of crew door (5).
b. Lock crew door (5) by pushing down combat lock handle (7) until engaging vehicle
body by pulling and turning release pin (8). Unlock crew door (5) by pulling release pin
(8) out and pulling up combat lock handle (7) until disengaging vehicle body.
c. Lift up on window locking bar (4) until it is clear of locking hole (3) in window
frame (10). Slowly slide window (2) to desired position. Engage window locking bar (4)
into locking hole (3) in window frame (10).
d. To exit vehicle, open crew door (5) by pushing in crew door release handle (9)
located on inside of crew door (5). Close crew door (5).
1 2
~
4
5
10
6
8 7
2-94.2/(2-94.3 blank) Change 6

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-30.2. FRAG 5 CREW DOOR OPERATION (M1151A1,

M1152A1, M1165A1, M1167)
WARNING
• Use care when opening and closing Frag 5 doors. Do not rest
fingers in door opening. Injury to personnel may result.
a. Opening Door from Exterior.
Push exterior handle (1) down toward bottom of vehicle.
b. Opening Door from Interior.
Lift interior handle (2) up toward top of vehicle.
NOTE
Engaging combat lock prevents access to interior of vehicle unless
emergency rescue wrench is used.
c. Engaging Combat Lock.
Push interior handle (2) down toward bottom of vehicle.
d. Disengaging Combat Lock.
Lift interior handle (2) up toward top of vehicle.
2-94.4 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-30.2. FRAG 5 CREW DOOR OPERATION (M1151A1,

M1151A1, M1165A1, M1167) (Cont’d)
Change 6 2-94.5
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-30.3. FRAG 5 CREW DOOR OPERATION (M1114)
WARNING
• Use care when opening and closing Frag 5 doors. Do not rest
fingers in door opening. Injury to personnel may result.
a. Opening Door from Exterior.
Push exterior handle (1) down toward rear of vehicle.
b. Opening Door from Interior.
Lift interior handle lock (2) and pull interior handle (3) toward rear of vehicle.
NOTE
Engaging combat lock prevents access to interior of vehicle unless
emergency rescue wrench is used.
c. Engaging Combat Lock.
Push interior handle lock (2) and push interior handle (3) toward front of vehicle.
2-94.6 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-30.3. FRAG 5 CREW DOOR OPERATION (M1114) (Cont’d)
Re
ar
of
ve
hic
le
➡
2
➡
cle
hi
3
ve
of
ar
Re
Change 5 2-94.7
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-31. C-PILLAR DOOR OPERATION (M1114)
NOTE
Second locking point is a safety feature which prohibits door from
accidentally closing upon objects protruding through door opening
if the door is not in a locked position.
a. To fully open, unlock C-pillar door (3) by depressing locking mechanism (1).
b. Using handle (2), move door (3) to right, keeping locking mechanism (1)
depressed while sliding past safety locking point (4).
c. Release and engage locking mechanism (1) at far right. Door (3) is now
secured.
d. To partially close, release locking mechanism (1) and engage at the second
safety locking point (4).
e. Release and engage locking mechanism (1) at far left safety locking point (4).
Door (3) is now secured.
2-94.8 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-31.1. C-PILLAR DOOR OPERATION (M1151A1, M1167)

(WITH PERIMETER ARMOR)
NOTE
• Second locking point is a safety feature which prohibits door from
accidentally closing upon objects protruding through door opening if the
door is not in a locked position.
• Operation of left and right C-pillar doors is basically the same. This
procedure covers the right C-pillar door.
a. To fully open, unlock C-pillar door (3) by depressing locking mechanism (1).
b. Using handle (2), move door (3) to right, keeping locking mechanism (1)
depressed while sliding past safety locking point (4).
c. Release and engage locking mechanism (1) at far right. Door (3) is now
secured.
d. To partially close, release locking mechanism (1) and engage at the second
safety locking point (4).
e. Release and engage locking mechanism (1) at far left safety locking point (4).
Door (3) is now secured.
2
~
Change 5 2-94.9
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-31.2. EMERGENCY RESCUE WRENCH OPERATION

(OLD CONFIGURATION) (M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1)
WARNING
Emergency rescue wrench is for removal of capscrews in an
emergency situation. Do not use wrench to install capscrews or for
any other purpose. Failure to comply may result in injury to
NOTE
Before utilizing this tool, attempt to open door using door handle, as
combat locks may not be employed.
(1) Remove emergency rescue wrench (1) from stowage location (2).
(2) Identify door (3) that allows for most immediate access.
NOTE
One capscrew in each group protrudes out from door overlay.
NOTE
There is no order in which the upper and lower set of capscrews are
to be removed. They are to be removed as groups, either upper or
lower. Always begin with the two countersunk screws and ending with
the protruding capscrew.
(3) Remove two countersunk capscrews (5) and capscrew (4).
(4) Open door (3) with handle (6) after capscrews (5) and (4) are removed.
(5) Return emergency rescue wrench (1) to vehicle stowage location (2) and
secure.
2-94.10 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

(OLD CONFIGURATION) (M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1) (Cont’d)
6
5
4
1
Change 5 2-94.11
TM 9-2320-387-10

(NEW CONFIGURATION) (M1151A1, M1152A1,
M1165A1, M1167)
WARNING
Door assemblies are extremely heavy. All personnel must take care
during removal of door assembly. All personnel not participating in
emergency door removal must stand clear of door assembly during
removal. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel
(1) Attempt to open door (2) using door handle (3) as combat locks may not
be employed. If door (2) fails to open, proceed to step 2.
(2) Using emergency rescue wrench (1), remove two capscrews (8),
lockwashers (9), washers (10), and combat lock access plate (5) from door (2).
NOTE
Perform step 3 for left side/driver’s side of vehicle and step 4 for
right side/passenger side of vehicle.
(3) Left Side/Driver’s Side of Vehicle. Using emergency rescue
wrench (1), turn capscrew (4) counter-clockwise approximately 1/4 turn until an
audible click is heard (combat lock is disengaged). Attempt to open door (2) using
door handle (3). If door (2) fails to open, proceed to step 5.
(4) Right Side/Passenger Side of Vehicle. Using emergency rescue
wrench (1), turn capscrew (4) clockwise approximately 1/4 turn until an audible
click is heard (combat lock is disengaged). Attempt to open door (2) using door
handle (3). If door (2) fails to open, proceed to step 5.
(5) Attach chain (7) to D-ring (6) located on vehicle door (2). Attach chain (7) to
rear bumper shackles of pulling vehicle and pull. If door (2) fails to open, proceed to
step 6.
(6) Using prybar, attempt to pry door (2) open.
2-94.12 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10

(NEW CONFIGURATION) (M1151A1, M1152A1,
M1165A1, M1167) (Cont’d)
LEFT SIDE/DRIVER’S
SIDE DECAL RIGHT SIDE/PASSENGER
SIDE DECAL
2
1
3
8 9 10
4
5
7
6
Change 6 2-94.13
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-31.4. EMERGENCY FRAG 5 DOOR REMOVAL (M1114)
NOTE
Emergency rescue wrench can be used in place of combat lock lever
for the following procedures.
a. Disengaging Combat Lock from Exterior.
(1) Remove lanyard pin (5) and pull combat lock lever (1) off door assembly
from first responder vehicle.
(2) Slide combat lock lever (1) onto square lug (8) in bottom exterior linkage
cover (9) and turn combat lock lever (1) toward front of vehicle.
(3) Slide combat lock lever (1) onto square lug (6) in top exterior linkage
cover (7) and turn combat lock lever (1) toward front of vehicle.
b. Disengaging Combat Lock from Interior.
(1) Remove lanyard pin (5) and pull combat lock lever (1) off door assembly (2).
(2) Slide combat lock lever (1) onto square lugs (3) and (4) and turn combat
lock lever (1) toward rear of vehicle.
2
5
➡
e
icl
eh
fv
to
on
Fr
2-94.14 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-31.4. EMERGENCY FRAG 5 DOOR REMOVAL (M1114) (Cont’d)
Fr
on
to 8
fv
eh
➡ icl 9
e
Change 5 2-94.15
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-31.5. FRAG 5 DOOR CREW EXTRACTION BRACKET (CEB)

OPERATION (M1114)
WARNING
• The Crew Extraction Bracket (CEB) is considered safe for use by
properly trained soldiers, providing they are made aware of the
following safety hazards, and appropriate caution is exercised.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Door opening will result in hardware from the blast locks becoming
secondary projectiles in the crew compartment. This method can be
used, but flying debris may injure the crew. First Responders will
have to assess the crew’s condition inside, and assess likelihood and
severity of casualties against possible loss of life or limb.
• The area should be cleared of all bystanders to prevent injuries
from any potential hardware that may come from the vehicle
during the door extraction. Failure to comply may result in injury
• All rescue personnel will remain secured inside the rescue vehicle
during actual removal of the door. Failure to comply may result in
• The gunner should be inside the vehicle, and the hatch closed and
secured. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
• The Emergency Crew Extraction Device is utilized in emergency
situations to forcefully open/remove the door from an M1114 UAH
in order to reach injured or incapacitated crew inside the vehicle.
• The removal operations of the door should be done with the
vehicles positioned perpendicular to each other.
• The vehicle used to perform the door extraction should be an
armored vehicle with acceptable tow rating for the load being
extracted (Minimum working rating of 18,000 lbs).
• The vehicle that the selected door is being extracted from should
be secured to prevent any unwanted movement during the
extractions.
• Door extraction must be performed using a serviceable strap as
specified and included in the M1114 HMMWV Winch BII. If a
HMMWV BII strap is not available, a serviceable strap, chain, or
cable with a working load rating of at least 18,000 pounds and a
minimum length of 10 feet may be used. The strap/chain/cable
should be inspected for defects prior to use in removing a door. A
damaged or defective strap/chain/cable shall not be utilized to
remove a door and should be disposed of.
2-94.16 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-31.5. FRAG 5 DOOR CREW EXTRACTION BRACKET (CEB)

OPERATION (M1114) (Cont’d)
a. Quick Pull Door Release.
(1) Secure tow strap or chain (2) to D-ring (6) with pinch mount or shackle to
damaged vehicle (5).
NOTE
The tow strap should have some slack in it before attempting door
release.
(2) Accelerate tow vehicle (1) and pull until door (4) is parallel with tow strap
(2) and door handle (3) breaks off.
NOTE
Combat lock lever can be used in place of emergency rescue wrench
for the following step.
(3) Slide emergency rescue wrench (9) onto square lug (8) in bottom exterior
linkage cover (7) and turn combat lock lever (9) toward front of vehicle.
b. Slow Pull Door Release.
NOTE
Slow pull door release may cause damaged vehicle to drag.
(1) Secure tow strap (2) to D-ring (6) with pinch mount or shackle.
(2) Slowly accelerate tow vehicle (1) until all slack is removed from tow strap (2).
(3) Continue accelerating tow vehicle (1) until door is released (4).
4
1 5
3
9 8
7 6
Change 5 2-95
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-32. CARGO SHELL DOOR OPERATION (M1114, M1151, M1151A1,

M1167)
WARNING
Do not attempt to operate cargo shell door forward latch. The cargo
shell door is not to be opened from inside the vehicle. Opening cargo
shell door from inside the vehicle may cause damage to equipment or
injury to personnel.
NOTE
• For ease of operation, a grab-hold loop can be attached to the cargo
door strap at the discretion of unit commander. Notify unit
maintenance for installation of grab-hold loop.
• It may be necessary to lift cargo shell door past the FULL OPEN
position for installation or removal of the rear hatch support.
a. Raising Cargo Shell Door.

Pull door handle (1) upward and release. Push door (2) open, until door (2) will
open automatically to full open position. Insert rear hatch support (5) into stop plate (6).
b. Lowering Cargo Shell Door.
Remove rear hatch support (5) from stop plate (6). Pull on strap (3) to lower door
(2) then slam shut. Ensure door (2) is locked by observing alignment of door surface
with cargo shell surface side and bottom edges (4).
2-96 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 3 2-96.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
c. Cargo Shell Door Emergency Service.

NOTE
Should both ends of the cargo shell door open at the same time, a
safety catch built into the rear latch mechanism will normally engage
the rear strikers and prevent the door from slinging forward. Should
this occur, procedures to reinstall the door are provided in steps 1
through 8. If door has separated from all four strikers, notify unit
maintenance.
(1) Inspect rear latch mechanism and ensure rear strikers (2) have engaged
the safety catch (3).
(2) Turn locking device (9), pull cargo shell door forward latch (6) from inside
vehicle, and completely raise door (5).
(3) Release rear door latch locks (1), if locked.
(4) Grasp raised door (5) from rear of vehicle with both hands and pull right
side of door (5) straight down. A distinctive latching sound should be heard.
2-96.2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
(5) Inspect right rear latch mechanism again to ensure striker (2) engagement
with latch (4).
(6) Perform steps 3, 4, and 5 for left side of door.
(7) Enter vehicle, pull forward end of door (5) shut, and turn locking
device (9). Inspect forward door latches (7) to ensure proper striker (8) engagement.
(8) Exit vehicle and raise door (5) from the rear. Operation of door (5) should
be smooth. If operation is not smooth, or door components appear damaged, notify
unit maintenance.
Change 3 2-97
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-33. UP-ARMORED WEAPON STATION OPERATION (M1114)
a. Operation.
WARNING
Use care when opening and closing covers. Do not rest fingers in cover
opening. Personnel injury may result.
(1) Open turret weapon station cover (1) by releasing three latches (5) on
inside of vehicle (4).
(2) Push small section of cover (2) up and back until resting on large section
of cover (1).
(3) Push up large section of cover (1). While holding cover (1), release two
rods (3) from cover (1) and insert rods (3) into catch blocks (11).
(4) Slip pins at end of rods (3) into holes in catch blocks (11), then depress
and rotate levers (10) until engaged.
NOTE
It may be necessary to rotate turret to set brake.
(5) Disengage turret brake (6) by lifting turret brake handle (7).
(6) Rotate turret (9) to desired position.
(7) Set turret brake (6) by applying downward pressure to turret brake
handle (7) until locked.
NOTE
For new turret brake configuration, perform steps 7.1 through 7.3.
(7.1) Disengage turret brake (13) from turret stop ring (15) by pulling turret
brake handle (12) outward.
(7.2) Rotate turret (14) to desired position.
(7.3) Engage turret brake (13) by pushing turret brake handle (12) inward.
CAUTION
Do not sit, stand, or place heavy objects on weapon station, tray, or
cover. Components may bend and damage to equipment will occur.
(8) Use gunner’s sling (8) as seat rest or restraint if gunner is positioned in
the weapon station during travel or weapon operation.
b. After Operation.
(1) Depress and rotate levers (10) and remove two rods (3) from catch
blocks (11).
(2) Insert rods (3) in cover (1).
(3) Close weapon station cover (1) and secure with three latches (5).
2-98 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
2
1
13
3 12
4 ~
11
5
6
~
10
14
15
7
9 8
NEW TURRET BRAKE CONFIGURATION
Change 5 2-98.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-33.1. ARMAMENT WEAPON STATION OPERATION (M1151, M1151A1)

(1) Release three weapon station cover securing latches (5) and push weapon
station cover (3) open using weapon station cover handle (2).
(2) Secure weapon station cover (3) in the open position with retaining strap (1)
and catch (9).
(3) Raise weapon station brake handle (4) to unlock weapon station (7).
(4) Use weapon station brake handle (4) and turret positioning handle (6) to
rotate weapon station (7) to the desired azimuth.
(5) Lock weapon station (7) with brake handle (4).
CAUTION
Do not sit, stand, or place heavy objects on weapon station, tray, or
cover. Components may bend and damage to equipment will occur.
(6) Use gunner’s sling (8) as seat rest or restraint if gunner is positioned in
the weapon station during travel or weapon operation.
b. After Operation.
(1) Remove two retaining strap (1) from catch (9).
(2) Close weapon station cover (3) and secure with three weapon station
securing latches (5).
3
2
1 4
5
8
~
~
2-98.2/(2-98.3 blank) Change 5 6

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-33.2. BATTERY POWERED MOTORIZED TRAVERSING UNIT

(BPMTU)
a. Motorized Turret Rotation.
(1) Ensure motor engagement control (1) is in the horizontal position.
WARNING
Failure to disengage the manual traversing gear while operating the
battery powered motorized traversing unit may result in injury to
(2) Disengage the traversing gear.
(3) Magnetically attach joystick assembly (4) in desired position.
(4) To move joystick assembly (4), push down on joystick assembly (4) to break
magnetic hold. Replace joystick assembly (4) in desired position.
(5) Pull out emergency stop switch (2) to “ON” position.
(6) Push joystick (5) to direction indicated on joystick assembly (4) to rotate
turret left or right.
(7) Break-away connector (3) should stay connected when operating vehicle to
allow constant charging of system.
NOTE
Turret rotation causes break-away connection to separate. The system
is designed to continue functioning on its own power. As soon as
mission allows, the break-away connectors should be re-connected to
continue charging.
(8) When turret rotation is no longer necessary, depress emergency stop
switch (2) to “OFF” position.
(9) Re-charge system after every mission.
(10) Push in emergency stop switch (2) to “OFF” position when BPMTU is not
charging or in use.
b. Manual Turret Rotation.
CAUTION
Turret has no brake when motor engagement control is in the
“NEUTRAL” vertical position.
(1) Push in and turn motor engagement control (1) to the vertical position to
place motor and drive assembly in “NEUTRAL”.
(2) Manually rotate turret as desired.
(3) When manual turret rotation is no longer needed, lock turret in place by
turning the motor engagement control (1) in the horizontal “DRIVE” position.
2-98.4 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10

(BPMTU) (Cont’d)
PULL PUSH
ON OFF
Change 5 2-98.5
TM 9-2320-387-10

(BPMTU) (Cont’d)
c. Checking Charge Level Of Turret Batteries.
NOTE
Emergency stop switch must be in the “ON” position to charge
batteries.
(1) Battery status indicator (1) is normally off – “lights out”. Pushing battery
status indicator button (2) will turn LED display of battery status indicator (1) “ON”
for ten seconds. Holding battery status indicator button (2) down will keep LED
display on, until ten seconds after button (2) is released.
(2) Seven LED segments are provided for battery capacity indication. When all
seven segments are illuminated, battery is fully charged. As battery discharges, fewer
LED segments will be illuminated. When battery is low, only one LED segment will be
illuminated and will be flashing. There may still be significant battery life remaining
when flashing low, but running below this point will degrade battery life.
(3) The battery status indicator button (2) may be used at any time to
indicate battery capacity, but to get the most accurate indication, perform the
following test:
a.) Disconnect break-away connector (5).
b.) In order to reset system, push in the emergency stop switch (4) to the
“OFF” position, pull out emergency stop switch (4) to the “ON”
position.
c.) Activate the turret motor by moving the joystick rotating turret for
approximately five seconds.
d.) Press battery status indicator button (2) and read the capacity from
the LED display.
d. Charging the system using vehicle power system.
NOTE
• Charge batteries whenever possible to maintain capacity. Batteries
not in a fully charged state will have decreased capacity.
• Turret batteries have more capacity when warm than cold. Turret
batteries have more capacity when new than old.
(1) Rotate turret so that the break-away connector (5) is aligned and able to
fully engage when connected.
(2) Depress emergency stop switch (4) to “OFF” position.
(3) Connect break-away connector (5) connecting the vehicle buss bar cable to
the system control assembly (3).
(4) Pull out emergency stop switch (4) to the “ON” position.
(5) Start vehicle (para. 2-12).
NOTE
Vehicle system must be above 25 amps to allow BPMTU charging to
external batteries.
(6) Ensure all unnecessary electrical equipment in vehicle is turned off.
2-98.6 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10

(BPMTU) (Cont’d)
(7) Allow vehicle to idle at high RPM by pulling throttle lock until LED
display (1) shows batteries are fully charged.
(8) Full charge allows approximately ten continuous hours of motorized
traversing unit usage.
e. Charging the system using external charging unit.
(1) Rotate turret so that connector (5) is aligned and able to be fully engaged
when connected.
(2) Depress emergency stop switch (4) to “OFF” position.
(3) Connect break-away connector (5) connecting the battery switching system
to the system control assembly (3).
(4) Ensure all unnecessary electrical equipment in vehicle is turned off.
(5) Remove cover from slave charging receptacle.
(6) Connect external battery charging unit cable to the vehicle slave
receptacle.
(7) Pull out emergency stop switch (4) to the “ON” position.
(8) Charge the system until battery status indicator shows batteries are fully
charged.
(9) Remove slave cable and replace cover.
(10) Full charge allows approximately ten continuous hours of motorized
traversing unit usage.
PULL PUSH
ON OFF
3
4
5
Change 6 2-98.7
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-33.3. MANUAL TRAVERSING UNIT OPERATION
Operation.
WARNING
• Ensure roof is clear of tools and personnel prior to operating
weapon station. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, always utilize the manual crank handle to
rotate the turret. Failure to do so may result in injury to personnel.
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, always secure the locking mechanism
while on an incline to prevent the T-GPK from unexpectedly
rotating, which may result in injury to the crew or damage to the
ITAS.
(1) Use the turret brake lever (3) to unlock the turret brake (2)
(para. 2-33.4).
(2) To engage manual traversing gear on manual gear unit (5), pull back and
lift up on the engage/disengage lever (6) and let gear swing in to engage ring gear (1).
(3) If not installed, install manual crank handle (4) on manual traversing
gear unit (5) with detent pin (7) and swing hand lever down on manual crank
handle (4).
(4) To rotate weapon station to the right, turn the manual crank handle (4)
clockwise.
(5) To rotate weapon station to the left, turn the manual crank handle (4)
clockwise.
(6) Use the turret brake lever (3) to lock the turret brake (2) to desired
position. (para. 2-33.4).
2-98.8 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
7 4
Change 6 2-98.9
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-33.4. TURRET BRAKE OPERATION
Operation.
WARNING
• Ensure roof is clear of tools and personnel prior to operating
weapon station. Failure to comply may result in injury to
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, always utilize the manual crank handle to
rotate the turret. Failure to do so may result in injury to
personnel.
• For TOW ITAS vehicles, always secure the locking mechanism while
on an incline to prevent the T-GPK from unexpectedly rotating,
which may result in injury to the crew or damage to the ITAS.
NOTE
A hand brake lever is used to lock and unlock the turret brake.
(1) Squeeze hand brake lever (3) and rotate it to unlocked position.
(2) Release hand brake lever (3) to allow turret stop ring (1) to rotate freely.
NOTE
The turret stop ring should turn easily when force is applied but
stop quickly when no force is exerted.
(3) With the turret brake (2) unlocked, use body motion to rotate turret stop
ring (1) to desired position.
(4) Use the gunner’s stand and sling seat to help rotate turret stop ring (1).
(5) Turn turret stop ring (1) slightly, if necessary, to align teeth (4) on turret
stop ring (1) with locking notches (5) on turret brake (2).
(6) Apply hand brake lever (3) to lock turret stop ring (1) in place for travel
and weapon maintenance. Rotate turret stop ring (1) to where weapon is facing
forward before locking turret brake (2) for travel to keep roof hatch clear.
2-98.10 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2 LOCK
UNLOCK
~
STOW
4
Change 6 2-99/(2-100 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-34. FUEL DOOR OPERATION (M1114)

a. Operation.
(1) Open right rear crew door (1).
(2) Release catch (2) holding fuel door (3) closed.
(3) Pull fuel door (3) open.
b. After Operation.
(1) Close fuel door (3).
(2) Engage catch (2) into fuel door (3) and lock catch (2).
(3) Close right rear crew door (1).
Change 3 2-100.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-35. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (M1114)
a. Operation.
(2) Flip air conditioner ON/OFF switch (2) to the right to turn on air
conditioner.
(3) Flip heater fan switch (6) up to turn on.
(4) Pull fresh air control knob (4) out and slide defroster register (7) to the
right to open vents (1).
(5) Push up floor outlet lever (3) to open floor vents.
(6) Position fan control knob (5) to desired setting.
(7) Adjust vents (1) for air flow directions.
b. After Operation.
(1) Push down floor outlet lever (3) to close floor vents.
(2) Slide defroster register (7) left and push knob (4) in to close vents (1).
(3) Flip heater fan switch (6) down to turn off.
(4) Flip air conditioner ON/OFF switch (2) to the left to turn off air
conditioner.
1 7
1
2
4 3
5
6
REAR
2-100.2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-35.1. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (M1151, M1151A1, M1152,

M1152A1, M1165, M1165A1, M1167)
a. Operation.
(2) Flip A/C / HEAT switch (2) up to turn on air conditioner.
(3) Flip fan switch (3) to desired setting, HIGH/LOW, to activate A/C air
output.
(4) Adjust vents (1) for air flow direction.
b. After Operation.
(1) Flip fan switch (3) down to OFF position.
1
Change 6 2-101
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-36. WINDSHIELD DE-ICER OPERATION (M1114)
NOTE
De-icer will not operate if vehicle is not running.
b. Flip toggle switch (1) on de-icer unit (2) to engage position. Hold until
indicator light (3) illuminates, then release.
NOTE
De-icer will continue to operate until toggle switch is moved to OFF
position or engine is turned off.
c. Toggle switch (1) will revert to ON position and the de-icer unit (2) will be in
operation.
d. To discontinue de-icer unit (2), flip toggle switch (1) to OFF position, heating
element will disengage and indicator light will go out.
e. Stop engine (para. 2-14).
2-102
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-36.1. ADJUSTABLE GUNNER PLATFORM OPERATION (M1114, M1167)

a. Operation.
(1) Depress two lockbuttons (6) on locking pins (5) and remove locking pins (5)
from locking lugs (9) and holes (4) securing platform (1) in stowed position (13).
NOTE
Ensure footman loops are laid out flat behind platform when securing
platform in stowed position.
(2) Grasp hand hold (2) on platform (1) to lift platform (1) to either half-
height position (12) or full-height position (11).
(a) If half-height position (12) is required, lift platform (1) all the way up
and turn two latches (7) so ledges of latches (7) are facing up and parallel to bottom
edge of platform (1). Lower platform (1) and allow to rest on ledges of latch (7) at
half-height position (12). Insert locking pins (5) through locking holes (4) in
platform (1) and holes (10) in platform risers (8).
(b) If full-height position (11) is required, lift platform (1) to full-height
position (11), and ensure locking holes (3) in left and right sides of platform (1) are
aligned with locking holes (10) in platform risers (8). Insert locking pins (5) through
locking holes (3) in platform (1) and holes (10) in platform risers (8).
b. After operation.
(1) Remove locking pins (5) securing platform (1) in either half-height
position (12) or full-height position (11) by pressing lockbuttons (6) and removing
locking pins (5). Lift up on platform (1), and turn two latches (7) so ledges of
latches (7) are facing downward, to floor.
(2) Lower platform (1) to stowed position (13) and align holes (4) with locking
lugs (9). Insert locking pins (5) through holes (4) and lugs (9).
7 10
1 11
8 12
13
3 4
Change 6 2-102.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-36.2. GUNNER’S RESTRAINT SYSTEM OPERATION (M1114,

M1151, M1151A1, M1167)
NOTE
• The gunner’s restraint system is only designed to prevent the
gunner from being ejected from the vehicle; it will not pull the
gunner back into the vehicle.
• All straps can be adjusted to provide a secure fit.
• Straps are color-coded to aid in installation.

a. Position red shoulder strap (1) over right shoulder and attach to rotary buckle (5).
b. Position green shoulder strap (3) over left shoulder and attach to rotary buckle (5).
c. Position rotary buckle (5) to front of body, waist high.
d. Position red lap strap (6) around right side of waist and attach to rotary
buckle (5).
e. Position green lap strap (4) around left side of waist and attach to rotary
buckle (5).
f. Adjust all straps (1), (3), (4), and (6) to provide a secure fit.
WARNING
• Ensure anchor strap is positioned in front of gunner’s sling seat.
Failure to do so may result in injury or death to personnel.
• Ensure anchor strap is adjusted so that no slack remains in strap.

Failure to do so may result in injury or death to personnel.
g. Attach anchor strap (9) to lower retractor belt (8).
h. To release gunner’s restraint harness (2), push and rotate rotary release
button (7) on rotary buckle (5) in either direction.
2-102.2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
2
3
1
6 5
Change 5 2-102.3/(2-102.4 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
Section IV. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
2-37. GENERAL
Special instructions for operating and maintaining vehicles under unusual

conditions are included in this section. Unusual conditions are extreme
temperatures, humidity, and/or terrain. Special care in cleaning and lubrication
must be taken in order to keep vehicles operational when operating under unusual
conditions.
2-38. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL

CONDITIONS REFERENCE INDEX
REF. PAGE
TITLE
PARA. NO.
2-39. Special Instructions 2-104

2-40. Operating on Unusual Terrain 2-105
2-41. Cold Weather Starting Below +32°F (0°C) 2-106
2-42. Operating in Extreme Cold, on Ice or Snow 2-107
2-43. Operating in Dusty, Sandy Areas 2-108
2-44. Operating in Mud 2-109
2-45. Operating in Extreme Heat 2-110
2-46. Operating in Rainy or Humid Conditions 2-112
2-47. Shallow Water Fording Operation 2-112
2-48. Deep Water Fording (M1113, M1151, and M1152)
Operation 2-114
2-49. Runflat Operation 2-121
2-50. Vehicular Heater Operation 2-122
2-50.1. Troop/Cargo Winterization Heater Operating 2-122.2
Instructions
Change 3 2-103
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-39. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
.WARNING .
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within
the limits specified in this TM. Operation beyond these limits is
prohibited by IAW AR 750-1 without written approval from the
Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments Command,
ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
NOTE
Except where noted, all normal operating procedures will apply in
addition to special instructions for unusual operating conditions.
a. Cleaning. Refer to para. 2-5 for cleaning instructions and precautions.
b. Lubrication. Refer to appendix-G for proper lubricating instructions.
c. Driving Instructions.
(1) FM 21-305, Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver, contains special
driving instructions for operating wheeled vehicles.
(2) FM 55-30, Army Motor Transport Units and Operations, contains
instructions on driver selection, training, and supervision.
(3) FM 9-207, Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold
Weather, contains instructions on vehicle operation in extreme cold of 0° to -65°F
(-18° to -54°C).
(4) Other documents with information on vehicle operation under unusual
conditions are:
(a) FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual (d) FM 90-5 Jungle Operations
(b) FM 31-71 Northern Operations (e) FM 90-6 Mountain Operations
(c) FM 90-3 Desert Operations
d. Special Purpose Kits. Paragraphs describing special purpose kits for operation
under unusual conditions are:
(1) Deep water fording operation, para. 2-48.
(2) Vehicular heater operation, para. 2-50.
e. Transmission Range Selection. For proper transmission range selection,
refer to table 1-6. If transmission range selection is peculiar to an unusual operating
condition, it will be specified in the applicable paragraph.
f. Transfer Case Range Selection.
CAUTION
• Vehicle must be stopped and transmission shift lever in N (neutral)
before transfer case can be shifted. Failure to do this will result in
damage to drivetrain.
• Damage to drivetrain will result if transfer case is operated in L
(low range) or H/L (high/lock range) on high-traction surfaces with
no wheel slippage.
2-104 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
CAUTION
• When necessary to temporarily operate transfer case in H/L
(high/lock range) or L (low range) when additional traction is
needed to prevent wheel slippage, avoid sharp, continuous turns.
Failure to avoid sharp, continuous turns while operating transfer
case in locked ranges may cause damage to drivetrain.
• Immediately after operation in H/L (high/lock range) or L (low
range), ensure transfer case is shifted to H (high range) to avoid
damage to drivetrain. If any noises from drivetrain components are
heard, ensure that transfer case range is properly selected.
For proper transfer case range selection, refer to table 1-7. If transfer case range
selection is peculiar to an unusual operating condition, it will be specified in the
applicable paragraph.
2-40. OPERATING ON UNUSUAL TERRAIN
a. General Rules. Driving off-road over rough or unusual terrain basically

requires using good driving sense. Experience is the best teacher, but there are a
few good rules to keep in mind when you are in that kind of driving situation.
.WARNING .
• Use extreme caution when transporting personnel. Although certain
design characteristics of the vehicle, such as vehicle width, ground
clearance, independent suspension, etc., provide improved
capabilities, accidents can still happen.
• Operators are reminded to observe basic safe driving techniques/skills
when operating the vehicle, especially when transporting personnel.
Vehicle speed must be reduced consistent with weather and
road/terrain conditions. Obstacles such as stumps and boulders must
be avoided. Failure to use basic safe driving techniques/skills may
result in loss of control and an accident or rollover resulting in injury
or death to personnel and damage to equipment. Since the troop/
cargo area has minimal overhead protections and does not have
seatbelts, personnel seated here are at greater risk of serious injury.
(1) Use H/L (high/lock range) or L (low range) only when absolutely
required by the conditions identified in table 1-7. After operations on unusual
terrain, be sure to shift the transfer case from H/L (high/lock range) or L (low
range) to H (high range) to avoid damaging drivetrain components.
(2) Select proper transmission and transfer case driving ranges. Refer to table 1-6
for transmission range selections. For transfer case range selections, refer to table 1-7.
(3) Keep engine at a moderate speed. The engine works at its best pace in
mid-range revolutions per minute (rpm). You can slow down or speed up quickly
without changing gears if you get into a tight spot. Use transmission shift lever and
transfer case shift lever to control engine speed.
(4) Attempt to keep wheels from spinning. If wheels start to spin, ease off the
accelerator pedal until wheels regain traction.
(5) Instructions for placing vehicle in motion (para. 2-13) also apply to
operating on unusual terrain.
Change 3 2-105
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-40. OPERATING ON UNUSUAL TERRAIN (Cont’d)

b. Unusual Terrain Driving Techniques.
CAUTION
• Do not shift into any lower gear than is necessary to maintain head-
way. Attempt to maintain a constant engine speed. Over-revving
engine will cause the wheels to slip, and traction will be lost.
• Before ascending or descending steep hills, stop vehicle, place trans-
mission to N (neutral), and shift transfer case to L (low range). Failure
to shift transfer case to L (low range) before ascending or descending
steep hills may result in damage to drivetrain.
• Operating vehicle in H/L (high/lock range) or L (low range) with
uneven tire pressures on hard top surfaces where the wheels cannot
slip to equalize rotation may cause driveline torque buildup, difficulty
in shifting, or damage to vehicle components.
(1) Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transfer case into L (low range) and
the automatic transmission into 1 (first). If wheels start to slip, walk the vehicle the
last few remaining feet of a hill by swinging the front wheels sharply left and right
if situation permits. This action will provide fresh “bite” into the surface and will
usually result in enough traction to complete the climb.
CAUTION
When L (low range) is used for engine braking while descending steep grades,
avoid sharp, continuous turns. Failure to avoid sharp, continuous turns while
operating transfer case in range may cause damage to drivetrain.
(2) You can proceed safely down a steep grade by shifting the transfer case
into L (low range) and the transmission into 2 (second) or 1 (first). Let the vehicle go
slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression.
.WARNING .
Do not travel diagonally across a hill unless it is absolutely necessary,
or injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result.
(3) When moving across a slope, choose the least angle possible, keep moving,
and avoid turning quickly.
(4) After shifting from locked ranges, always back up for a distance of
approximately 5 ft. (1.5 m) before proceeding to prevent driveline torque buildup.
2-41. COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW +32°F

.WARNING .
Starting aids will not be used on the engine. Use of starting aids may
cause damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.
.WARNING .
• Do not use the hand throttle as an automatic speed or cruise control.
The hand throttle does not automatically disengage when brake is
applied, resulting in increased stopping distances and possible
hazardous and unsafe operation.
• Do not fully apply hand throttle when engine is not under load.
NOTE
If engine cranks slowly and voltmeter indicates low battery charge
level, attempt to slave start vehicle (para. 2-23). If vehicle still will not
start, perform troubleshooting procedures in table 3-1.
2-106 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
b. After engine starts, pull out hand throttle until desired engine speed is
obtained. Twist handle to lock hand throttle.
c. Allow engine to warm up at an increased speed for approximately three
minutes.
d. After warm-up period, unlock and push in hand throttle. Allow engine speed
to decrease.
2-42. OPERATING IN EXTREME COLD, ON ICE OR SNOW

(1) Operate vehicular winterization equipment (para. 2-50).
(2) Scrape off any ice accumulated on vehicle.
(3) Remove ice and snow from area around air cleaner intake cap.
(4) Refer to para. 2-41 for cold weather starting instructions.
(5) Refer to para. 2-40 for techniques that can be used when operating on
unusual terrain.
(6) Refer to para. 3-22 for tire chain installation and operation.
(7) Operate troop/cargo winterization heater, if applicable (para. 2-50.1).
.WARNING .
• Vehicle operation in snow is a hazardous condition. Operator must
travel at reduced speeds and be prepared to meet sudden changes in
road conditions. Failure to maintain safe stopping distances may
cause damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.
• Pump brakes gradually when stopping vehicle on ice or snow. Sudden
braking will cause wheels to lock and vehicle to slide out of control,
causing damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.
• Chock blocks shall be used when parking a vehicle in extreme cold
conditions. Failure to do so may result in injury to personnel or
NOTE
Keep area around air cleaner intake cap clear of snow and ice. Snow
and ice may melt, refreeze, and cause restriction in air intake system.
If necessary, remove intake cap and clear ice and snow without
damaging intake cap screen. Hold the cap near the vehicle exhaust to
quickly melt ice without damaging screen.
(1) Place transmission shift lever in (overdrive), and transfer case shift lever in
H/L (high/lock range). Place vehicle in motion slowly to prevent wheels from spinning.
NOTE
If additional power is needed to extract vehicle when mired in snow,
place transmission in 1 (first) and transfer case in L (low range). After
vehicle is extracted from mired condition, immediately return transfer
case to H/L (high/lock range) position and transmission to (overdrive).
(2) If rear skidding occurs:
(a) Let up on accelerator pedal.
(b) Turn steering wheel in direction of skid until control has been regained.
(c) Apply brake pedal in a gradual pumping manner.
c. After Operation.
(1) Remove all ice and snow from underside of vehicle and fuel tank filler cap.
(2) Drain fuel filter (para. 3-11).
Change 3 2-107
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-43. OPERATING IN DUSTY, SANDY AREAS

a. General. Vehicles operating in dusty or sandy areas require frequent
servicing of the air filter and cooling system.
NOTE
For dusty conditions, a air cleaner, NSN 2940-01-302-8028, can be
inserted in the air intake shield assembly at the discretion of the unit
commander.
b. Before Operation.
(1) When operating on loose sand or soft ground, place transfer case shift lever
in H/L (high/lock range) position and transmission shift lever in D (overdrive).
unusual terrain.
c. During Operation.
NOTE
If additional power is needed to extract vehicle when mired in sand,
case to H/L (high/lock range) position and transmission to D (overdrive).
(1) Frequently check air restriction gauge. If indicator shows red, park
vehicle, stop engine, and refer to para. 3-15 for emergency air cleaner servicing.
(2) If engine overheating occurs:
(a) Park vehicle, and allow engine to idle.
(b) Observe coolant temperature gauge for steady cooling.
CAUTION
Stop engine if coolant temperature gauge suddenly increases beyond
approximately 250°F (120°C) and/or overheat lamp illuminates.
Failure to comply will result in damage to engine.
(c) If coolant temperature continues to increase or does not lower, stop
engine. Perform applicable troubleshooting procedures in table 3-1.
(3) Accelerate slowly so wheels will not spin and dig into sand.
CAUTION
Use a wrecker or second vehicle equipped with winch to recover
vehicles mired in deep sand. Do not attempt to rock vehicles out of
deep sand with quick transmission shift changes. Damage to
transmission will occur.
d. After Operation.
(1) At end of daily operation, clean all sand from accelerator linkage and
brake components.
(2) Park vehicle in shade whenever possible to protect tires, soft tops, paint,
wood, and seals from sun, dust, and sand.
(3) If shade is not available, cover vehicle with tarpaulin. When entire vehicle
cannot be covered, protect windows and hood with tarpaulin to prevent entry of
sand or dust.
(4) Vehicles completing operation in dusty, sandy areas must be lubricated
and serviced by unit maintenance as soon as possible.
2-108 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-44. OPERATING IN MUD

(1) Before operating in mud, place transfer case shift lever in H/L (high/lock
range) and transmission shift lever in D (overdrive).
unusual terrain.
CAUTION
• Do not repeatedly shift transmission or overspeed the engine
during operation in deep mud. Damage to drivetrain may result.
• Use wrecker or a second vehicle equipped with winch to recover
vehicles mired in deep mud. Do not attempt to rock vehicles out of
deep mud with quick transmission shift changes. Damage to
transmission will occur.
NOTE
If additional power is needed to extract vehicle when mired in mud,
case to H/L (high/lock range) position and transmission to D (overdrive).
Skidding and sudden loss of steering control are operating problems in mud.
When rear end skidding occurs, immediately turn wheel in direction of skid until
control has been regained.
c. After Operation.
WARNING
Do not rely on service brakes until they dry out. Keep applying brakes
until uneven braking ceases. Failure to do this may cause damage to
vehicle and injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
Do not allow water to enter air intake cap or air cleaner assembly.
Damage to engine will occur.
(1) Wash the following components as soon as possible with low-pressure water:
(a) Radiator and oil cooler
(b) Propeller shaft U-joint and halfshafts
(c) Steering linkage and ball joints
(d) Brake rotors and pads (service)
(e) Parking brake linkage
(f) Service lights
(g) Transmission control linkage
(h) Accelerator control linkage and “V” of engine block
(i) Swaybar bushings
(j) Towing pintle
(k) Fuel filler cap
(l) Vehicle exterior
(m) Geared hubs
(n) Advance solenoid rocker arm and fuel injection pump
Change 1 2-109
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-44. OPERATING IN MUD (Cont’d)
(2) Remove mud from air cleaner dump valve (para. 3-16).
(3) Remove mud from drain hole (1) on converter housing cover (2).
(4) Remove mud from battery box drain holes.
NOTE
To prevent parking brake linkage from binding, lithium grease should
be used after operating in mud.
(5) Clean mud, grit, and debris from linkage. Apply lithium grease (appendix D,
item 14), and move linkage back and forth to work into joints.
(6) After operation in deep mud, vehicle must be lubricated and serviced by
unit maintenance as soon as possible.
2-45. OPERATING IN EXTREME HEAT
a. General. Extreme heat exists when ambient temperatures reach 95°F (35°C) or
more. The effect of extreme heat on vehicle engine is a decrease in engine efficiency.
(1) Perform before operation checks and services in table 2-2.
(2) Check for foreign objects in front of radiator and clean as required.
(3) Check batteries more frequently. If electrolyte is low, add distilled water
2-110 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
CAUTION
Avoid continuous vehicle operation at high speeds. Avoid long, hard
pulls on steep grades with transfer case shift lever in L (low range)
position. Damage to transfer case will result.
(1) Frequently check coolant temperature gauge (2) and oil pressure
gauge (1). Engine is overheating if one or more of the following conditions exist:
(a) Engine coolant temperature is more than approximately 250°F (120°C)
as indicated by temperature gauge (2) and/or overheat lamp illuminates.
(b) Engine oil pressure drops below approximately 15 psi (103 kPa) with
engine under a load.
(c) Engine oil pressure drops below approximately 6 psi (41 kPa) with
engine at idle.
1
2
(2) If engine overheating occurs:

(a) Park vehicle, allowing engine to idle.
(b) Observe coolant temperature gauge (2) for steady cooling.
CAUTION
• Stop engine if coolant temperature gauge suddenly increases
beyond approximately 250°F (120°C) and/or overheat lamp
illuminates. Failure to comply will result in damage to engine.
• Notify unit maintenance to check differentials, transfer case, and
transmission fluids for “oil breakdown” caused by overheating.
(c) If engine coolant temperature continues to increase or does not lower,
stop engine. Perform troubleshooting procedures in table 3-1.
Change 3 2-111
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-46. OPERATING IN RAINY OR HUMID CONDITIONS

a. General. Materiel inactive for long periods during rainy or humid conditions
can rust rapidly. Fungus may develop in the fuel tanks as well as on soft tops, seats,
and other components. Frequent inspections, cleaning, and lubrication are
necessary to maintain the operational readiness of vehicles.
b. Before Operation. Fuel filter must be drained frequently because of high
condensation in fuel system. To drain fuel filter, refer to para. 3-11.
(1) If necessary, place transfer case shift lever in H/L (high/lock range) to
start without spinning wheels.
(2) Do not spin wheels when placing vehicle in motion in heavy rain.
unusual terrain.
2-47. SHALLOW WATER FORDING OPERATION

a. General. The vehicles have a 30 in. (76 cm) shallow water fording capability.
CAUTION
Never attempt shallow water fording unless water depth is known to
be 30 in. (76 cm) or less, and bottom is known to be hard. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 kph) during fording operation. Damage to vehicle
may result.
(1) Ensure oil dipstick, transmission dipstick, oil filler cap, and fuel tank cap
are secure.
(2) Secure all loose objects on vehicle.
(3) Ensure battery caps are all present and tight.
(4) Place transfer case shift lever in H (high range).
(1) Enter water slowly and maintain even vehicle speed while fording.
(2) Exit water in area with gentle slope.
2-112
TM 9-2320-387-10
NOTE
• Hydrostatic lock is caused by the entry of substantial amounts of
frequently occurs during or just after fording. Water is forced into
the air intake system, drawn into the engine, and locks up the
engine.
will test the engine.
d. After Operation.
.WARNING .
Do not rely on service brakes after fording until the brakes dry out.
Keep applying brakes until uneven braking ceases. Failure to do this
may cause damage to vehicle or injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
If accumulated water drains slowly through floor drain holes, refer to
unit maintenance for drilling and improving drain holes.
(1) If fording operation was through salt water, wash and wipe off salt deposits
as soon as possible.
NOTE
be used after operating in water.
(2) Clean mud, grit, and debris from brake linkage. Apply lithium grease
(appendix D, item 14), and move linkage back and forth to work into joints.
(3) After shallow water fording operation, vehicle must be lubricated and
serviced by unit maintenance as soon as possible.
BRAKE LINKAGE
Change 1 2-113
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-48. DEEP WATER FORDING (M1113, M1151, AND M1152)

OPERATION
a. General. The deep water fording kit allows M1113, M1151, and M1152
vehicles to ford water up to 60 in. (152 cm) deep.
CAUTION
• Never attempt deep water fording unless water depth is known to be
60 in. (152 cm) or less, and bottom is known to be hard. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 kph) during fording operation. Damage to vehicle
may result.
• Do not operate fan switch during deep water fording operation.

Damage to vehicle may result.
(1) Raise and secure hood (para. 3-9).
(2) Ensure rubber cap (2) on bottom of air cleaner body (1) is secure.
(3) Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
2-114 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
WARNING
Exhaust system components are hot after prolonged vehicle use.
Ensure exhaust system components are cool before removing/
installing exhaust assembly. Failure to do this may result in injury to
personnel.
NOTE
Any items removed for fording must be stowed for reuse.
(4) Remove three locknuts (191, washers (111, capscrews (121, and washers (11)
securing tailpipe (13) to muffler (18).
(5) Remove two nuts (17),lockwashers (161, and U-bolt (14) securing tail-
pipe (13) to clamp (15).
(6) Remove tailpipe (13) and gasket (10) from muffler (18).
(7) Install two rubber isolators (7) into wheelhouse (8). To ease installation,
wet rubber isolators (7) with water.
(8) If isolators (7) cannot be installed easily, check alignment of holes in
wheelhouse (8) and reinforcement bracket (5). ‘Ib align holes, loosen capscrews (6)
securing reinforcement bracket (5) to wheelhouse (8). Align holes in wheelhouse (8)
and reinforcement bracket (5) and tighten capscrews (6). Install isolators (7).
(9) Install exhaust assembly (9) and gasket (10) on muffler (18) with three
washers (ll), capscrews (121, washers (111, and locknuts (19).
(10)Install exhaust assembly (9) on wheelhouse (8) with two washers (4) and
locknuts (3).
2-115
TM 9-2320-387-10

OPERATION (Cont’d)
(11) Ensure oil dipstick, transmission dipstick, oil filler cap, and fuel tank cap
are secure.
(12) Secure all loose objects on vehicle.
(13) Ensure battery caps are all present and tight.
(14) Place transfer case shift lever in appropriate range (table 1-7).
(15) Turn off all non-essential electrical loads (lights, heater/defroster, A/C fan).
(16) Place fording selector switch (1) in DEEP FORD position prior to entering
water.
(17) Pull out hand throttle (2) until desired engine speed is obtained. Twist
hand throttle (2) to lock in position.
(18) Open driver and passenger windows.
(1) Enter water slowly and maintain even vehicle speed, 5 mph (8 kph)
maximum.
(2) Exit water in area with gentle slope.
(3) Place fording selector switch (1) in VENT position after leaving water.
.WARNING .
After fording, do not use the hand throttle as an automatic speed or
cruise control. The hand throttle does not automatically disengage
when brake is applied, resulting in increased stopping distances and
possible hazardous and unsafe operation. Injury to personnel or
damage to equipment may result.
(4) Unlock and push in hand throttle (2).
2-116 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 1 2-117
TM 9-2320-387-10

.WARNING .
Do not rely on service brakes after fording until the brakes dry out.
Keep applying brakes until uneven braking ceases. Failure to do this
may cause damage to vehicle, and injury or death to personnel.
(5) Place transfer case shift lever in desired range (table 1-7).
NOTE
• Hydrostatic lock is caused by the entry of substantial amounts of water
into the engine through the air intake system and subsequent
contamination of the fuel system. Hydrostatic lock most frequently
occurs during or just after fording. Water is forced into the air intake
system, drawn into the engine, and locks up the engine.
• Notify unit maintenance if you suspect hydrostatic lock and they will
test the engine.
d. After Operation.
(1) Stop engine.
.WARNING .
Exhaust system components are hot after prolonged vehicle use.
Ensure exhaust system components are cool before removing/
installing exhaust assembly. Failure to do this may result in injury to
personnel.
NOTE
• Steps 2 through 9 are performed only if required.
• If accumulated water drains slowly through the holes, refer to unit
maintenance for drilling and improving drain holes.
(2) Remove three locknuts (14), washers (15), capscrews (7), washers (6),
gasket (5), and exhaust assembly (4) from muffler (13).
(3) Remove two locknuts (1), washers (2), and exhaust assembly (4) from
wheelhouse (3).
(4) Install gasket (5) and tailpipe (8) on muffler (13) with three washers (6),
capscrews (7), washers (15), and locknuts (14).
(5) Install tailpipe (8) on clamp (10) with U-bolt (9), two lockwashers (11),
and nuts (12).
2-118 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
15
Change 3 2-119
TM 9-2320-387-10

(6) Clean and stow intake and exhaust assembly components.

(7) If fording operation was through salt water, wash and wipe off all salt
deposits as soon as possible.
NOTE
be used after operating in water.
(8) Clean mud, grit, and debris from brake linkage. Apply lithium grease
(appendix D, item 14), and move linkage back and forth to work into joints.
(9) After deep water fording operation, vehicle must be lubricated and
serviced by unit maintenance as soon as possible.
BRAKE LINKAGE
2-120 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-49. RUNFLAT OPERATION
The vehicles are equipped with runflat devices, allowing the vehicle to be driven with one
or more tires flat. For runflat operations, refer to table 2-4.
.WARNING .
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 kph) during any runflat operation. Do
not exceed 20 mph (32 kph) with both rear tires flat. Loss of vehicle
control may occur, causing damage to equipment and injury or
death to personnel.
• Speeds indicated in table 2-4 are maximum and must be reduced
when traveling on secondary roads, cross-country, or in traffic.
Failure to reduce speeds could cause loss of control of vehicle,
causing damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
• When driving vehicle, existing conditions are constantly changing.
Never drive at a speed greater than is reasonable and prudent for
these conditions. Loss of vehicle control may occur, causing damage
to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
• A wheel that has been run flat must be replaced and inspected by
unit maintenance as soon as possible before reuse, or damage to
• Runflat operation may cause the tread to separate from the tire
and/or wheel. If abnormal handling is experienced, or noise such as
flapping or pounding around the wheel well occurs, the tread needs
to be cut away from the wheel before continuing operation. Failure
to do so could result in damage to the vehicle.
Table 2-4. Runflat Operation.

NOTE
Runflat travel distance will improve with rubber runflat. If additional travel is
required, tire tread may be cut away from tire.
Combination of Flat Tires Recommended Vehicle Speed Distance
Two tires flat – rear 20 mph max. (32 kph) 30 mi (48 km)
One tire flat – any location 30 mph (48 kph) 30 mi (48 km)
Two tires flat – same side 30 mph (48 kph) 30 mi (48 km)
Two tires flat – front only 30 mph (48 kph) 30 mi (48 km)
2-121
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-50. VEHICULAR HEATER OPERATION
NOTE
The vehicular heater is an optional kit which may or may not be
installed on the vehicle.
a. General. The vehicular heater is used for pre-heating and boosting the heat
of the water-cooled engine. The heater works in conjunction with the heating system
of the vehicle to heat driver’s cabin, passenger compartment, and to defrost windows
and windshield of the vehicle.
The heater operates independently of the vehicle engine. It is connected to the
coolant circuit or the heating circuit, fuel supply system, and the electrical system of
the vehicle.
When the operating temperature has been reached, the temperature sensor will
send a signal to the control unit. The heat output will then be reduced to 25 percent.
Should the temperature still remain at the upper limit, the heater will turn off, but
the coolant pump will remain running.
The heater will automatically restart once the system temperature has dropped
to the lower switch point of the sensor.
.WARNING .
• Do not operate the vehicular heater in a closed area without
proper exhaust evacuations. Damage to heater or injury to
• Do not operate the vehicular heater when refueling. Damage to
heater or injury to personnel may result.
NOTE
• After shutting off the on/off switch there is a cool down period of
90 seconds. The blower and coolant pump works for 90 seconds
to purge the heater.
• DFA fuel should be used at temperatures below -40°F (-4°C).
b. Operation.
(1) Activate heater by moving on/off switch (1) on the vehicle control panel (3)
to ON.
(2) An amber light (2) indicates heater is in operation.
(3) Pull heater control knob (4) all the way out for maximum heat output.
(4) If, during heater operation, supplied voltage drops for more than
20 seconds, fault lock out will occur and the heater will switch off. If this happens,
2-122 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
3
4
2
M1151, M1151A1, M1152,

M1152A1, M1165, M1165A1, M1167
Change 6 2-122.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-50.1. TROOP/CARGO WINTERIZATION HEATER

a. General.
Troop/cargo winterization heater is for use during extremely cold
temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -50°F (-46°C).
CAUTION
Do not operate troop/cargo heater in ambient temperatures above
0°F (-18°C), or with fan switch in HI position, when temperature is
above -25°F (-32°C). Damage to equipment will result.
NOTE
Heater may be operated with engine running or engine off.
b. Starting Heater.
(1) Set heater fan switch (3) to LO position.
(2) Move heater control switch (2) to START position and hold for
approximately two minutes or until heater starts and heater indicator light (1)
comes on.
(3) When heater starts, move heater control switch (2) to RUN position.
The heater indicator light (1) will remain illuminated.
(4) Set heater fan switch (3) to desired position (HI or LO).
c. If Heater Fails to Start:
NOTE
If the start switch is moved from the START to RUN position too
quickly, the heater flame will be extinguished and the heater will
need restarting.
(1) Move heater control switch (2) to OFF position for 10 seconds, and then
back to START for 60 seconds. Repeat procedure if heater doesn’t start.
NOTE
If heater indicator light works and heater still fails to start in
approximately three minutes, service is required
(2) Press heater indicator light (1) to test electrical circuit.
d. Shutting Heater Off.
Move heater control switch (2) to OFF.
NOTE
The heater indicator light will remain on and the fan will continue
to run until the heater has purged itself of fuel.
2-122.2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
1
2
Change 3 2-123
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section V. CARGO/TROOP CARRIER AND

S250 SHELTER CARRIER OPERATION
2-51. GENERAL
a. This section provides operating instructions for components found on M1113,
M1152, and M1152A1 (if equipped) shelter carriers.
b. Refer to para. 2-2a for stowage location of fire extinguisher on S250 shelter
carrier. Refer to para. 2-29 for operation of fire extinguisher.
2-52. CARGO/TROOP CARRIER AND S250 SHELTER CARRIER

OPERATION REFERENCE INDEX
REF. PAGE
TITLE
PARA. NO.
2-53. Windshield Assembly Operation 2-124
2-53.1. Troop Seat Kit Operation (M1152, M1152A1) 2-125
2-54. Removal and Installation of Two-Man Crew Area 2-126
Soft Top Enclosure
2-54.1. Removal and Installation of Troop Area Soft Top
Enclosures (M1152, M1152A1) 2-130.2
2-54.2. Removal and Installation of Four-Man Crew Area Soft Top 2-130.4
and Arctic Soft Top Enclosures
2-54.3. Removal and Installation of Four-Man Cargo Area Soft Top 2-130.8
Enclosure
2-55. Removal and Installation of S250 Shelter Carrier 2-130.10
Rear Suspension Tiedown Kit
2-53. WINDSHIELD ASSEMBLY OPERATION

.WARNING .
Do not operate vehicle without windshield assembly positioned upright and
the B-pillar securely attached. Operation of vehicle without these structures
in place may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
NOTE
Before lowering windshield on vehicles equipped with retention
bracket, the windshield retention bracket must be removed. Notify
unit maintenance.
a. Lowering Windshield Assembly.
(1) Remove two hitch pins (3) from inside hinge pins (4) and remove hinge pins (4).
(2) Lower windshield assembly (5) to hood and secure windshield assembly (5)
to four footman loops (2) with two straps (1).
b. Raising Windshield Assembly.
(1) Remove two straps (1) from four footman loops (2) securing windshield
assembly (5) to hood.
(2) Raise windshield assembly (5).
NOTE
Notify unit maintenance to install windshield retention bracket.
(3) Secure windshield assembly (5) with two inside hinge pins (4) and hitch pins (3).
2-124 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 3 2-124.1/(2-124.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-53.1. TROOP SEAT KIT OPERATION (M1152, M1152A1)

a. General. The troop seat kit is used to convert M1152 and M1152A1
vehicles into troop carriers.
b. Lowering Troop Seat.
(1) Remove two lockpins (7) from troop seat (6).
(2) Lower troop seat (6).
(3) Install two lockpins (7) to secure troop seat (6).
c. Raising Troop Seat.
(1) Remove two lockpins (7) from troop seat (6).
(2) Raise troop seat (6) and secure with two lockpins (7).
Change 5 2-125
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-54. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TWO-MAN CREW AREA

SOFT TOP ENCLOSURE
NOTE
• For ease of installation, soft top components should be installed
when temperature is above 72°F (22°C).
• To keep hinge screws tight, lockwasher NSN 5310-00-527-3634 and
locknut NSN 5310-00-241-6658 can be used for installation of soft
top doors.
• To prevent seams from leaking, coat with adhesive as needed
a. General. The two-man soft top enclosure consists of two soft doors, rear curtain,
cab roof cover, two rails, and bow assembly.
b. Removal of Soft Top Doors.
(1) Open door (1) and detach door holding check strap (3) from mounting
plate (2).
(2) Raise door (1) to remove hinge pins (5) from hinge brackets (4).
(3) Remove door (1) from vehicle.
c. Removal of Cab Roof Cover, Rails, and Bow Assembly.

(1) Unfasten eyelets (7) from turnbuttons (15) on horizontal rails (14), and
unfasten hook and loop attachments (9) securing cab roof cover (10) to bow assembly (8).
(2) Remove cab roof cover (10) from horizontal rails (14).
(3) Unfasten eyelets (11) from turnbuttons (12) on B-pillar (13) and
A-pillar (18).
2-126
TM9-2320-387-10
(4) Roll cab roof cover (10) over windshield and slide cab roof cover (10) from
channel (6).
(5) Remove four screws (17) and bow assembly (8) from two horizontal rails (14).
(6) Remove four screws (16) securing two horizontal rails (14) to A-pillar (18)
and B-pillar (13). Remove horizontal rails (14).
2-127
TM 9-2320-387-10

SOFT TOP ENCLOSURE (Cont'd)
d. Removal of Rear Curtain.

(1) Detach curtain straps (5) from footman loops (7) behind seats by depressing
locking tabs (6).
NOTE
Perform step 2 if vehicle is equipped with two-man arctic cab.
(2) Peel curtain (4) back from fastener tape (8).
(3) Unfasten eyelets (3) from turnbuttons (2) on B-pillar (1).
(4) Remove rear curtain (4) from B-pillar (1).
e. Installation of Rear Curtain.
(1) Install rear curtain (4) on B-pillar (1) by fastening eyelets (3) to turn-
buttons (2).
NOTE
Perform step 2 if vehicle is equipped with two-man arctic cab.
(2) Attach curtain (4) to fastener tape (8).
(3) Attach curtain straps (5) to footman loops (7) located behind seats. Tighten
straps (5) equally, but do not overtighten.
f. Installation of Cab Roof Cover, Rails, and Bow Assembly.

(1) Install two horizontal rails (12) on A-pillar (13) and B-pillar (1), and secure
with four screws (9). The short end of horizontal rails (12) goes toward front of vehicle.
(2) Loosen end bracket screws (14) and install bow assembly (11) on horizontal
rails (12). Secure with four screws (10) and tighten bracket screws (14).
(3) Slide cab roof cover (18) into channel (15) on A-pillar (13) and roll cab roof
cover (18) over cab.
(4) Install cab roof cover (18) over rear curtain (4) at B-pillar (1) and fasten
eyelets (3) to turnbuttons (2) on B-pillar (1) and A-pillar (13).
(5) Position cab roof cover (18) around two horizontal rails (12) and fasten
eyelets (16) to turnbuttons (19). Secure cab roof cover (18) to bow assembly (11) with
hook and loop attachments (17).
2-128
lM9-2320-387-10
2-129
TM 9-2320-387-10

SOFT TOP ENCLOSURE (Cont’d)
g. Installation of Soft Top Doors.

(1) Apply a small amount of seasonal grade OE/HDO oil to hinge pins (6), and
install door (1) by inserting hinge pins (6) into hinge brackets (5).
(2) Install door holding check strap (3) on mounting plate (2).
CAUTION
If door is jammed, do not force shut. Excessive force may damage
door.
(3) Close door (1). It may be necessary to adjust door hinges (5) or door latch
striker (4) to achieve a tight seal. If adjustment is necessary, notify unit maintenance.
NOTE
When lowering soft top door window, always fold window to inside of
vehicle and secure between door and door frame crossmember.
1 2
3
6 5
2-130/(2-130.1 blank) Change 3

TM 9-2320-387-10
2-54.1. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TROOP AREA SOFT

TOP ENCLOSURES (M1152, M1152A1)
CAUTION
Remove any accumulation of rain, snow, and ice from the cargo
cover as soon as possible. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the cargo cover assembly. If the vehicle is to be parked for a long
period of time, the cargo cover can be removed. The decision
whether or not to remove the cover should be based on the length of
time the vehicle is to be parked and the expected weather
conditions.
NOTE
when temperatures are above 72°F (22°C).
• To prevent seams from leaking, coat with adhesive as needed.
(Refer to appendix D, item 1.)
a. Removal of Troop Area Enclosure.
(1) Unfasten eyelets (9) from turnbuttons (8) on B-pillar (16), front
bow (10), and rear bow (13).
(2) Press locking tab (20) and unhook straps (14) from footman loops (19).
(3) Detach hook and loop attachment securing front flap (7) of troop area
soft top (12) from two-man crew area soft top (17). Remove grommets (18) from
footman loops (19).
(4) Remove troop area soft top (12).
b. Removal of Bows. Remove bows (10), (11), and (13) from bow retainer (15).
2-130.2 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
c. Installation of Bows. The front bow assembly (10) and rear bow
assembly (13) contain turnbuttons (8); the front bow assembly (10) has shorter legs.
Install bows (10), (11), and (13) into bow retainers (15).
d. Installation of Troop Area Enclosure.
NOTE
• Troop seats and two-man crew area soft top must be installed prior
to installation of bows and troop area enclosure.
• To prevent canvas noise and damage, tiedowns can be added to the
canvas at the commander’s discretion; refer to unit maintenance.
(1) Install troop area soft top (12) over B-pillar (16), front bow (10),
intermediate bows (11), and rear bow (13).
(2) Fasten eyelets (9) to turnbuttons (8) on B-pillar (16), front bow (10), and
rear bow (13).
(3) Fit troop area soft top (12) evenly to ensure tight fit and secure by
installing grommets (18) over footman loops (19). Attach straps (14) to footman
loops (19) and pull straps (14) tight.
(4) Secure front flap (7) of troop area soft top (12) to two-man crew area soft
top (17).
Change 3 2-130.3
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-54.2. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FOUR-MAN CREW

AREA SOFT TOP AND ARCTIC SOFT TOP ENCLOSURES
NOTE
a. General. The four-man soft top and arctic soft top enclosures consist of four
soft doors, rear curtain, cab roof cover, and bow assemblies. For removal and
installation of doors, refer to para. 2-46. Para. 2-48 covers removal and installation of
four-man cab roof cover, rails, bow assemblies, and rear curtain.
b. Removal of Cab Roof Cover, Rails, and Bow Assemblies.
(1) Unfasten eyelets (2) from turnbuttons (3) on horizontal rails (12) and
A-pillar (13). Unfasten hook and loop attachments (5) securing cab roof cover (6) to
bow assemblies (4) and B-pillar (11).
(2) Remove cab roof cover (6) from horizontal rails (12).
(3) Unfasten eyelets (8) from turnbuttons (7) on C-pillar (9).
(4) Roll cab roof cover (6) over windshield and slide cab roof cover (6) from
channel (1).
(5) Remove eight screws (14) and two bow assemblies (4) from horizontal
rails (12).
(6) Remove six screws (15) and two horizontal rails (12) from A-pillar (13),
B-pillar (11), and C-pillar (9).
2-130.4 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
c. Installation of Rails, Bow Assemblies, and Cab Roof Cover.

NOTE
Align horizontal rail holes with holes in A, B, and C-pillars.
(1) Install two horizontal rails (12) on A-pillar (13), B-pillar (11), and C-pillar
(9) and secure with six screws (15).
(2) Loosen end bracket screws (16), and install two bow assemblies (4) on
horizontal rails (12) with eight screws (14). Tighten bracket screws (16).
(3) Slide cab roof cover (6) into channel (1) on A-pillar (13), roll cab roof cover
(6) over cab, and fasten eyelets (2) to turnbuttons (3) on A-pillar (13).
(4) Install cab roof cover (6) over rear curtain (10) at C-pillar (9) and fasten
eyelets (8) to turnbuttons (7) on C-pillar (9).
(5) Position cab roof cover (6) around horizontal rails (12) and fasten eyelets (2)
to turnbuttons (3). Attach cab roof cover (6) to bow assemblies (4) with hook and loop
attachments (5).
Change 3 2-130.5
TM 9-2320-387-10
d. Removal of Rear Curtain.

(1) Detach four curtain straps (11) from footman loops (13) on wheelhousings (15)
and cargo floor (14) by depressing locking tabs (12).
NOTE
Perform step 2 if vehicle is equipped with four-man arctic cab.
(2) Peel curtain (2) back from fastener tape (3).

(3) Unfasten eyelets (10) from turnbuttons (16) on C-pillar (1).
NOTE
Perform step 4 for vehicles equipped with three-point seatbelts.
(4) Unfasten eyelets (7) from turnbuttons (8) on rear seatbelt bracket (9).
(5) Remove curtain (4).
e. Installation of Rear Curtain.
(1) Install curtain (4) on C-pillar (1) by fastening eyelets (10) to
turnbuttons (16).
NOTE
• Perform steps 2 and 3 when installing new curtain on vehicles with
three-point seatbelts.
• Ensure P/N 12342475 is used for replacement of rear curtain on

vehicles equipped with three-point seatbelt.
(2) Cut away inside curtain panel (17) and remove curtain panel (17) from
curtain (4).
(3) Cut away outside curtain panel (6) and remove curtain panel (6) from
curtain (4).
(4) Extend rear seatbelt bracket boot (5) and install over rear seatbelt
bracket (9).
(5) Fasten eyelets (7) to turnbuttons (8) on rear seatbelt bracket (9).
NOTE
Perform step 6 if vehicle is equipped with four-man arctic cab.
(6) Attach curtain (2) to fastener tape (3).

(7) Attach four curtain straps (11) to footman loops (13) on wheelhousings (15)
and cargo floor (14). Tighten straps (11) equally, but do not overtighten.
2-130.6 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 3 2-130.7
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-54.3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FOUR-MAN CARGO

AREA SOFT TOP ENCLOSURE
CAUTION
Remove any accumulation of rain, snow, and ice from the cargo cover
as soon as possible. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
cargo cover assembly. If the vehicle is to be parked for a long period of
time, the cargo cover can be removed. The decision whether or not to
remove the cover should be based on the length of time the vehicle is
to be parked and the expected weather conditions.
NOTE
a. Removal of Cargo Enclosure.
(1) Unfasten hook and loop attachment (3) securing cargo cover (6) to cab
roof (2) at C-pillar (8).
(2) Unfasten eyelets (5) from turnbuttons (4) on C-pillar (8), front bow (1), and
rear bow (7).
(3) Detach straps (9) from footman loops (11) by depressing locking tabs (12)
and loosening straps (9). Remove grommets (10) from footman loops (11).
(4) Remove cargo cover (6).
b. Removal of Bows.
NOTE
If bows are broken or bent, reinforce 3/64 in. (1.2 mm) thick bow walls
with steel rod NSN 9510-00-596-2063. Reinforce 3/32 in. (2.4 mm)
bows with steel rod NSN 9510-00-596-2066.
(1) Depress locking tabs (14) and unhook straps (13) from footman loops (15).
(2) Remove capscrews (19) securing longitudinal bow (20) to front bow (1) and
rear bow (7). Remove longitudinal bow (20).
(3) Remove four snaprings (17) and pivot pins (16) securing front bow (1) and
rear bow (7) to pivot brackets (18). Remove bows (1) and (7).
2-130.8 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
c. Installation of Bows.
NOTE
Four-man crew area soft top must be installed before installation of
bows and cargo enclosure.
(1) Install bows (1) and (7) on pivot brackets (18) and secure with four pivot
pins (16) and snaprings (17).
(2) Install longitudinal bow (20) on front bow (1) and rear bow (7) and secure
with two capscrews (19).
(3) Install straps (13) on footman loops (15) and pull straps (13) tight.
d. Installation of Cargo Enclosure.
(1) Install cargo cover (6) over C-pillar (8), front bow (1), and rear bow (7).
(2) Fasten eyelets (5) to turnbuttons (4) on C-pillar (8), front bow (1), and rear
bow (7).
(3) Secure cargo (6) to cab roof (2) at C-pillar (8) with hook and loop
attachment (3).
(4) Install grommets (10) on footman loops (11) and attach straps (9) to
footman loops (11). Tighten straps (9) equally, but do not overtighten.
Change 3 2-130.9
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-55. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF S250 SHELTER CARRIER

REAR SUSPENSION TIEDOWN KIT
CAUTION
The M1113 shelter carriers are specifically designed to be operated
with the S250 shelter installed. The vehicles can be driven safely
without the shelter installed, or equivalent payload of 1,500 lb (681 kg),
for short distances (e.g., to and from maintenance or from the rail head
when being delivered), but this should not be done often or for long
distances. Driving for long distances without the shelter installed, or
equivalent payload of 1,500 lb (681 kg) evenly distributed in center of
cargo area, will cause damage to equipment.
NOTE
Rear suspension tiedown kit is to be used only for shipment and
should be removed promptly after shipment.
a. Removal of S250 Rear Suspension Tiedown Kit.
(1) Using wrench provided, turn out turnbuckle assembly (6). Unhook from
rear-rear tiedown bracket (1) on frame rail (2) and suspension tiedown bar (5).
(2) Remove suspension tiedown bar (5) from lower control arm (3) and shock
mount bracket (4).
b. Installation of S250 Rear Suspension Tiedown Kit.
(1) Install suspension tiedown bar (5) into lower control arm (3) and shock
mount bracket (4).
(2) Grease threads on turnbuckle assembly (6). Hook turnbuckle assembly (6)
to suspension tiedown bar (5) and to rear-rear tiedown bracket (1) on frame rail (2).
(3) With wrench provided, tighten until turnbuckle assembly (6) is completely
turned in.
2-130.10 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 3 2-131
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section VI. M1114 UP-ARMORED CARRIER STOWAGE NET OPERATION
2-56. GENERAL
This section provides instructions for the removal and installation of stowage
nets used on the M1114 up-armored carrier.
2-57. M1114 UP-ARMORED CARRIER STOWAGE NET

OPERATION REFERENCE INDEX
REF. PAGE
TITLE
PARA. NO.
2-58. Removal and Installation of Stowage Compartment Net 2-133

2-59. Removal and Installation of Hatch Stowage Net 2-134
2-60. Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Stowage 2-135
Compartment Net
2-132
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-58. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF STOWAGE COMPARTMENT

NET
a. Removal.
Remove net (7) by unhooking three J-hooks (4) from D-rings (5) on cargo floor (6)
and three J-hooks (2) from D-rings (3) at C-partition (1).
1 3
2
~
4
6
7 5
b. Installation.
Position net (7) on cargo floor (6), and install three J-hooks (4) to D-rings (5) on
cargo floor (6), and three J-hooks (2) to D-rings (3) on C-partition (1).
Change 1 2-133
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-59. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HATCH STOWAGE NET
a. Removal.
(1) Detach hatch stowage net (1) from side mounted footman loops (3).
(2) Detach net (1) from top and bottom mounted footman loops (2). Remove
net (1).
b. Installation.
(1) Attach net (1) to top and bottom mounted footman loops (2).
(2) Attach net (1) to side mounted footman loops (3).
2-134
TM 9-2320-387-10
2-60. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT NET
a. Removal.
Detach locking tabs (1) and unhook compartment net (4) from D-rings (5) and
mounting brackets (2) and (3). Remove net (4).
b. Installation.
Attach compartment net (4) to D-rings (5) and mounting brackets (2) and (3).
Change 6 2-135
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section VII. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TOW GUNNER’S

PROTECTION KIT (T-GPK) IN PREPARATION FOR AIR DROP.
2-61. GENERAL
Refer to FM 3-22.32 for removal and installation of TOW Gunner’s Protection Kit
(T-GPK) in preparation for air drop.
2-136 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
CHAPTER 3
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. LUBRICATION
3-1. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

Lubrication instructions are in appendix G of this manual. All lubrication
instructions are mandatory.
3-2. GENERAL LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

a. Service Intervals. Service intervals on the lubrication instructions are for
normal operation in moderate temperatures, humidity, and atmospheric conditions.
b. Application Points. Wipe lubricating points and surrounding surfaces
before and after applying lubricant.
c. Reports and Records. Report unsatisfactory performance of lubricant
or preserving materials on Product Quality Deficiency Report, SF 368, as stated in
para. 1-4.
3-3. GENERAL LUBRICATING INSTRUCTIONS UNDER

UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
a. Service Intervals. Increase frequency of lubricating service intervals when

operating under abnormal conditions such as high or low temperatures, prolonged
high-speed driving, or extended cross-country operations. Such operations can
destroy lubricant’s protective qualities. More frequent lubricating service intervals
are necessary to maintain vehicle readiness when operating under abnormal
conditions. During inactive periods, with adequate preservation, service intervals
can be extended.
b. Changes in Lubricant Grades. Lubricant grades change with weather
conditions. Refer to appendix G for lubricant grade changes.
c. Maintaining Lubricant Levels. Lubricant levels must be checked as
specified in appendix G. Steps must be taken to replenish and maintain lubricant
levels.
3-4. LUBRICATION FOR CONTINUED OPERATION

BELOW 0°F (-18°C)
Refer to FM 9-207, Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold

Weather (0°F to -65°F) (-18°C to -54°C), or appendix G.
3-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. TROUBLESHOOTING
3-5. GENERAL
Troubleshooting, table 3-1, contains instructions that will help the operator identify
and correct simple vehicle malfunctions. The table also helps the operator identify
major mechanical difficulties that must be referred to unit maintenance. The listing
of possible malfunctions come under major vehicle headings. They are:
• Engine
• Heating system
• Transmission
• Transfer case
• Brakes
• Wheels and tires
• Steering
• Winch
• Up-armored carrier
3-6. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

a. Table 3-1 lists the common malfunctions which you may find during the
operation or maintenance of the vehicles or their components. You should perform
the tests/inspections and corrective actions in the order listed.
b. This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur, nor all tests or
inspections and corrective actions. If a malfunction is not listed or is not corrected
by listed actions, notify your supervisor.
NOTE
• Hydrostatic lock is caused by the entry of substantial amounts of
frequently occurs during or just after fording. Water is forced into
the air intake system, is drawn into the engine, and effectively
locks up the engine.
will test the engine.
3-2
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting.
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ENGINE
1. ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK
Step 1. Check to see if transmission shift lever is in P (park).
If not, place lever in P (park).
2. ENGINE CRANKS SLOWLY
3. ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START
Step 1. Check to see if fuel gauge indicates E (empty).
Fill fuel tank, and start engine.
Step 2. Purge fuel system of air (para. 3-11).
Step 3. Check to see if wait-to-start lamp assembly fails to light or does not
go out.
Notify unit maintenance if wait-to-start lamp assembly fails to
light or does not go out.
4. VEHICLE NOT CHARGING ACCORDING TO VOLTMETER
Step 1. Check battery cable connections for looseness, damage, or corrosion.
Notify unit maintenance of any damage to battery cables.
3-3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont’d).
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
5. EXCESSIVE EXHAUST SMOKE AFTER ENGINE REACHES NORMAL OPERATING

TEMPERATURE 185°-250°F (85°-120°C)
Step 1. Check oil level for overfilling (appendix G).
Notify unit maintenance if fluid level is high.
Step 2. Check for restricted air cleaner.
If emergency situation exists, clean air cleaner element (para. 3-15).
If emergency situation does not exist, notify unit maintenance.
6. ENGINE STARTS BUT MISFIRES, RUNS ROUGH, OR LACKS POWER

Step 1. Check for water in fuel filter by draining.
Drain fuel filter (para. 3-11).
Step 2. Check for restricted air cleaner.
If emergency situation exists, clean air cleaner element (para. 3-15).
If emergency situation does not exist, notify unit maintenance.
7. ENGINE OVERHEATS ACCORDING TO ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE
Step 1. Check to see if fan is running.
If fan is not running, perform emergency fan clutch override
procedure (para. 3-23).
Step 2. Allow engine to cool and check for low coolant level.
Add coolant as necessary (para. 3-10).
Step 3. Check for debris blocking radiator fins.
Remove debris (para. 3-26).
8. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ACCORDING TO OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

Step 1. Check for low oil level (para. 3-18).
Add oil (appendix G).
3-4 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
HEATING SYSTEM
9. HOT WATER PERSONNEL HEATER FAILS TO PRODUCE HEAT AFTER ENGINE
REACHES OPERATING TEMPERATURE
Step 1. Check operating controls for correct settings.
TRANSMISSION
10. NO RESPONSE TO SHIFT LEVER MOVEMENT
Step 1. Check to see if transmission lever is in P (park).
Place transmission shift lever in P and select transfer gear range.
11. ROUGH SHIFTING

All causes.
12. FLUID THROWN FROM TRANSMISSION FILL TUBE

Step 1. Check to see if transmission dipstick is loose.
Secure dipstick.
Step 2. Check fluid level for overfilling (para. 3-19).
Notify unit maintenance if fluid level is high.
13. SLIPPAGE IN ALL RANGES

Step 1. Check for low fluid level (para. 3-19).
Add fluid (appendix G).
13.1. TRANSMISSION LIGHT ON

Check to see if transmission light stays on. (Refer to para. 2-2).
If light stays on, notify unit maintenance.
Change 2 3-5
TM 9-2320-387-10
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
TRANSFER CASE
14. TRANSFER CASE SHIFT LEVER WILL NOT SHIFT
Step 1. Check for proper shifting sequence.
Ensure proper shifting sequence is used (para. 2-13).
BRAKES
15. POOR SERVICE BRAKING ACTION
All causes.
16. SERVICE BRAKES DRAGGING

All causes.
17. BRAKE WARNING LAMP ASSEMBLY ON

Step 1. Check to see if parking brake is partially applied.
Disengage parking brake.
18. PARKING BRAKE FAILS TO HOLD VEHICLE

Clean and adjust parking brake (para. 3-13).
If parking brake still fails to hold vehicle, notify unit maintenance.
WHEELS AND TIRES

19. WHEELS WOBBLE OR SHIMMY
Step 1. Check to see if wheel lug nuts are loose.
Tighten loose lug nuts (para. 3-25) and notify unit maintenance to
properly torque lug nuts.
Step 2. Inspect for mud or dirt buildup inside the rim.
Remove any mud or dirt buildup.
Step 3. Check tires for proper inflation pressure.
3-6 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
20. EXCESSIVE OR UNEVEN TIRE WEAR

21. VEHICLE WANDERS TO ONE SIDE ON LEVEL PAVEMENT

STEERING
22. HARD STEERING
Step 2. Check power steering reservoir for low fluid level (para. 3-20).
Add steering fluid (appendix G).
Step 4. Check power steering oil cooler for bent fins or any other air flow
obstructions.
Remove obstructions if fins are not damaged.
Notify unit maintenance if power steering oil cooler is damaged.
WINCH
23. ELECTRIC WINCH STOPS DURING NORMAL OPERATION
Step 1. Wait 2 minutes and attempt winch operation again.
Refer to para. 2-28 for winch operation.
Step 2. Check to see if clutch lever is engaged (para. 2-28).
If not, engage clutch lever.
Step 3. Check to see if voltmeter is in red or yellow (engine not running).
Start engine and charge batteries.
Change 2 3-6.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
23.1. HYDRAULIC WINCH STOPS DURING NORMAL OPERATION

Step 1. Check power steering fluid level (para. 3-20).
If fluid level is low add fluid.
Step 2. Ensure winch selector levers are in LOCK LOW GEAR position
(para. 2-28.1).
If not, move winch selector levers to LOCK LOW GEAR position.
WARNING
• Wear leather gloves when handling winch
cable. Do not handle cable with bare hands.
• When fully extending winch cable, ensure that
four wraps of winch cable remain on drum at
all times. Failure to do so may cause damage to
equipment or injury or death to personnel.
• Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch
cable during winch operation. Failure to do so
may cause damage to equipment and injury or
death to personnel.
• Do not even slide gloved hands across winch
cable. Injury can result.
Step 3. Ensure winch cable is not stacked or binding against tiebars or
winch housing.
If winch cable is stacked or binding, remove load from cable, move
winch control levers to FREESPOOL and pay out winch cable by
hand. If unable to pay out winch cable by hand, notify unit
maintenance.
UP-ARMORED AND TOW ITAS/ARMAMENT CARRIER

24. WEAPON STATION WILL NOT ROTATE OR LOCK
Step 1. Check for obstructions that may be restricting weapon station
movement.
Remove obstructions.
25. CARGO SHELL DOOR WILL NOT SEAL PROPERLY

All causes.
3-6.2/(3-7 blank) Change 6

TM 9-2320-387-10
Section III. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

3-7. GENERAL
The operator/crew is responsible for daily, weekly, and monthly preventive
maintenance checks and services listed in table 2-2. Other maintenance services,
also the responsibility of the operator/crew, are explained in this section.
3-8. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES REFERENCE INDEX
REF. PAGE
TITLE
PARA. NO.
3-9. Raising and Securing Hood 3-8

3-10. Servicing Coolant Surge Tank 3-10
3-11. Fuel Filter Maintenance 3-11
3-12. Servicing Batteries 3-12
3-13. Parking Brake Adjustment and Cleaning 3-13
3-14. Servicing Windshield Washer Reservoir 3-14
3-15. Air Cleaner Servicing (Emergency Procedure) 3-14
3-16. Air Cleaner Dump Valve Servicing 3-17
3-17. Plastic Window Cleaning 3-18
3-18. Engine Oil Servicing 3-19
3-19. Transmission Fluid Servicing 3-20
3-20. Power Steering Fluid Servicing (RCSK 18330) 3-21
3-20.1. Power Steering Fluid Servicing (P/N 94252A) 3-22
3-21. Fuel Tank Servicing 3-23
3-22. Tire Chain Installation and Removal 3-24
3-23. Emergency Fan Clutch Override 3-26
3-24. Rearview Mirror Adjustment 3-27
3-25. Wheel Assembly Replacement 3-28
3-26. Deleted
3-9. RAISING AND SECURING HOOD
WARNING
To ensure opening of the hood assembly is accomplished safely and
effectively, always maintain the proper lifting posture, legs bent with
back straight. Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment or injury
to personnel.
NOTE
Due to the inherent weight of the hood assembly, hood may flex when
opening, possibly causing interference between the right side of hood
assembly and body. This interference can be eliminated by pushing
hood assembly laterally away from individual prior to lifting.
3-8 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
a. Raising Hood.
(1) Apply parking brake.
(2) Release left and right hood latches (1).
(3) Facing driver’s side of hood, position one hand at the rear area of hood and
other at rear area of wheel well.
WARNING
When raising and securing hood, ensure hood prop rod is secured to
hood support bracket. Damage to equipment or injury to personnel
may occur if hood is not properly secured in raised position.
(4) Push the hood toward the passenger side and lift at the same time,
moving your hands toward the front of the hood as it opens. The prop rod (2) should
automatically engage the support bracket (3) when hood is raised.
b. Lowering Hood.
WARNING
When releasing hood prop rod, do not pull rod at hook end. Injury to
fingers may occur.
CAUTION
Lower hood slowly. Damage to hood and/or headlights can occur if
hood is dropped.
(1) While supporting and slightly raising hood, grasp prop rod (2) above
retaining ring (5), pull out, and release hood prop rod (2).
(2) Once prop rod hook (4) is clear of support bracket (3), slowly lower hood
and secure left and right hood latches (1).
1 2
3
Change 1 3-9
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-10. SERVICING COOLANT SURGE TANK
WARNING
Extreme care should be taken when removing surge tank filler cap if
temperature gauge reads above 165°F (74°C). Do not add coolant to
cooling system when engine is hot unless engine is running. Add
coolant slowly. Steam or hot coolant under pressure may cause injury.
CAUTION
• Type 1, ethylene glycol (green), and Type 2, propylene glycol
(purple), should never be mixed due to their difference in toxic
properties. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
• Using antifreeze without mixing it with water can cause high
operating temperatures, blockage of cooling system passages, and
damage to water pump seals.
NOTE
Type 1 antifreeze is an ethylene glycol based coolant, green in color.
Type 1 can be added to factory-filled pink coolant. When it becomes
necessary to flush factory coolant, Type 1, ethylene glycol, will be
used. When mixing Type 1 antifreeze with water, distilled water is
recommended. Tap water should only be used in emergency
situations.
a. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-9).

b. Visually check coolant level. Surge tank level should be at COLD FILL LINE
before operation and slightly above COLD FILL LINE after operation. If coolant is
low, perform steps c through h.
c. Place a thick cloth over surge tank filler cap (1). Carefully turn cap (1)
counterclockwise to its first stop to allow cooling system pressure to escape.
d. After cooling system pressure is vented, push down and turn cap (1) counter-
clockwise to remove. Add coolant until surge tank level is at COLD FILL LINE.
e. Start engine (para. 2-12) and run for one minute.
f. Stop engine (para. 2-14) and recheck coolant level. If coolant level is low, add
coolant until surge tank level is at COLD FILL LINE.
g. Repeat steps e and f until surge tank level remains at COLD FILL LINE.
h. Install cap (1). Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
3-10 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
COLD
FILL
LINE
Change 3 3-10.1/(3-10.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
3-l 1. FUEL FILTER MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Do not perform fuel system checks, inspection, or maintenance while
smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks. Fuel may ignite, causing
a. Draining Fuel Filter.

(3) Place toggle fuel switch (3) to the UP position and allow approximately
1 pt (0.47 L) of fuel to drain into a suitable container.
(4) Place toggle fuel switch (3) to the DOWN position when draining is
complete.
b. Purging Fuel System of Air.
NOTE
This procedure is used to purge fuel system of air if vehicle has run
out of fuel.

(2) Disconnect fuel line (1) from fuel filter outlet (2).
(3) Place a rag over fuel filter outlet (2).
(4) Crank engine until rag is wet with fuel.
(5) Connect fuel line (1) to fuel filter outlet (2).
(6) Start engine (para. 2-12) and ensure fuel system has been purged of air.
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-12. SERVICING BATTERIES
a. Unhook latches (6) and remove companion seat (1) from battery box (9).
WARNING
Do not perform battery system checks or inspections while smoking or
near fire, flames, or sparks, especially if the caps are off. Batteries
may explode, causing damage to vehicle and injury or death to
personnel.
b. Check electrolyte level.

(1) Remove all battery filler caps (2) and check electrolyte level. If electrolyte
level is below ledge in battery filler opening, add distilled water (appendix D, item 7).
(2) A battery that is continually in need of electrolyte may indicate an
improperly adjusted charging system. Notify unit maintenance if problem continues.
(3) Inspect vented battery filler caps (2) to ensure that vents are clear,
unobstructed, and permit escape of battery gases. Clean vents if obstructed; replace
caps (2) if damaged.
(4) Install filler caps (2).
c. Inspect all battery compartment components, including terminal clamps (5),
battery cables (3), battery holddowns (8), and shunt (4) for corrosion, damage, or
looseness. Inspect terminal boots (7), if installed. Notify unit maintenance if any of
these problems exist.
d. Ensure that battery terminal clamps (5) have a light coat of lubricating oil for
corrosion protection (appendix D, item 23).
e. Install companion seat (1) and secure to battery box (9) with latches (6).
f. Refer to TM 9-6140-200-14 for additional information.
3-12
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-13. PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

a. Chock wheels and release parking brake handle (3) by depressing safety
release button (2).
b. Turn adjusting knob (1) clockwise as tightly as possible by hand.
c. Apply parking brake handle (3).
d. If parking brake cannot be applied, turn adjusting knob (1) counterclockwise
until parking brake can be applied.
e. Test parking brake.
(1) Remove chocks.
(2) Depress service brake pedal and start engine (para. 2-12).
(3) Place transfer case shift lever (4) in H (high) and transmission shift
lever (5) in D (overdrive).
(4) Slowly let up on service brake pedal. Parking brake should hold vehicle
stationary.
NOTE
Perform step f. for vehicles with serial numbers 299999 and below
only.
f. After operating in mud or sand, use a low-pressure water source to ensure

actuating lever (7) and spring (6) are thoroughly cleaned of mud, sand, or other debris.
Lubricate lever (7) in accordance with appendix G as soon as possible.
2 6
1
4
3
5
7
S/N 299999 AND
BELOW ONLY
Change 6 3-13
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-14. SERVICING WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR

b. Check fluid level in washer reservoir (2). Check frequently under adverse
weather conditions.
c. If fluid is required, fill washer reservoir with water and cleaning compound
(appendix D, item 4), refer to table 3-2.
Table 3-2. Cleaning Compound-to-Water Ratio.
Temperature Range Cleaning Compound to Water
Above +15°F (-9°C) 1 to 2
+40° to -15°F (+4° to -26°C) 1 to 1
+40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C) 2 to 1
d. If washer system does not work, check washer nozzles (1) to see if they are
blocked with dirt and/or debris. Remove dirt and/or debris with fine wire.
e. Check hoses (3) for leaks or poor condition.
f. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
1 2
3-15. AIR CLEANER SERVICING (EMERGENCY PROCEDURE)

a. General. Air cleaner service is required when yellow air restriction indicator (3)
reaches red zone (2) of gauge (1).
CAUTION
Do not operate engine without air cleaner element. Damage to engine
may result.
b. Filter Element Removal.
NOTE
Perform step 2.1 for vehicles with over-center clamp configuration only.
(2) Loosen clamp screw (10) and remove clamp (4) and cover (5) from air
cleaner assembly (8).
(2.1) Release and remove over-center clamp (4) and cover (5) from air cleaner
assembly (8).
3-14 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
WARNING
• NBC contaminated filters must be handled using adequate
precautions (FM 3-5) and must be disposed of by trained personnel.
• After Nuclear, Biological, or Chemical (NBC) exposure of this
vehicle, all air filters shall be handled with extreme caution.
Unprotected personnel may experience injury or death if residual
toxic agents or radioactive material are present. Servicing personnel
will wear protective overgarments, mask, hood, and chemical-
protective gloves and boots. All contaminated air filters will be
placed into double-lined plastic bags and moved immediately to a
temporary segregation area away from the work site. If
contaminated by radioactive dust, the Company NBC team will
measure the radiation before removal. The NBC team will
determine the extent of safety procedures required. The temporary
segregation area will be marked with the appropriate NBC signs.
Final disposal of contaminated air filters will be in accordance with
local Standard Operating Procedures (SOP).
• Failure to observe above warnings may result in injury or death.
(3) Remove nut and washer assembly (6) securing filter element (7) to
stud (9) and pull filter element (7) from air cleaner assembly (8).
(4) Place cover (5) and clamp (4) back on air cleaner assembly (8) to prevent
dirt and dust from entering air induction system while cleaning filter element (7).
1 2
3
AIR FILTER
RESTRICTION GAUGE
PUSH TO RESET
8
4
7
5
4 6
10
Change 1 3-15
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-15. AIR CLEANER SERVICING (EMERGENCY PROCEDURE) (Cont’d)

c. Air Filter Element Cleaning.
CAUTION
Do not strike ends of filter element on hard surface, or damage to
filter element may result.
(1) Hold filter element (1) with open end facing ground.
(2) Gently tap completely around filter element (1) with hand to free trapped dirt.
d. Filter Element Installation.

CAUTION
The turbocharged engine requires a 420CFM filter element. Use of
any other filter element will damage equipment.
(1) Remove clamp (2) and cover (3) from air cleaner assembly (5).
(2) Position filter element (1) into air cleaner assembly (5) and secure
element (1) to stud (6) with nut and washer assembly (4).
CAUTION
When clamp is secured to end of air cleaner, ensure clamp screw is
between three and six o’clock positions to prevent damaging hood
when hood is closed.
NOTE
Perform step 3.1 for vehicles with over-center clamp configuration only.
(3) Install cover (3) and clamp (2) on end of air cleaner assembly (5) and
tighten clamp screw (7).
(3.1) Install cover (3) on air cleaner assembly (5) and secure with over-center
clamp (2).
(5) Notify unit maintenance to properly torque or set gap of clamp.
3-16 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
5
2
1
3
2 4
3-16. AIR CLEANER DUMP VALVE SERVICING

NOTE
Air cleaner dump valve should be serviced after any operation
through sand, mud, or water.
b. Squeeze dump valve (2) to clear any sand, mud, or water from air cleaner
assembly (1).
c. For vehicles equipped with a deep water fording kit, loosen clamp (3) and
remove cap (4). Clean and install cap (4) and tighten clamp (3).
d. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
4
2
Change 1 3-17
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-17. PLASTIC WINDOW CLEANING

CAUTION
Never clean plastic windows with abrasives. Repeated use of
abrasives or failure to follow instructions below will eventually cause
damage to windows.
NOTE
This paragraph provides instructions for cleaning soft top plastic
windows and ballistic windshield and windows. This procedure is to
be used on the inner plastic laminate surfaces of ballistic glass. Clean
outer surface of ballistic glass as you would plain glass.
a. Plastic Window Cleaning.
(1) Wash windows using soap, water, and a soft, clean cloth.
(2) Rinse with clean water.
(3) Apply cream cleaner (appendix D, item 5) to plastic windows.
(4) Wipe cream cleaner off with dry cloth. Cream cleaner improves visual
clarity after cleaning with soap and water.
a.1. Plastic Window Cleaning - Fungus and Mold.
(1) Wash windows using soap and water and a soft, clean cloth.
(2) Rinse with clean water.
(3) Using a soft, clean cloth and isopropyl alcohol (Appendix D, Item 1.01),
clean off fungus and mold.
(4) Wipe area with soft, clean cloth.
b. Ballistic Glass Cleaning.
CAUTION
• Do not clean interior surfaces of ballistic glass by any other means
than specified below.
• Do not use a scraper or other objects with sharp edges that may
scratch the inside surfaces of ballistic glass.
• Do not apply stickers, labels, solvents, abrasive materials, or
cleaners.
(1) Remove dust and loose abrasive particles using clean, filtered air at
20 psi (138 kPa) maximum.
(2) Wash with mild detergent (appendix D, item 6) and warm water. Dry
using a soft, clean cloth.
(3) Remove stubborn marks and stains using a soft, clean cloth and equal
parts by volume of isopropyl alcohol (appendix D, item 18) in water.
(4) Repeat step (2).
3-18 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-l 0
1 3-l 8. ENGINE OIL SERVlClNd

CAUTION
Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter engine oil dipstick tube.
Internal engine damage may result if engine oil becomes
contaminated.
NOTE
Engine oil level is checked with engine off.
If oil level checks above FULL, it may be due to oil cooler drain-
back. Operate engine for one minute, shut down, wait one minute,
and recheck oil level. If it still checks above full, drain oil to obtain
correct level.
Vehicles equipped with deep water fording kit will have a sealed
dipstick.
b. Pull out dipstick (1) and check for proper oil level. Level should be at
crosshatch marks (2) between FULL and ADD 1 QT.
CAUTION
Do not overfill engine crankcase. Damage to engine may result.
c. If engine oil is low, remove oil filler cap (3) and add engine oil
(appendix G).
CAUTION
Use a non-vented filler cap only. An incorrect filler cap will not seal
properly, causing water to enter and damage engine.
d. Replace oil filler cap (31, tighten securely, and wipe away any spilled oil.
e. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-19. TRANSMISSION FLUID SERVICING

b. Start engine (para. 2-12).
c. While depressing service brake pedal, move transmission shift lever through
all operating ranges and R (reverse) before checking fluid level in N (neutral) with
parking brake applied.
CAUTION
Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter transmission oil dipstick
tube. Internal transmission damage may result if transmission fluid
d. Pull out dipstick (2) and check for proper transmission fluid level. At normal
operating temperature, fluid level should be at crosshatch marks (3).
CAUTION
Do not overfill transmission. Damage to transmission may result.
e. If transmission fluid level is low, add fluid (appendix G) through fill pipe (1),
insert dipstick (2), and wipe away any spilled fluid.
f. Shut off engine (para. 2-14).
g. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
2
1
3
3-20 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-20. POWER STEERING FLUID SERVICING (P/N RCSK 18330)

CAUTION
Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter power steering reservoir.
Damage to power steering system may result if power steering fluid
b. Remove cap/dipstick (2) and check steering fluid level. If engine is warm, level
should be between HOT and COLD marks. If engine is cool, level should be between
ADD and COLD marks. In either condition, fluid must be added if level reads below
ADD mark.
CAUTION
Do not overfill power steering reservoir. Damage to power steering
system will result.
c. If fluid level is low, add fluid (appendix G) to power steering reservoir (1) and
wipe away any fluid spilled.
d. Install cap/dipstick (2).
e. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
Change 2 3-21
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-20.1. POWER STEERING FLUID SERVICING (P/N 94252A)

b. Check sightglass (3) for proper fluid level. If fluid is HOT (at engine operating
temperature), level should be at top of sightglass (3). If fluid is COLD, fluid should
be in center of sightglass (3).
c. If fluid level is low, remove fill cap (1) on power steering reservoir (2) and fill
with Dexron VI hydraulic fluid (appendix G) until fluid is in center of sightglass (3)
and replace fill cap (1) on power steering reservoir (2).
CAUTION
Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter power steering reservoir.
Damage to power steering system may result if power steering fluid
NOTE
Inspect power steering fluid in sightglass for bubbles or foam. If fluid
or bubbles are visible, return vehicle to unit maintenance.
d. Run engine until fluid level is below sightglass (3), shut off engine.
e. Add Dexron VI hydraulic fluid (appendix G) until fluid level is at center of
sightglass (3) when cold and top of sightglass (3) when hot. Do not overfill.
f. Start engine and check power steering system for leaks.
g. Inspect fluid in sightglass to ensure fluid is free of air. If fluid does not
stabilize at proper fluid level, return vehicle to unit maintenance.
h. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
1
HOT
2
COLD
3 ADD
3-22 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-21. FUEL TANK SERVICING

a. Shut off engine (para. 2-14).
WARNING
Do not perform fuel system checks, inspection, or maintenance while
smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks. Fuel may ignite, causing
CAUTION
Do not turn fuel cap handle more than necessary to remove or seal
fuel cap. Fuel cap chain links may separate or become damaged.
NOTE
For M1114 vehicles, the fuel door must be open before removing fuel
cap (para. 2-34).
b. Turn fuel cap handle (1) on fuel cap (2) counterclockwise and remove fuel cap (2).
CAUTION
When refueling vehicle, be careful that nozzle does not slam into filler
pipe. Damage to strainer may occur, allowing dirty fuel to clog up filters.
NOTE
To help prevent spills and overflows, pay close attention to the
dispensing nozzle while refueling. Do not exceed a safe refueling rate. If
fuel backup and spillage is being experienced, reduce flow rate. Also,
when topping off the tank, a reduced flow rate should be used.
c. Insert fuel filler nozzle into filler neck rubber cone, using caution not to
puncture fuel filler neck strainer. Dispense fuel into fuel tank.
d. If fuel cap handle (1) is turned more than necessary to remove fuel cap (2),
fuel cap backing plate (3) may become jammed on staked threads (4). Correct the
problem by holding backing plate (3) and turning the fuel cap handle (1) clockwise
until backing plate (3) turns freely.
e. When fueling operation is complete, install fuel cap (2) and turn fuel cap
handle (1) clockwise to seal fuel cap (2).
2
3
Change 2 3-23
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-22. TIRE CHAIN INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
CAUTION
Tire chains are only used when extra traction is required and must be
used as an axle set. Any other combination may cause damage to the
drivetrain.
a. Tire Chain Installation.

(1) Spread out tire chain assembly (1) and line up with tire.
(2) Cautiously move or drive vehicle over tire chain assembly (1) until wheel
is positioned at either end of chain assembly (1), allowing tire chain assembly (1) to
be draped up and over tire.
(3) Maneuver tire chain assembly (1) until cross-link sections are evenly
spaced around tire. Secure one side of tire chain assembly (1) to tire by hooking
inside fastener (2) to chain assembly (1). Tighten chain assembly (1) as much as
possible.
(4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all tire chain assemblies have been
properly installed.
(5) Hook end fastener (3) to chain assembly (1) and secure with locking
retainer (4) to tighten chain assembly (1). Ensure as many chain links as possible
lay between the sidewall head lugs (5) on both sides of tires.
(6) Move vehicle forward a few feet and retighten chain assembly (1) to
remove any slack from where tire was resting on chain assembly (1). Secure loose
chain linkage to chain assembly (1) with wire or other field expedient method.
3-24 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-l 0
(7) After vehicle is driven one or two miles, stop and retighten tire chains.
Ensure as many chain links as possible lie between sidewall head lugs (5) on both
sides of tires.
(8) After final tightening, secure loose chain linkage to chain assembly (1)
with wire or other field expedient method.
(9) Occasionally check tire chains (1) during operations to ensure tire
chains (1) have not slipped.
b. Tire Chain RemovaL
CAUTION
Remove tire chains from tires as soon as possible after leaving area
requiring their use. Prolonged use of tire chains may damage
drivetrain.
(1) Detach locking retainer (4) from end fastener (3) and unhook end fastener (3)
from chain assembly (1).
(2) Unhook inside fastener (2) from chain assembly (1) and remove chain
assembly (1) from tire.
(3) Drive vehicle off chain assembly (1).
(4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all tire chain assemblies (1) have been
removed from tires.
(5) Stow tire chain assemblies (1).
3-25
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-23. EMERGENCY FAN CLUTCH OVERRIDE

a. The radiator fan normally activates when engine temperature exceeds 220°F
(104°C) and deactivates when engine temperature drops to 190°F (88°C). If
overheating occurs in an emergency situation, this procedure will ensure continuous
fan operation.
b. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-9).
c. Stop engine (para. 2-14) prior to disconnecting time delay module.
d. Disconnect time delay module connector (1) from control valve connector (2).
e. Start engine (para. 2-12).
f. Check fan for continuous operation. If fan is not operating continuously, stop
engine and notify unit maintenance.
g. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-9).
h. Allow engine to cool at idle until engine temperature lowers to normal
operating temperature of 185°-250°F (85°-120°C).
i. Proceed to unit maintenance with vehicle. Ensure unit maintenance
is notified of emergency service performed on vehicle.
3-26 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-24. REARVIEW MIRROR ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Visibility from the right mirror may be impaired.
NOTE
Prior to mirror adjustment, move mirror arm assembly until assembly
locks in place.
a. Left Mirror (Driver’s Side). Loosen top nut (5) and position mirror
arm (7) forward of windshield frame (4) so that center line of mirror arm (7) is
approximately 9-1/2 in. (24.1 cm) (M1113, M1151, and M1152), 10-1/2 in. (26.7 cm)
(M1114) from vehicle (1). Tighten top nut (5). Adjust mirror head (6) for maximum
visibility.
b. Right Mirror (Passenger’s Side). Loosen top nut (5) and position mirror
arm (3) forward of windshield frame (4) so that center line of mirror arm (3) is
approximately 7-3/4 in. (19.7 cm) (M1113, M1151, and M1152), 7-1/2 in. (19.1 cm)
(M1114) from vehicle (1). Tighten top nut (5). Adjust mirror head (2) for maximum
visibility.
M1114
M1114 7-1/2 in.
10-1/2 in. (19.1 cm)
M1113
1
(26.7 cm) 2 M1151
7-3/4 in. M1152
M1113
M1151 9-1/2 in. (19.7 cm)
M1152
(24.1 cm)
3
~
7
6 4
Change 3 3-27
TM 9-2320-387-10
3-25. WHEEL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

a. Wheel Assembly Removal.
WARNING
• Always apply parking brake and block opposite wheel before
removing wheel assembly. Avoid removing wheel assembly when
vehicle is on sloping terrain. Injury to personnel or damage to
• Remove only the inner group of nuts when removing a wheel from
the vehicle. Removing the outer nuts which hold the rim together
while the wheel assembly is inflated could result in serious injury
or death.
• Ensure scissors jack is positioned directly under lower control arm
next to wheel being replaced. Do not place at any other location
such as frame rails. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment
may result.
NOTE
• Radial tires are non-directional. They provide equal traction and
performance when installed in either direction. For further
information, refer to TM 9-2610-200-14.
• Perform step 1 for old style control arms only.
(1) Place jack (3) in position (2) on lower control arm (1) next to wheel being
replaced. Center jack (3) squarely under point of contact.
NOTE
Perform step 2 for new style control arms only.
(2) Place jack (3) in position (5) on lower control arm (4) next to wheel being
replaced. Center jack (3) under point of contact.
(3) Loosen eight lug nuts (7), but do not remove.
(4) Raise vehicle high enough to allow removal of wheel assembly (6).
(5) Remove eight lug nuts (7) and wheel assembly (6) from geared hub (8).
b. Wheel Assembly Installation.
(1) Install wheel assembly (6) on geared hub (8) and secure with eight lug
nuts (7). Tighten lug nuts (7) to full engagement of wheel assembly (6) to geared
hub (8).
(2) Slowly lower vehicle and remove jack (3).
(3) Tighten eight lug nuts (7) in sequence indicated.
(4) Notify unit maintenance to tighten lug nuts (7) to proper torque.
3-28 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
~
4
~
3 3
OLD STYLE NEW STYLE
8
3
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Change 3 3-29/(3-30 blank) (3-31 and 3-32 deleted)

TM 9-2320-387-10
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
A-1. SCOPE
This appendix lists all forms, field manuals, and technical manuals for use with
these vehicles.
A-2. DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS

Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms. . . . . . DA Pam 25-30
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS)
User’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA Pam 750-8
A-3. FORMS
Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms . . . . . . . DA Form 2028
Recommended Changes to Equipment Technical Publications . . DA Form 2028-2
Hand Receipt/Annex Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA Form 2062
Exchange Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA Form 2402
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . DA Form 2404
Maintenance Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA Form 2407
Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DD Form 314
Product Quality Deficiency Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SF 368
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet
(Automated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA Form 5988-E
Maintenance Request (Automated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA Form 5990-E
Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record (Automated). . . . DA Form 5986-E
A-4. FIELD MANUALS

NBC Decontamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 3-5
Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in
Cold Weather (0° to -65°F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 9-207
Vehicle Recovery Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 9-43-2
First Aid for Soldiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 21-11
Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 21-305
Browning Machine Gun, Caliber .50 HB, M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 23-65
Basic Cold Weather Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 31-70
Northern Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 31-71
Army Motor Transport Units and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 55-30
Desert Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 90-3
Jungle Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 90-5
Mountain Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 90-6
Improved Target Acquisition System, M41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 3-22.32
Change 6 A-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
A-5. TECHNICAL MANUALS

Machine Gun, Caliber .50 Browning, M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-1005-213-10
Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support
Maintenance Manual for Care, Maintenance,
Repair, and Inspection of Pneumatic Tires
and Inner Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-2610-200-14
Operator’s, Unit, Intermediate Direct Support, and
Intermediate General Support Maintenance Manual for
Lead-Acid Storage Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-6140-200-14
Operating Instructions for Computer Truck Wheel Balancer . . TM 9-4910-785-10
A-6. TECHNICAL BULLETINS

Security of Tactical-Wheeled Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB 9-2300-422-20
Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Digest . . . . . . TB 43-0001-62
Use of Antifreeze Solutions, Antifreeze Extender, and
Cleaning Compounds Test Kit in Engine Cooling Systems . . . . . . . TB 750-651
A-7. MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS

Hand Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-2320-387-10-HR
A-8. ARMY REGULATIONS

The Army Integrated Publishing and Printing Program . . . . . . . . . . . . AR 25-30
Dictionary of United States Army Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR 310-25
Army Materiel Policy and Retail Maintenance Operation . . . . . . . . . . . AR 750-1
Army Acquisition Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR-70-1
Prevention of Motor Vehicle Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR 385-55
Expendable/Durable Items (Except: Medical, Class V,
Repair Parts and Heraldic Items) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTA 50-970
A-2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
APPENDIX B
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI)
AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS
Section I. INTRODUCTION
B-1. SCOPE
This appendix lists components of the end item and basic issue items for the EVC
vehicles to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient operation of the
equipment.
B-2. GENERAL
The Components of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Items (BII) lists are divided
into the following sections:
a. Section II. Components of End Item (COEI). This listing is for
informational purposes only and is not authority to requisition replacements. These
items are part of the end item, but are removed and separately packaged for
transportation or shipment. As part of the end item, these items must be with the
end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts.
Illustrations are furnished to assist in identifying the items.
b. Section III. Basic Issue Items (BII). These essential items are required to
place EVC vehicles in operation, to operate them, and to perform emergency repairs.
Although shipped separately packaged, BII must be with the vehicle during
operation and whenever it is transferred between property accounts. This list is
your authority to request/requisition replacement BII, based on TOE/MTOE
authorization of the end item. The illustrations will assist you with hard-to-identify
items.
B-3. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS

The following provides an explanation of columns found in the tabular listings:
a. Column (1) - Illustration Number (Illus Number). This column indicates
the number of the illustration in which the item is shown.
b. Column (2) - National Stock Number. Indicates the National Stock
Number assigned to the item and will be used for requisitioning purposes.
c. Column (3) - Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required,
a minimum description to identify the item. The last line for each item indicates the
Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) in parentheses followed by the
part number.
d. Column (4) - Unit of Issue (U/I). Indicates how the item is issued for the
National Stock Number shown in column two. This unit is expressed by a two-
character alphabetical abbreviation; i.e., (ea, pr).
e. Column (5) - Quantity Required (Qty rqr). Indicates the quantity of the
item authorized to be used with/on the vehicle.
Change 5 B-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM
These items are installed in the vehicle at the time of manufacture or rebuild.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
1 3120-01-188-5082 BEARING, SLEEVE: XBB EA 1

Pintle Adapter
(located in the armament
mounting assembly)
(19207) 12340310
consisting of:
5305-01-204-4190 a. Setscrew 3/8 - 24 EA 4
1
(7X677) 9428747
N/A b. Pintle Adapter EA 1
(19207) 12340310-1
b
2 2510-01-498-4996 GUNNER SHIELD XBB EA 1
ASSEMBLY:
(19207) 57K4470
consisting of:
a. Screw EA 4
(19207) 12484861-054
5310-01-442-1109 b. Washer EA 8
(24617) 9421888
2540-01-500-3446 c. Shield, gunner EA 1
(19207) 12484846
1005-01-500-3744 d. Bracket, gun shield support EA 1
(19207) 12484852
5310-01-417-7273 e. Lockwasher EA 8
(19207) 12484862-008
f. Nut EA 8
(19207) 12484864-005
B-2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (Cont’d)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
2 1010-01-447-2983 g. Handle assembly, locking EA 1

(Cont’d) (19200) 12012065
5305-00-514-0237 h. Screw EA 1
(19205) 5140237
5325-01-447-2281 i. Sleeve, split EA 1
(19200) 12012071
5315-01-513-0027 j. Pawl, clamping EA 1
(19200) 12012067
2540-01-500-0309 k. Adapter, pintle EA 1
(19207) 12484847
l. Screw EA 4
(19207) 12484861-055
c
a
b
d e
f
e g
f
k
l
b
j h
i
Change 3 B-2.1/(B-2.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number U/I rqr
1 TM 9-2320-387-10 EA 1
[in cotton duck pamphlet bag]
TM 9-2320-387-10-HR EA 1
[in cotton duck pamphlet bag]
2 5140-01-429-6945 BAG: jack and tools EA 1
stowage, cotton duck,
13 in. x 23 in. x 9-1/2 in. (folded) [in
footwell area M1113; shell M1114;
behind driver’s seat M1151, M1152]
(19207) 12447043
3 2540-00-670-2459 BAG ASSEMBLY, PAMPHLET: EA 1
cotton duck, 3 in. x 9-1/4 in.
x 11-1/4 in. [behind driver’s
seat area]
(19207) 11676920
4 5140-00-473-6256 BAG, TOOL: cotton duck, EA 1
10 in. x 20 in., w/flap [behind driver’s
seat area]
(19207) 11655979
1 2
Change 3 B-3
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
5 5120-01-429-6065 EXTENSION, JACK HANDLE: EA 1

15-1/2 in. long [in jack and tools bag]
(19207) 12447040
6 6545-00-922-1200 FIRST AID KIT, GENERAL PURPOSE: EA 1
3 in. x 5-13/16 in. x 8-7/32 in. [under
driver’s seat area M1113, M1151,
and M1152; under passenger’s seat
area M1114] (19207) 11677011
7 4210-01-481-3875 FIRE EXTINGUISHER: hand, EA 1
type 1, class 2, size 5
[driver’s seat area] (54905) 14091
8 7510-01-065-0166 FOLDER, EQUIPMENT EA 1
RECORD: 2-1/2 in. x 8 in. x
10 in. [in pamphlet bag]
(72094) 43986-1
5 6
8
7
B-4 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
9 5120-01-429-8137 HANDLE, MECHANICAL JACK: EA 1

18 in. long [in jack and tools bag]
(19207) 12447041
10 5120-01-430-3123 JACK, SCISSORS, HAND: mechanical, EA 1

3.5-ton cap., 6.33 in.
closed to 18.70 in. (max)
open [in jack and tools bag]
(19207) 12447042
10
Change 2 B-5
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
11 5120-01-416-8568 MAX TOOL KIT, COMBINATION EA 1

TOOL, HAND: [in footwell area on
M1113; rear tailgate area on M1114
and M1151; on tunnel on M1152]
(19207) 57K3528
5140-01-416-8569 a. Carrying case
(0T9K4) 595-030
5110-01-416-7827 b. Ax
(0T9K4) 595-010
5110-01-416-7830 c. Ax sheath
(0T9K4) 595-020
5120-01-416-8570 d. Shovel attachment
(0T9K4) 595-040
5120-01-416-8571 e. Mattock attachment
(0T9K4) 595-050
5120-01-416-8573 f. Pick attachment
(0T9K4) 595-060
5120-01-416-8572 g. Broad pick attachment
(0T9K4) 595-070
5120-01-416-8577 h. Rake hoe attachment
(0T9K4) (595-080)
5120-01-416-8574 i. Rake hoe fastener
(0T9K4) 595-090
5120-01-416-8575 j. Safety locking pin
(0T9K4) 595-999
B-6 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
11
a
c
e
h
f
g
Change 2 B-7
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
12 5120-00-223-7397 PLIERS, SLIP JOINT: combination, EA 1

slip joint, straight nose w/cutter,
8 in. long, phosphate finish
[in tool bag]
(19207) 11655775-3
13 5120-00-234-8913 SCREWDRIVER, CROSS TIP: EA 1
Phillips type, plastic handle,
point no. 2, 7-1/2 in. long
[in tool bag]
(19207) 11655777-12
14 5120-00-227-7356 SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP: EA 1
flared sides, plastic handle,
round blade, 3/16 in. wide tip,
7-3/4 in. long [in tool bag]
(55719) SSDE-66
12
13
14
B-8 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
15 4710-01-475-3753 TUBE ASSEMBLY: EA 1

U-end, allows operation of vehicle with
hydraulic winch or controller valve
assembly removed. [M1114 - stowage
box under commander’s seat; M1113,
M1151, and M1152 - also, if 10,500 lb.
hydraulic winch kit has been installed].
(OGBZ7) 983-90-50201
16 5120-00-240-5328 WRENCH, ADJUSTABLE: EA 1
open end, 8 in. long [in tool bag]
(96906) MS15461-3
17 5120-01-429-6964 WRENCH, RATCHET: 5/8 in., 3/4 in. EA 1
hex socket, 1-1/8 in. [in jack and tools
bag]
(19207) 12447039
18 5120-01-156-7296 WRENCH, WHEEL LUG: EA 1
1-15/32 - 1-19/64 in.
socket dia., 1-3/16 in. socket
depth, 17-1/2 in. long
[in jack and tools bag]
(11862) 14009303
15
16
17
18
Change 3 B-9/(B-10 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL)
C-1. SCOPE
This appendix lists additional items authorized for support of ECV vehicles.
C-2. GENERAL
This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the vehicle and do not have
to be turned in with it. These items are all authorized to you by CTA, MTOE, TDA,
or JTA.
C-3. EXPLANATION OF LISTING

National Stock Numbers, descriptions, and quantities are provided to help you
identify and request the additional items you require to support the vehicles. The
items are listed in alphabetical sequence by item name. If item required differs for
different models of this equipment, the model is shown under the “Usable On Code”
heading in the description column. These codes are identified as:
Code Used On
(Blank) All
XAA M1113
XBB M1114
TTT M1151
TTA M1151A1
UUU M1152
UUA M1152A1
UU1 M1165
UU2 M1165A1
TT1 M1167
Change 6 C-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

(1) (2) (3) (4)
NATIONAL DESCRIPTION
STOCK QTY
NUMBER CAGEC AND PART NUMBER USABLE ON CODE U/I AUTH
6665-01-438-6963 ALARM: chemical agent, M8A1 EA 1

(81361) EA-PRF-2058
2540-00-670-2459 BAG: pamphlet, cotton duck, EA 1
3 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 11-1/4 in.
(19207) 11676920
2510-01-276-9249 BAR: suspension tiedown XAA, UUU, EA 2
[in jack and tools UUA
bag in footwell area] (34623) 5598373
2540-00-678-3469 BLOCK: chock EA 2
(96906) MS52127-3
3940-00-151-6769 BLOCK: tackle EA 1
(19207) 11676932
2510-01-050-9770 BRACKET: support, EA 1
decontaminating apparatus
(19207) 11644841
2540-01-276-9250 BRACKET: suspension tiedown XAA, UUU EA 2
[in tool bag behind driver’s door] UUA
(34623) 5598408
2590-00-273-6331 BRACKET: water can TTT, TTA, UUU EA 2
(96906) MS53052-1 UUA, UU1, UU2
TT1
2590-01-222-7946 CABLE, NATO SLAVE: AY 1
intervehicular power cable, 12 ft long
(19207) 11682379-4
7240-00-089-3827 CAN: water, military, plastic, 5 gal. EA 1
(81349) MIL-C-43613
3940-01-509-9096 CARGO NET: XBB EA 1
(098P0) B9154-4854-2R-1855
2540-01-214-1264 CHAIN: tire, 9/32 side x 1/4 cross link SET 2
(34623) 5569255
4010-00-443-4845 CHAIN: tow, 9/32 side x 12 ft long EA 1
(19207) 10944642-2
C-2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont’d)

(1) (2) (3) (4)
STOCK QTY
4230-01-133-4124 DECONTAMINATING APPARATUS: EA 1

M-13
(81361) E5-51-527
4230-00-720-1618 DECONTAMINATION APPARATUS: TTT, TTA EA 1
portable, DS-2, 1-1/2 UT, ABC-M11 UUU, UUA
w/bracket (81361) D5-51-269 UU1, UU2
TT1
6230-00-163-1856 FLASHLIGHT: 2 x 3-1/2, GFST x 8 in. EA 1
(82214) 1259
4910-00-204-3170 GAUGE: tire pressure EA 1
(19207) 7081758
5120-01-355-1901 HANDLE, SOCKET WRENCH: 1/2 in. square EA 1
drive reversible, 9 in. long (05047) B107.10M
5315-00-732-1019 KEY, MACHINE: geared hub oil drainplug, EA 1
straight bar key, 1/2 in. square, 2-1/2 in. long
(96906) MS20066-543
5340-00-158-3805 PADLOCK SET: EA 1
(96906) MS35647-10
5820-00-223-7473 RADIO SET: 9 x 14 x 16 in. EA 1
(80058) AN/GRC-160
5120-00-222-8852 SCREWDRIVER: flat tip, flared EA 1
sides, plastic handle, round blade,
1/4 in. wide tip
(80063) SCC539502-2
5120-01-430-3096 SOCKET, SOCKET WRENCH: 1/2 in. square EA 1
drive, 9/16 in. wrenching size, standard length,
1/2 point, steel (2K880) 40218
7240-00-177-6154 SPOUT: can, gas, flexible with filter EA 1
screen, 16 in. long
(19207) 11677020
2510-01-197-8572 TRAY: water can XBB EA 1
(19207) 12340155
Change 6 C-3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont’d)

(1) (2) (3) (4)
STOCK QTY
2610-01-333-7632 TIRE: radial, 37 x 12.50R16.5LT EA 1

(34623) 5935336
9905-00-148-9546 TRIANGLES: folding, reflective SET 1
(81348) RR-W-1817
1005-00-322-9716 TRIPOD MOUNT: w/cover, TTT, TTA, UU1, EA 1
M3, mach. gun UU2
(19204) 8403398 TT1
5340-01-277-2460 TURNBUCKLE ASSY: suspension XAA EA 2
tiedown UUU
(34623) 5598406 UUA
N/A WHEEL AND RUNFLAT, RADIAL: EA 1
(19207) 12460176
5120-01-279-4788 WRENCH: open end, XAA EA 1
1-1/8 x 18 in. long UUU
(34623) 5598407 UUA
C-4 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
APPENDIX D
EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
D-1. SCOPE
This appendix lists expendable/durable supplies and materials you will need
to operate and maintain the ECV vehicles. These items are authorized to you by
CTA 50-970, Expendable Items.
D-2. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS

a. Column (1) - Item Number. This number is assigned to each entry in the
listing.
b. Column (2) - Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance
that requires the listed item:
C – Operator/Crew
c. Column (3) - National Stock Number. This is the National Stock Number
assigned to the item; use it to request or requisition the item.
d. Column (4) - Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required,
a description to identify the item. The last line for each item listing indicates the
Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) in parentheses followed by the
part number.
e. Column (5) - Unit of Measure (U/M). Indicates the measure used in
performing the actual maintenance function. This measure is expressed by an
alphabetical abbreviation (QT, GAL.). If the unit of measure differs from the unit of
issue, requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy your requirements.
Change 5 D-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND

MATERIALS LIST
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NATIONAL
ITEM STOCK
NUMBER LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M
1 C ADHESIVE: silicone rubber

(81349) MIL-A-46106
8040-01-010-8758 1 Kit KT
2 C ANTIFREEZE: arctic-type
(58536) A-A-52624
6850-01-464-9096 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
3 C ANTIFREEZE: ethylene glycol,
inhibited, heavy-duty,
single package
(58536) A-A-52624
6850-01-464-9125 1 Gallon Container GAL.
4 C CLEANING COMPOUND:
windshield washer
(81348) O-C-1901
6850-00-926-2275 1 Pint PT
5 C CREAM CLEANER: plastic,
liquid
(09177) 200-767-4A
8520-00-262-7177 1 Pint Container PT
6 C DETERGENT: general purpose
(74188) ORVUS WA PASTE
7 C DISTILLED WATER:
D-2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10

MATERIALS LIST (Cont’d)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NATIONAL
ITEM STOCK
8 C DRYCLEANING SOLVENT:
(81348) P-D-680, Type II
6850-00-110-4498 1 Pint Can PT
6850-00-274-5421 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
6850-00-285-8011 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
6850-00-637-6135 Bulk GAL.
9 C ETHANOL/SOLUTION:
(66735) F89I244
6550-01-315-5333 32 Ounce Bottle OZ
9.1 C FUEL: aviation, turbine, all
temperature, JP-8
9130-01-031-5816 Bulk GAL.
10 C FUEL OIL: diesel, regular
DF-2 (81348) VV-F-800
9140-00-286-5296 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
9140-00-286-5294 Bulk GAL.
11 C FUEL OIL: diesel, winter, DF-1
(81348) VV-F-800
9140-00-286-5288 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
9140-00-286-5286 Bulk GAL.
12 C FUEL OIL: diesel, arctic
DF-A (81348) VV-F-800
9140-00-286-5284 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
9140-00-286-5283 Bulk GAL.
13 C GREASE: automotive and
artillery (81349) MIL-G-10924
9150-01-197-7693 14 Ounce Cartridge OZ
9150-01-197-7690 1-3/4 Pound Can LB
9150-01-197-7689 6-1/2 Pound Can LB
Change 1 D-3
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NATIONAL
ITEM STOCK
14 C GREASE: lithium base w/

molybdenum disulfide
(60218) LS 2267
9150-01-015-1542 14-1/2 Ounce Cartridge OZ
15 C GREASE: wire-rope, EX
(81349) MIL-G-18458
9150-00-530-6814 35 Pound Can LB
16 C HAND CLEANER
(19410) PAXSOLV16
8520-00-082-2146 1 Pound Container LB
17 C HYDRAULIC FLUID:
transmission
(24617) Dexron® VI
9150-01-353-4799 1 Quart (plastic) Can QT
9150-01-114-9968 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
18 C ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL:
(97403) 13222E0694
6810-01-075-5546 4 Ounce Bottle OZ
19 C LUBRICANT: interlock
(96980) Zipperease
9150-00-999-7548 24 Stick Box OZ
20 C LUBRICANT: solid film
(F0301) P0329 OZ
9150-01-064-6511 11 ounce can, aerosol
21 C LUBRICATING OIL: gear,
multipurpose, GO 75
(81349) MIL-L-2105
9150-01-035-5390 1 Quart Can QT
9150-01-035-5391 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
D-4 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NATIONAL
ITEM STOCK
22 C LUBRICATING OIL: gear,

multipurpose, GO 80/90
(81349) MIL-L-2105
9150-01-035-5392 1 Quart Can QT
9150-01-035-5393 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
23 C LUBRICATING OIL: general
purpose, preservative, PL-S
(81348) VV-L-800
9150-00-231-6689 1 Quart Can QT
24 C LUBRICATING OIL: internal
combustion engine, arctic, OEA
(81349) MIL-L-46167
9150-00-402-4478 1 Quart Can QT
9150-00-402-2372 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-00-491-7197 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
25 C LUBRICATING OIL:
internal combustion engine,
tactical service, OE/HDO 10
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-00-189-6727 1 Quart Can QT
9150-00-186-6668 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-00-191-2772 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
26 C LUBRICATING OIL:
internal combustion engine,
tactical service, OE/HDO 30
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-00-186-6681 1 Quart Can QT
9150-00-188-9858 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-00-189-6729 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
D-5
TM 9-2320-387-10

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NATIONAL
ITEM STOCK
27 C LUBRICATING OIL: internal

combustion engine, tactical
service, OE/HDO 15/40
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-01-152-4117 1 Quart Can QT
9150-01-152-4118 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-01-152-4119 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
28 C RAG: wiping, cotton and
cotton-synthetic
(58536) A-A-531
7920-00-205-1711 50 Pound Bale LB
D-6
TM 9-2320-387-10
APPENDIX E
STOWAGE AND SIGN GUIDE
E-1. SCOPE
This appendix shows the location for stowage of equipment and material required
to be carried on the vehicles.
Change 3 E-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
E-2. GENERAL
The equipment stowage locator is designed to help inventory items required for
safe and efficient operation. This equipment locator is representative of BII and
applicable AAL stowage on the vehicles. Refer to appendix F for specific deviations
from this equipment locator and to para. 2-2 for additional information concerning
stowage of equipment.
E-2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
FIRE FIRST AID KIT FIRE FIRST AID KIT

EXTINGUISHER EXTINGUISHER
PAMPHLET PAMPHLET
BAG BAG
SLAVE SLAVE
CABLE TOOL CABLE
BAG
TOOL TOW TOW
BAG CHAIN CHAIN
MAX
TOOL
KIT
3 1/2 TRIANGLE
TON WARNING TRIANGLE
JACK WARNING
3 1/2
TON
JACK
MAX
TOOL
KIT M1151 M1152
Change 3 E-2.1
TM 9-2320-387-10
E-3. SIGN GUIDE
LOCATION OF CREW AREA AND EXTERIOR DECALS AND DATA PLATES

VEHICLE
KEY ITEM APPLICATION
1 Decal, caution, windshield cleaning M1114/M1151
2 Plate, identification, ignition All
3 Decal, instruction, vehicle, break-in service M1114
4 Plate, instruction, steering wheel lock All
5 Decal, speedometer All
6 Decal, instruction, vehicle, break-in service M1113, M1151, M1152
7 Decal, warning, hand throttle All
8 Plate, identification, heater, defroster, All
temperature, fan
9 Decal, identification, M16A2/M203 rifle, front M1113, M1151
10 Decal, floor heat control M1114
11 Decal, A/C control M1114
12 Plate, instruction, heater air control All
13 Decal, procedures, tiedown All
14 Decal, service and data manuals All
15 Plate, instruction, seatbelt retractor (front) All
16 Plate, instruction, operating All
17 Plate, instruction, driver’s seat adjustment M1113, M1151, M1152
18 Plate, identification, vehicle All
19 Plate, instruction, driver’s seat adjustment M1114
20 Decal, identification, fire extinguisher All
21 Plate, information, deep water fording Vehicles so equipped
22 Decal, bar code All
23 Plate, identification, vehicle M1114 (under hood)
24 Plate, sling and tiedown/weights and M1113, M1151, M1152
dimensions data
25 Plate, instruction, battery cable connections M1113, M1151, M1152
26 Decal, 24V All
27 Plate, identification, slave receptacle All
28 Plate, instruction, battery cable connections M1114
29 Plate, sling and tiedown/weights and M1114
dimensions data
E-2.2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
E-3. SIGN GUIDE (Cont'd)
3
1
4 1
2
5 7 8 9
12
13
23
14
15
21
22 16
17
20 18
19
29
ALL EXCEPT M1114
M1114 Change 5 E-3

TM 9-2320-387-10

VEHICLE
1 Decal, warning, fan blade All
2 Decal, no step All
3 Decal, sling All
5 Decal, warning, surge tank cap All
7 Decal, identification, star All
8 Decal, warning, winch M1114 (when equipped)
9 Decal, identification, sling and tiedown All
10 Decal, identification, vehicle number All
11 Decal, identification, tiedown All
12 Decal, warning, winch M1113 (when equipped)
13 Decal, identification, USMC registration number USMC vehicles only
14 Decal, instruction sling guide M1151
15 Decal, tire pressure, rear All
16 Decal, tire pressure, front All
E-4 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
13
2 6 14
5 7
4
3
2
15
9
10
7
16
11
12
Change 6 E-4.1
TM 9-2320-387-10

VEHICLE
1 Decal, fire control system M1167
2 Decal, target acquisition system M1167
3 Decal, vehicle mounted charger M1167
4 Decal, battery box M1167
5 Decal, traversing unit M1167
6 Decal, missile rack configuration M1167
1 2
E-4.2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
3 4
Change 6 E-5
TM 9-2320-387-10
2 3
LOCATION OF HEARING PROTECTION DECAL

KEY ITEM VEHICLE APPLICATION
1 Decal, caution, hearing protection M1114
2 Decal, warning, transporting M1152, M1152A1
ammunition (M1152/M1152A1 with Howitzer
prime mover kit installed)
3 Decal, caution, hearing protection ALL EXCEPT M1114
CARGO/TROOP CARRIER (M1152, M1152A1)

WITH WINTERIZATION KIT INSTALLED
KEY ITEM
4 Plate, instruction, heater operating instructions
E-6 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
APPENDIX F
ON-VEHICLE EQUIPMENT LOADING PLANS
F-1. SCOPE
This appendix shows the on-vehicle equipment loading plan for ECV vehicles.
Proponent: Commandant
US Army Infantry School
Fort Benning, GA 31905
F-2. M1114 UP-ARMORED CARRIERS W/SUPPLEMENTAL

ARMOR LOAD PLAN (MK19/40MM)
This is a standard load plan for the M1114 carriers w/supplemental armor. It
includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units
equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded
in accordance with local command policy.
Change 5 F-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
M1114 UP-ARMORED CARRIERS W/SUPPLEMENTAL

ARMOR STOWAGE PLAN (MK19/40MM)
LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16A2/M203 Rifle
2 Box Crewman (VIC 1)
3 Binoculars, M17/22
4 Amplifier, 1780 VIC 1
5 Radio (121.3), (VRC-91)
6 M16A2/M203 Rifle
7 Gunner’s Platform
8 First Aid Kit
9 Vehicle Power Conditioner
10 Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS 7B
11 Laser Range Finder, AN/GVS 5 Case
12 Panel, VS17
13 Radiac Meter, AN/VDR
14 Ammunition, 40 mm, MK19 (240 RDS)
15 Chain Saw
16 Ammunition/Tray, M16A2 (1680 RDS)
17 Hand Grenade (24 ea)
18 Ammunition, 40 mm, M203 (72 RDS)
19 3-1/2-Ton Jack
20 Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS 4
21 Radio W/Accessories, Back Pack
22 Tripod, AN/VAS 11
23 Pintle Adapter
24 Machine Gun, M60
25 Max Tool Kit
26 Batteries, AN/VAS 11
27 CE-11 and Spools, TA 312/TA-1
28 Spare Barrel, M60
29 Camouflage Screen and Support System
30 Demolition Kit (2 bags)
31 Claymore Mine, M18A1 (3 ea)
32 Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS 5
33 Water Can
34 Ammunition, 7.62, M60 (800 RDS)
35 Deleted
36 Storage Case, AN/TAS 46
F-2 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 2 F-3
TM 9-2320-387-10

ARMOR STOWAGE PLAN (MK19/40MM) (Cont’d)
LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
37 Chemical Detector, M8A1
38 Radiac Charger, PQ1578
39 Total Dose Meter, IM93
40 Radiac Meter, IM 174
41 ALICE Packs (3 ea)
42 Machine Gun Toolbox
43 Wire, Antenna
44 MRE’s (2 cases)
45 ICE Storage
46 Warning Triangle and BII Tool Bag
47 Storage Ring, VAS 11
48 Fire Extinguisher
49 Decontaminating Bottle, M-13
50 MK19 W/Ammunition (48 RDS)
52 Laser Range Finder, AN/VAS 5
53 Duffle Bags (3 ea)
54 Antitank Missile (AT-4), (under cargo hatch)
55 Hatch Stowage Net
56 Switch and Cable, Remote, Winch
57 Stowage Compartment Net
F-4
TM 9-2320-387-10
F-5
TM 9-2320-387-10
F-3. M1114 UP-ARMORED CARRIERS W/SUPPLEMENTAL

ARMOR LOAD PLAN (M2/.50 CAL)
This is a standard load plan for the M1114 carriers w/supplemental armor. It
includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units
equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded
in accordance with local command policy.
ARMOR STOWAGE PLAN (M2/.50 CAL)
LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16A2/M203 Rifle
2 Box, Crewman (VIC 1)
3 Binoculars, M17/22
4 Amplifier, 1780 VIC 1
5 Radio (121.3), (VRC-91)
6 M16A2/M203 Rifle
7 Gunner’s Platform
8 First Aid Kit
9 Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS 7B
10 Laser Range Finder, AN/GVS 5, Case
11 Panel, VS17
12 Radiac Meter, AN/VDR
13 Chain Saw
14 Hand Grenade (24 ea)
15 Mine Detector, AN/PSS 11
16 Ammunition, .40 mm, M203 (72 RDS)
17 Radio W/Accessories, Back Pack
18 Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS 4
19 Pintle Adapter
20 Batteries, AN/TAS 4
21 CE-II and Spools, TA-1/TA 312
22 Machine Gun, M60
23 Max Tool Kit
25 Demolition Kit (2 bags)
26 Space Barrel, M60/M2
27 Claymore Mine, M18A1 (3 ea)
28 Water Can
29 Machine Gun Ammunition, M60 (800 RDS)
30 Deleted
31 Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS 5
32 Storage Case, AN/TVS 4/6
F-6 Change 2
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 2 F-7
TM 9-2320-387-10

ARMOR STOWAGE PLAN (M2/.50 CAL) (Cont’d)
LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
33 Chemical Detector, M8A1
34 Radiac Charger, PQ 1578
35 Total Dose Meter, IM93
36 Radiac Meter, IM 174
37 ALICE Packs (3 ea)
38 Machine Gun Toolbox
39 Wire, Antenna
40 MRE’s (2 Cases)
41 ICE Storage
42 Warning Triangle and BII Tool Bag
43 Storage Ring, VAS 11
45 Decontaminating Bottle, M-13
46 M2 .50 Cal, Machine Gun
48 Long Range Finder, AN/GVS 5
49 Duffle Bags (3 ea)
50 Antitank Missile (AT-4), (under cargo hatch)
51 Hatch Stowage Net
52 Switch and Cable, Remote, Winch
53 Vehicle Power Conditioner
54 Ammunition, M2, .50 Cal. (700 RDS)
55 Ammunition/Tray, 556 M16A2 (1680 RDS)
56 3-1/2-Ton Jack
57 Stowage Compartment Net
F-8
TM 9-2320-387-10
F-9
TM 9-2320-387-l 0
F-4. Ml 113 LOAD PLAN

This is a standard load plan for the Ml113 vehicle. It is designed to supplement
the stowage and sign guide contained in appendix E. It includes selected items of
personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army for this
vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance
with local command policy.
Ml 113 STOWAGE PIAN
LOAD PIAN
NO. I
I 1 ! M16A2LM203 RLifle
2 I M16A2LM203 RifIe
3 Radio. AN/GRC-121.3
AVIVRC-89, ANfVRC-91 or ANNRC-92)
iv
lave
I.Winch
I x I Jack and ‘lbols Bag, Y-l/&Ton
iI Kit
Max Tool 1-m
\ 10 Decontaminating_ Bottle. M-13
11 Warning Triangle
12 Tool Kit
14 First Aid Kit (under driver seat)
TM 9-2320-387-10
Change 3 F-11
TM 9-2320-387-10
F-5. ARMAMENT CARRIER LOAD PLAN

This is a standard load plan for the expanded capacity armament carriers (M1151).
It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E.
It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units
within the Army equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document
may be loaded in accordance with local command policy. For Marine Corps Load
Plans, refer to TI 11240-24/42.
ARMAMENT CARRIER STOWAGE PLAN

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16A1/M203 Rifle
2 Rifle M16A1
3 Tool Box
4 Pedestal
5 Ammunition Tray (caliber 5.56 mm)
6 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
7 Max Tool Kit
8 Water Can Tray (2)
9 Water Can Tray
10 Ammunition Tray (caliber 5.56 mm)
11 40 mm/50 cal/Ammunition Tray/A/C Evaporator
12 Jack, Scissors
14 AN/GRC-160 Radio
F-12 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
14
1
13
12
3
11
10 5
9
6
Change 3 F-13
TM 9-2320-387-10
F-6. HEAVY VARIANT STOWAGE PLAN

This is the standard load plan for the M1152, and variants equipped with a
howitzer prime mover or towed vulcan kit. It is designed to supplement the stowage
and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and
unit equipment issued to most units within the Army equipped with this vehicle.
Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local
command policy.
HEAVY VARIANT STOWAGE PLAN

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
2 Fuel (Diesel) Cans (2)
3 Remote
4 M122 Tripod
5 Telephone
6 DR8 Cable Reels (2)
7 Paralleloscope and Aiming Posts
8 Jack Strut
9 Paralleloscope Spikes (2)
10 Ammo (22 Rounds)
11 M60 Machine Gun
12 Sight Box #2
13 Sight Box #1
14 GDU Battery
15 GDU Box
16 Section Chest
17 Water Cans (2)
18 Spade
F-14 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
INTERNAL TOP VIEW
Change 3 F-15/(F-16 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
APPENDIX G
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
G-1. SCOPE
This appendix gives lubrication requirements for the ECV vehicles which are the
responsibility of the operator/crew.
G-2. GENERAL LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS

a. Maintaining Lubricant Levels. Lubricant levels must be checked as
specified in the PMCS (chapter 2, section 2) and table G-1, Lubrication. Steps must
be taken to replenish and maintain lubricant levels.
WARNING
• Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is TOXIC and flammable. Wear
protective goggles and gloves, use only in well-ventilated area, avoid
contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and do not breathe vapors.
Keep away from heat and flame. Never smoke when
using solvent. The flashpoint for type I drycleaning solvent is 100°F
(38°C), and for type II, is 138°F (59°C). Failure to comply may
result in injury or death to personnel.
• If personnel become dizzy while using cleaning solvent,
immediately get fresh air and medical help. If solvent contacts skin
or clothes, flush with cold water. If solvent contacts eyes,
immediately flush eyes with water and get medical attention.
b. Cleaning Fittings Before Lubrication. Clean parts with drycleaning
solvent P-D-680 or equivalent. Dry before lubricating.
NOTE
Dotted arrow points indicate lubrication on both sides of the
equipment.
c. Lubrication After Fording. Following fording operation, lubricate all
fittings below fording depth and check submerged gear boxes for presence of water.
d. Lubrication After High-Pressure Washing. After a thorough washing,
lubricate all grease fittings and oil can points outside and underneath vehicle.
e. Localized Views. A reference to the appropriate localized view is given
after most lubrication entries. Localized views begin on page G-11.
Change 5 G-1
TM 9-2320-387-10
G-3. LUBRICATION INTERVALS

a. Service Interval Under Normal Conditions. Service intervals listed are
for normal operation in moderate temperatures, humidity, and atmospheric
conditions. Hard-time intervals may be shortened if your lubricants are
contaminated or if you are operating the equipment under adverse conditions,
including longer-than-usual operating hours. Hard-time intervals may be extended
during periods of low activity, though adequate preservation precautions must be
taken. Perform semiannual service intervals every six months, or 3,000 miles
(4,827 km), whichever comes first.
b. Service Interval Under Unusual Conditions. Increase frequency of
lubricating service when operating under abnormal conditions such as high or low
temperatures, prolonged high-speed driving, or extended cross-country operations.
Such operation can diminish lubricant’s protective qualities. More frequent
lubricating service intervals are necessary to maintain vehicle readiness when
operating under abnormal conditions.
c. Hard-Time Intervals. Intervals shown in this appendix are based on
mileage and calendar times. An example of mileage and calendar interval is: 3/S,
in which 3 stands for 3,000 mi (4,827 km), and S stands for semiannually (every
six months). The lubrication of the vehicle is to be performed at whichever interval
occurs first. For equipment under manufacturer’s warranty, hard-time oil service
intervals shall be followed.
d. Deleted
G-4. LUBRICATION FOR OPERATION UNDER EXTREME TEMPERATURES

a. Changes in Lubricant Grades. Lubricant grades change with weather
conditions. Refer to lubrication table for lubricant grade changes.
b. Arctic Conditions. Refer to FM 9-207, Operation and Maintenance of
Ordnance Materiel in Cold Weather (0°F to -65°F) (-18°C to -54°C), or the
lubrication table.
G-5. CORROSION CONTROL

Refer to para. 2-4 for appropriate corrosion control procedures.
G-2 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table G-1. Lubrication.

EXPECTED
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT CAPACITIES
TEMPERATURES
Engine Oil Crankcase: Above +15°F (-9°C)
(MIL-L-2104) OE/HDO 30 w/o filter +40° to -15°F (+4° to -26°C)
(MIL-L-46167) OE/HDO 10 7 qt (6.6 L) +40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C)
OEA-30 w/ filter +120° to -55°F (+49° to -48°C)
OE/HDO 15W-40 8 qt (7.6 L) Above 0°F (-18°C)
Dry System
10 qt (9.5 L)
Engine Ethylene Glycol Radiator:

Coolant and Water 5 qt (4.7 L)
Complete
1/2 Ethylene Glycol, System: 26 qt Above +15°F (-9°C)
1/2 Water (24.6 L)
1/2 Ethylene Glycol, +40° to -15°F (+4° to -26°C)
1/2 Water
3/5 Ethylene Glycol, +40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C)
2/5 Water
Transmission Dexron® VI Dry 13.5 qt All Temperatures

only (12.8 L)
Drain & Refill
7.7 qt (7.3 L)
Transfer Case Dexron® VI Drain & Refill All Temperatures

3.35 qt (3.17 L)
Differentials GO 80/90 Dry 2 qt All Temperatures

(1.89 L)
GO 75 " +40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C)
Differential GO 80/90 Dry 2.68 qt Above +15°F (-9°C)

with diff. cooler (2.53 L)
GO 75 " +40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C)
Geared Hubs GO 80/90 Dry 1 pt All Temperatures

(0.47 L)
GO 75 " +40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C)
Geared Fan GO 80/90 Dry 1.2 pt All Temperatures

Drive (0.51 L)
GO 75 " +40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C)
Change 6 G-3
TM 9-2320-387-10
Table G-1. Lubrication (Cont’d).

EXPECTED
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT CAPACITIES
TEMPERATURES
Steering Dexron® VI Refer to All Temperatures
System table 1-2.1,
Steering System
Capacities
Upper and GAA As Required All Temperatures

Lower Ball (MIL-G-10924)
Joints, Tie Rod
Ends, Pitman
Arm, Propeller
Shafts, etc.
Hinges, Cables, OE/HDO As Required All Temperatures

and Linkages
OE/HDO 15/40 (Grade 15W-40) lubricant may be used when expected temperatures
are above +5°F (-15°C). If OEA-30 lubricant is required to meet the temperature
ranges prescribed in the lubrication table, then the OEA-30 lubricant is to be used
in place of OE/HDO 10 lubricant for all temperature ranges. If operating conditions
are severe or abnormal, service chassis lubrication points at 1,000 mi (1,609 km).
Door Latches PL-S As Required All Temperatures

and Wire (VV-L-800)
Handle Lock
GREASE, WIRE ROPE

(MIL-G-18458) ALL TEMPERATURES
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — TEMPERATURE LIMITS (VV-F-800)
Grade DF2 Fuel For use above +10°F (-12°C)*

Grade DF1** For use below +10°F (-12°C) to above -20°F (-29°C)
Grade DFA For use below -20°F (-29°C)
Grade JP-8 All Temperatures
* Temperature limits may vary, dependent on the cloud point of the
actual DF2 fuel being supplied in the geographical area.
** DF1 is not normally procured in CONUS or OCONUS. Refineries will
blend DF2 with kerosene to meet temperature requirements of DF1.
G-4 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
LUBRICATION POINTS
INTERVAL • LUBRICANT
3/A OE/ Tiedown

HDO Shackles
(See note 1)
3/A GWR Winch Wire

Rope (M1113,
M1151, M1152)
(See note 2)
3/A OE/ Hood Hinges

HDO (See note 1)
3/A OE/ Heater Control

HDO Shutoff Valve
Lever and Pin
(LV-A)
(See note 1)
3/A OE/ Door Hinges

HDO (See note 1)
3/A OE/ Transmission

HDO Shift Linkage
(See note 1)
3/A OE/ Door Hinges

HDO (See note 1)
3/A PL-S Cargo Shell

Door Latches
(See note 1)
3/A PL-S Cargo Shell

Door Latches
(See note 1)
3/A OE/ Tailgate

Hinges
HDO (See note 1)
3/A OE/ Tiedown

HDO Shackles
(See note 1)
3/A GWR Winch Wire

Rope (M1114)
(See note 2)
NOTE
A REFERENCE TO THE LOCALIZED VIEW (LV) IS
PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT ENTRY,
WHERE APPLICABLE.
Change 3 G-5
TM 9-2320-387-10
LUBRICATION POINTS (Cont'd)

LUBRICANT • INTERVAL
Accelerator OE/ 3/A

Linkage HDO
(LV-C)
(See note 1)
Heater Control OE/ 3/A

Knob and HDO
Plunger
(LV-B)
(See note 1)
Transfer Case OE/ 3/A

Shift Linkage HDO
(See note 1)
Door Handles OE/ 3/A

(See note 1) HDO
Cargo Shell PL-S 3/A

Door Rear
Wire Handle Lock
(See note 1)
NOTE
WHERE APPLICABLE.
G-6 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
3/A GAA Upper Control

Arm Ball Joints
Lower Control
Arm Ball Joints
(LV-S, T)
(See note 4)
3/A GAA Front Propeller

Shaft Universal
Joints andSlip
Yokes (3 fittings)
(LV-D) (See note 4)
3/S OE/ Crankcase

HDO Fill
(LV-F)
(See note 7)
W Dexron® Transmission
VI Fill and Level
(Check Level)
(LV-H)
(See note 6)
3/A GAA Radius Rods

(LV-G)
(See note 4)
3/A OE/ Pintle

HDO (See note 3)
(LV-I)
NOTE
WHERE APPLICABLE
Change 5 G-7
TM 9-2320-387-10
Power Dexron ® VI
Steering
Reservoir
(P/N RCSK 18330)
Fill and Level M
(Check level)
(LV-J)
(See note 5)
Power Dexron ®
Steering VI M
Reservoir
(P/N 94252A)
Fill and Level
(Check level)
(LV-J1)
(See note 5.1)
Front
Propeller GAA
Shaft HDO 3/A
Universal
Joints and
Slip Yokes
(3 fittings)
(LV-D, E)
(See note 4)
NOTE
PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT.
G-8 Change 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
3/S GO/ Geared Fan

80/90 Drive
(LV-U)
(See note 8)
3/A GAA Tie Rod Ends

(2 fittings)
(LV-M)
(See note 4)
3/A GAA Idler Arm

(2 fittings)
(LV-K)
(See note 4)
3/A GAA Rear Propeller

Shaft Universal
Joints and Slip
Yokes
(3 fittings)
(LV-N, O)
(See note 4)
NOTE
WHERE APPLICABLE.
Change 6 G-9
TM 9-2320-387-10
Pitman Arm GAA 3/A

(LV-L)
(See note 4)
Intermediate GAA 3/A

Steering Shaft
(3 fittings)
(LV-Q, R)
(See note 4)
Crankcase OE/ D
Level HDO
(LV-P)
(See note 7)
NOTE
WHERE APPLICABLE.
G-10 Change 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS
CONTROLSHUTOFF
HEATER HEATER CONTROL KNOB AND
VALVE LEVER AND PIN PLUNGER
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT UNIVERSAL

ACCELERATORLINKAGE JOINT AND SUP YOKES
G-11
TM 9-2320-387-l 0
LOCAUZED LU6RlCAllON POINTS (Cont’d)
CRANKCASE Fill RADIUS ROD
TRANSMISSION FILL
AND lEVEL PlNn.E
El2
TM 9-2320-387-10
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS (Cont'd)
J1
POWER STEERING RESERVOIR FILL POWER STEERING RESERVOIR FILL

AND LEVEL (P/N RCSK 18330) AND LEVEL (P/N 94252A)
IDLER ARM TIE ROD ENDS AND PITMAN ARM
Change 2 G-13
TM 9-2320-387-10
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT UNIVERSAL JOINTS CRANKCASE LEVEL

AND SLIP YOKES
INTERMEDIATE STEERING SHAFT LOWER CONTROL ARM BALL JOINTS

AND UPPER CONTROL ARM BALL
JOINTS
G-14 Change 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
RESERVOIR
FILL PLUG
GEARED FAN DRIVE
Change 6 G-14.1/(G-14.2 blank)

TM 9-2320-387-10
NOTES
1. Oil Can Points. 4. Steering System.
CAUTION
Lubricate all oil can points every
3,000 mi (4,827 km), or semi- Do not overlubricate tie rod ends
annually, whichever occurs first. Use and upper and lower control arm
seasonal grade OE on hood hinges, ball joints. One or two shots is
tailgate hinges, door hinges, door adequate. Excessive lubrication
will result in the boot rupturing.
handles, transfer case shift linkage, Observe the boot during
accelerator linkage, transmission shift lubrication: a seeping condition
linkage, heater control shutoff valve indicates adequate lubrication;
lever and pin, heater control knob, expansion of the boot indicates
and tiedown shackles and plunger. over lubrication.
Lubricate cargo shell door paddle
Lubricate front and rear propeller
lock, rear wire handle lock, and shaft, steering column, U-joints, slip
cargo shell door latches with PL-S. yokes, tie rods, upper and lower
control arm ball joints, radius rods,
2. Winch Wire Rope. pitman arm, intermediate steering
shafts, and idler arm with
WARNING GAA/HDO every 3,000 mi (4,827
Wear leather gloves when km), or annually, whichever comes
handling winch wire rope. first. Insert enough grease in each
U-joint to purge air and impurities
Do not handle wire rope with of all four cross-bearings. If one or
bare hands. Broken wires more cross bearings do not purge,
may cause injury. then shake, rotate and/or hit shaft
NOTE with a rubber mallet to help purge
cross-bearings. Repair or replace
Front and rear winch lubri- bearing if necessary, notify your
cation is identical. supervisor
After each use, clean and lubricate 5. Power Steering Reservoir
winch wire rope with new (P/N RCSK 18330).
OE/HDO 30. Clean entire wire rope
with wire brush. Perform winch wire CAUTION
rope cleaning and lubrication every Use Dexron® VI for filling power
3,000 mi (4,827 km), or annually, steering reservoir. Failure to use
whichever occurs first, when wire Dexron® VI may cause damage to
rope is not used. power steering system.
Check the fluid level in the power
3. Pintle. steering reservoir monthly and
adjust level as necessary. If fluid is
Every 3,000 mi (4,827 km), or hot, level should be between HOT
annually, whichever occurs first, and COLD marks on the cap
clean pintle with wire brush and indicator. If cool, level should be
lubricate rear plate fitting with between ADD and COLD marks. In
seasonal grade OE. either condition, level must be above
ADD mark. Fluid does not require
periodic changing.
Change 5 G-15
TM 9-2320-387-10
NOTES
5.1. Power Steering Reservoir 7. Crankcase Oil Level.
(P/N 94252A).
CAUTION
CAUTION There are two marks on the
Use Dexron® VI for filling power dipstick: FULL and ADD 1 QT.
steering reservoir. Failure to use The quantity of oil required to
Dexron® VI may cause damage raise the oil level from ADD
to power steering system. 1 QT mark to FULL mark is 1 qt
Check the fluid level in the power (0.9 L). Do not overfill crank-
steering reservoir monthly and adjust case. Overfilling may result in
level as necessary. If fluid is HOT, damage to engine.
level should be at top of sightglass. If NOTE
fluid is COLD, fluid should be in
center of sightglass. If fluid is at • If oil level is above FULL, it
bottom of sightglass ADD fluid as may be due to oil cooler drain-
required, till in center of sightglass. back. Operate the engine for
Fluid does not require periodic one minute, shut down, wait
changing. one minute, then recheck oil
level.
6. Transmission. • Oil is added to crankcase
CAUTION through fill tube which is
located on top of engine.
• Do not overfill transmission.
The fluid level rises as the fluid Check crankcase oil level daily. Start
temperature increases. There- engine and visually check for oil leaks
fore, do not check level before at drainplug and oil filter. Stop engine
the transmission has reached and wait approximately one minute for
normal operating temperature. oil to drain back into oil pan, then
The safe operating level is recheck oil level with dipstick. On
within the crosshatch marks vehicles equipped for deep water
on the dipstick. Overfilling may fording, the dipstick has a seal which
result in damage to trans- fits into the opening of the dipstick
mission. tube. The dipstick handle must be
turned counter-clockwise to be released
• Use Dexron® VI for filling before dipstick is withdrawn. Turn
transmission. Failure to use handle clockwise to seat after installing
Dexron® VI may cause dam- dipstick. Have oil changed every 3,000
age to transmission. mi (4,827 km), or semiannually,
whichever occurs first.
Check and fill transmission to proper
level weekly. Operate transmission 8. Geared Fan Drive.
through all operating ranges to fill
cavities and fluid passages. With WARNING
vehicle positioned on level ground, If vehicle has been operating,
allow engine to idle, shift transmission use extreme care to avoid being
to P, and set parking brake. Check burned when removing geared
fluid level on dipstick. It should fan drive fill plug. Use rags or
register within the crosshatch marks heavy gloves to protect hands.
under the conditions stated above.
Have fluid changed every 12,000 mi Check and fill geared hub reservoir every
(19,308 km), or biennially, whichever 3,000 mi (4,827 km) or semi-annually,
occurs first. whichever comes first. Fluid should be
even with bottom of fill plug hole.
G-16 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX
Para. Page
A
Additional authorization list (AAL), appendix C .............................. C-1
Adjustable gunner platform operation (M1114, M1167) .................. 2-36.1 2-102.1
Adjusting driver’s seat ........................................................................ 2-16 2-72
Air cleaner dump valve servicing ...................................................... 3-16 3-17
Air cleaner servicing (emergency procedure) .................................... 3-15 3-14
Air conditioner operation (M1114)..................................................... 1-35 1-100.2
Air conditioner operation (M1151, M1151A1, M1152, M1152A1,
M1165, M1165A1, M1167)................................................................ 2-35.1 2-101
Air conditioning system operation (M1114) ...................................... 1-27 1-32
Air conditioning system (two-man and four-man) ............................ 1-28 1-33
Appendix A, references ....................................................................... A-1
Appendix B, components of end item (COEI) and basic issue
items (BII) lists ................................................................................. B-1
Appendix C, additional authorization list (AAL) .............................. C-1
Appendix D, expendable/durable supplies and materials list.......... D-1
Appendix E, stowage and sign guide ................................................. E-1
Appendix F, on-vehicle equipment loading plans.............................. F-1
Appendix G, lubrication instructions................................................. G-1
Armament carrier load plan............................................................... F-5 F-12
Armament weapon station operation (M1151, M115A1) ................. 2-33.1 2-98.2
Army regulations, references ............................................................. A-8 A-2
Axle weight (table 1-14)...................................................................... 1-12
B
Basic issue items (BII) lists, components of end item (COEI),
appendix B......................................................................................... B-1
Battery box cover replacement, companion seat assembly and....... 2-17 2-73
Battery powered motorized traversing unit (BPMTU)..................... 2-33.2 2-98.4
Batteries, servicing ............................................................................. 3-12 3-12
Battery system operation ................................................................... 1-20 1-22
Break-in service .................................................................................. 1-7 1-3
Break-in service, operation under usual conditions ......................... 2-11 2-62
C
Capacities (table 1-2) .......................................................................... 1-6
Cargo shell door operation (M1114, M1151, M1151A1, M1167)...... 2-32 2-96
Cargo/troop carrier and S250 shelter carrier operation
reference index .................................................................................. 2-52 2-124
Cleaning compound-to-water ratio (table 3-2) .................................. 3-14
Cleaning instructions.......................................................................... 2-5 2-24
Cold weather starting below +32°F (0°C).......................................... 2-41 2-106
Cooling system data (table 1-5).......................................................... 1-8
Cooling system operation ................................................................... 1-17 1-16
Command and control/general purpose vehicle (M1165) ................. 1-11.5 1-4.6
Command and control/general purpose vehicle,
IAP/ARMOR ready (M1165A1) ........................................................ 1-11.6 1-4.7
Change 6 Index 1
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX (Cont’d)
Para. Page
C (Cont’d)
Companion seat assembly and battery box cover replacement ....... 2-17 2-73
Components of end item (COEI) and basic issue items (BII)
lists, appendix B................................................................................ B-1
Controls, indicators, and equipment .................................................. 2-2 2-2
Coolant surge tank, servicing............................................................. 3-10 3-10
Cooling system data (table 1-5).......................................................... 1-8
Cooling system operation (Serial numbers 299999 and below) ....... 1-17 1-16
Cooling system operation (Serial numbers 300000 and above) ....... 1-17.1 1-16.2
Corrosion control................................................................................. G-5 G-2
Corrosion prevention and control (CPC) ........................................... 1-4 1-2
C-Pillar door operation (M1114) ........................................................ 2-31 2-94.8
C-Pillar door operation (M1151A1) (with perimeter armor) ............ 2-31.1 2-94.9
Crew door emergency extraction bracket operation,
Frag 5 (M1114).................................................................................. 2-31.5 2-94.16
Crew door operation (M1114)............................................................. 2-30 2-94.1
Crew door operation (M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1, M1167)
(with perimeter armor) ..................................................................... 2-30.1 2-94.2
Crew door operation, Frag 5
(M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1, M1167) ........................................ 2-30.2 2-94.4
Crew door operation Frag 5 (M1114)................................................. 2-30.3 2-94.6
Curb weight (table 1-12)..................................................................... 1-11
D
Deep water fording (M1113, M1151, and M1152) operation............ 2-48 2-114
Defroster operation (M1113) .............................................................. 2-19 2-75
Defroster operation (M1114) .............................................................. 2-20 2-76
Defroster operation (M1151, M1151A1, M1152, M1152A1,
M1165, M116A1, M1167).................................................................. 2-20.1 2-76.1
Department of the army pamphlets, references ............................... A-2 A-1
Differences between models (table 1-1) ............................................. 1-6
Door operation (M1114), crew ............................................................ 2-30 2-94.1
Door operation (M1114), C-pillar ....................................................... 2-31 2-94-8
Door operation (M1151A1, M1152A1, M1165A1)
(with perimeter armor), crew ........................................................... 2-30.1 2-94.2
Door operation (M1151A1), C-pillar .................................................. 2-31.1 2.94.9
Driver’s seat, adjusting ....................................................................... 2-16 2-72
Drivetrain operation ........................................................................... 1-15 1-14
Dusty, sandy areas, operating in........................................................ 2-43 2-108
E
Electric winch operation (M1113, M114)........................................... 2-28 2-90
Emergency fan clutch override .......................................................... 3-23 3-26
Emergency Frag 5 door removal (M1114) ......................................... 2-31.4 2-94.14
Emergency rescue wrench operation (new configuration) ............... 2-31.3 2-94.12
Emergency rescue wrench operation (old configuration) ................. 2-31.2 2-94.10
Index 2 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX (Cont’d)
Para. Page
E (Cont’d)
Engine data (table 1-4) ....................................................................... 1-8
Engine oil servicing............................................................................. 3-18 3-19
Engine, starting the ............................................................................ 2-12 2-62
Equipment characteristics, capabilities, and features...................... 1-8 1-3
Equipment improvement report and maintenance
digest (EIR MD) ................................................................................ 1-6 1-3
Expanded capacity, armament carrier (M1151)................................ 1-11.1 1-4.2
Expanded capacity vehicle, Improved Target
Acquisition System, (TOW ITAS) (M1167)...................................... 1-11.7 1-4.8
Expanded capacity, armament IAP/ARMOR ready (M1151A1)....... 1-11.2 1-4.3
Expanded capacity, enhanced (M1152).............................................. 1-11.3 1-4.4
Expanded capacity, enhanced, IAP/ARMOR ready (M1152A1) ....... 1-11.4 1-4.5
Expendable/durable supplies and materials list, appendix D ......... D-1
Explanation of columns ...................................................................... B-3 B-1
Explanation of listing ......................................................................... C-3 C-1
Explanation of columns ...................................................................... D-2 D-1
Extreme cold, on ice or snow, operating in ........................................ 2-42 2-107
Extreme heat, operating in ................................................................ 2-45 2-110
F
Fan clutch override, emergency.......................................................... 3-23 3-26
Field manuals, references................................................................... A-4 A-1
Fire extinguisher operation................................................................ 2-29 2-94
Fluid leakage....................................................................................... 2-7 2-28
Fluid servicing, power steering (P/N RCSK 18330).......................... 3-20 3-21
Fluid servicing, power steering (P/N 94252A) ................................. 3-20.1 3-22
Fluid servicing, transmission ............................................................. 3-19 3-20
Fording (M1113, M1151, and M1152) operation, deep water .......... 2-48 2-114
Fording operation, shallow water ...................................................... 2-47 2-112
Forms, references ................................................................................ A-3 A-1
Four-man crew area soft top and arctic soft top enclosures,
removal and installation of .............................................................. 2-54.2 2-130.4
Four-man cargo area soft top enclosure,
removal and installation of .............................................................. 2-54.3 2-130.8
Fuel door operation (M1114) .............................................................. 2-34 2-100.1
Fuel filter maintenance ...................................................................... 3-11 3-11
Fuel system operation ........................................................................ 1-16 1-15
Fuel tank servicing ............................................................................. 3-21 3-23
G
General cleaning instructions (table 2-1) .......................................... 2-5 2-26
General ............................................................................................. 1-13 1-13
General lubricating instructions under unusual conditions ............ 3-3 3-1
General lubrication instructions ........................................................ 3-2 3-1
General lubrication instructions ....................................................... G-2
General service data (table 1-3) ......................................................... 1-7
Change 6 Index 3
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX (Cont’d)
Para. Page
G (Cont’d)
Generating system operation (200-ampere alternator) .................... 1-19 1-20
Gunner platform operation (M1114), adjustable ............................. 2-36.1 2-102.1
Gunner’s restraint system operation
(M1114, M1151, M1151A1, M1167) ................................................. 2-36.2 2-102.2
H
Hand receipt manual .......................................................................... 1-3 1-2
Hatch stowage net, removal and installation ................................... 2-59 2-134
Heater operation (M1113, M1114) ..................................................... 2-21 2-76.2
Heater operation (M1151, M1151A1, M1152, M1152A1,
M1165, M1165A1, M1167)................................................................ 2-21.2 2-76.4
Heater operation, vehicular................................................................ 2-50 2-122
Heavy variant stowage plan............................................................... F-6 F-14
How to use this manual...................................................................... iii
Hood, raising and securing................................................................. 3-9 3-8
Hydraulic winch operation ................................................................. 2-28.1 2-92.2
K
Know your controls and indicators .................................................... 2-1 2-1
L
Light switch, operation of vehicle ...................................................... 2-15 2-70
List of effective pages ......................................................................... A
Loading plans, on-vehicle equipment, appendix F............................ F-1
Lubrication (table G-1) ....................................................................... G-3
Lubrication for continued operation below 0°F (-18°C).................... 3-4 3-1
Lubrication for operation under extreme temperatures .................. G-4 G-2
Lubrication instructions ..................................................................... 3-1 3-1
Lubrication instructions, appendix G ................................................ G-1
Lubrication instructions, general....................................................... 3-2 3-1
Lubrication instructions under unusual conditions, general ........... 3-3 3-1
Lubrication intervals .......................................................................... G-3 G-2
Lubrication requirements................................................................... 2-8 2-28
M
Maintenance forms and records......................................................... 1-2 1-1
Maintenance procedures reference index .......................................... 3-8 3-8
Manual traversing unit operation ..................................................... 2-33.3 2-98.8
Maximum vehicle operating speeds (table 1-8)................................. 1-10
Max tool kit stowage (M1113) operation ........................................... 2-24 2-80
Max tool kit stowage
(M1114, M1151, M1151A1, M1167) operation ................................ 2-25 2-82
Max tool kit stowage (M1152, M1152A1, M1165, M1165A1)
operation............................................................................................ 2-24.1 2-80.2
Metric system ...................................................................................... 1-9 1-3
Mirror adjustment, rearview.............................................................. 3-24 3-27
Miscellaneous publications, references.............................................. A-7 A-2
Mud, operating in................................................................................ 2-44 2-109
Index 4 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX (Cont'd)
Para. Page
M (Cont’d)
M1114 up-armored carrier stowage net operation reference index. 2-57 2-132
M1114 up-armored carriers w/supplemental armor load plan
(MK19/40mm).................................................................................... F-2 F-1
M1114 up-armored carriers w/supplemental armor load plan
(M2/.50 cal) ........................................................................................ F-3 F-6
M1113 load plan.................................................................................. F-4 F-10
M1113/M1114 vehicle trailer towing requirements (table 2-3.1) .... 2-89
O
Oil servicing, engine............................................................................ 3-18 3-19
On-vehicle equipment loading plans, appendix F............................. F-1
Operating in dusty, sandy areas ........................................................ 2-43 2-108
Operating in extreme cold, on ice or snow ........................................ 2-42 2-107
Operating in extreme heat ................................................................. 2-45 2-110
Operating in mud................................................................................ 2-44 2-109
Operating in rainy or humid conditions............................................ 2-46 2-112
Operating on unusual terrain ............................................................ 2-40 2-105
Operation of vehicle light switch ....................................................... 2-15 2-70
Operation under unusual conditions reference index ...................... 2-38 2-103
Operation under usual conditions reference index........................... 2-10 2-60.3
Optional 12-volt auxiliary power outlet operation ........................... 2-22.1 2-78.1
P
Parking brake adjustment and cleaning ........................................... 3-13 3-13
Parking brake system operation service ........................................... 1-22 1-24
Placing vehicle in motion.................................................................... 2-13 2-66
Plastic window cleaning ..................................................................... 3-17 3-18
Power steering fluid servicing (P/N RCSK 18330)............................ 3-20 3-21
Power steering fluid servicing (P/N 94252A) ................................... 3-20.1 3-22
Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) ..................... 2-6 2-27
Preventive maintenance checks and services (table 2-2) ................. 2-29
Preventive maintenance checks and services reference index ....... 2-4 2-24
Principles of operation reference index ............................................. 1-14 1-13
R
Rainy or humid conditions, operating in ........................................... 2-46 2-112
Raising and securing hood ................................................................. 3-9 3-8
Rear heater assembly operation ...................................................... 2-21.1 2-76.3
Rear seat stowage compartment net, removal and installation ...... 2-60 2-135
Rearview mirror adjustment.............................................................. 3-24 3-27
References, appendix A ....................................................................... A-1
Removal and installation of four man cargo area
soft top enclosure ............................................................................ 2-54.3 2-130.8
Removal and installation of four man crew area soft top
and artic soft top enclosures ............................................................ 2-54.2 2-130.4
Removal and installation of hatch stowage net ................................ 2-59 2-134
Change 6 Index 5
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX (Cont’d)
Para. Page
R (Cont’d)
Removal and installation of rear seat stowage compartment net ... 2-60 2-135
Removal and installation of stowage compartment net ................... 2-58 2-133
Removal and installation of S250 shelter carrier
rear suspension tiedown kit ............................................................. 2-55 2-130.10
Removal and installation of troop area soft top enclosures
(M1152, M1152A1) ............................................................................ 2-54.1 2-130.2
Removal and installation of two man crew area
soft top enclosure .............................................................................. 2-54 2-126
Reporting equipment improvement recommendations (EIR’s) ........ 1-5 1-2
Reservoir, servicing windshield washer............................................. 3-14 3-14
Runflat operation ................................................................................ 2-49 2-121
Runflat operation (table 2-4) .............................................................. 2-121
S
S250 shelter Carrier (M1113) ............................................................ 1-10 1-4
Scope of manual .................................................................................. 1-1 1-1
Seatbelt operation – improved personal restraint system .............. 2-18.1 2-74.1
Seatbelt operation – three point system ........................................... 2-18 2-74
Service brake system operation ......................................................... 1-23 1-25
Service data, general (table 1-3) ........................................................ 1-7
Service parking brake system operation ........................................... 1-22 1-24
Servicing batteries .............................................................................. 3-12 3-12
Servicing coolant surge tank .............................................................. 3-10 3-10
Servicing windshield washer reservoir ............................................. 3-14 3-14
Shallow water fording operation........................................................ 2-47 2-112
Slave starting operation ..................................................................... 2-23 2-79
Special instructions............................................................................. 2-39 2-104
Starting the engine ............................................................................. 2-12 2-62
Starting system operation .................................................................. 1-18 1-18
Steering control system operation
(Serial numbers 299999 and below) ................................................ 1-24 1-27
Steering control system operation
(Serial numbers 300000 and above) ................................................ 1-24.1 1-28.1
Steering system capacities (table 1-2.1) ............................................ 1-6.1
Stopping the vehicle and engine ........................................................ 2-14 2-68
Stowage and sign guide, appendix E ................................................. E-1
Stowage compartment net, removal and installation....................... 2-58 2-133
Stowage plan, M1113.......................................................................... F-4 F-10
Stowage plan, M1114 (MK19/40 mm)................................................ F-2 F-1
Stowage plan, M1114 (M2/.50cal) ...................................................... F-3 F-6
Surge tank, servicing coolant ............................................................. 3-10 3-10
Suspension system operation ............................................................. 1-25 1-29
S250 shelter carrier rear suspension tiedown kit,
removal and installation of .............................................................. 2-55 2-130.10
Index 6 Change 6
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX (Cont’d)
Para. Page
T
Tables:
1-1 Differences Between Models .............................................. 1-6
1-2 Capacities............................................................................ 1-6
1-2.1 Steering System Capacities ............................................... 1-6.1
1-3 General Service Data ......................................................... 1-7
1-4 Engine Data ........................................................................ 1-8
1-5 Cooling System Data .......................................................... 1-8
1-6 Transmission Data ............................................................. 1-8
1-7 Transfer Case Data ............................................................ 1-9
1-9 Maximum Vehicle Operating Speeds ................................ 1-10
1-9 Vehicle Dimensions ............................................................ 1-10
1-10 Vehicle Cruising Range ...................................................... 1-10
1-10.1 Vehicle Payload (Including Crew)...................................... 1-10.1
1-11 9,000 lb Winch Data ........................................................... 1-11
1-11.1 10,500 lb Winch Data ......................................................... 1-11
1-12 Curb Weight ........................................................................ 1-11
1-13 Vehicle Bridge Classification ............................................. 1-11
1-14 Axle Weight ......................................................................... 1-12
1-15 Tire Pressure (Radial Tire) (Load Range D Tire)............. 1-12.1
1-15.1 Tire Pressure (Radial Tire) (Load Range E Tire) ............. 1-12.1
2-1 General Cleaning Instructions .......................................... 2-26
2-2 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services ................. 2-29
2-3 Towing Operation ............................................................... 2-84
2-3.1 M1113/M1114 Vehicle Trailer Towing Requirements ...... 2-89
2-4 Runflat Operation............................................................... 2-121
3-1 Troubleshooting .................................................................. 3-3
3-2 Cleaning Compound -to- Water Ratio ............................... 3-14
G-1 Lubrication ................................................................................... G-3
Table of contents ................................................................................. i
Tabulated data .................................................................................... 1-12 1-6
Tailgate operation ............................................................................... 2-22 2-78
Technical bulletins, references ........................................................... A-6 A-2
Technical manuals, references .......................................................... A-5 A-2
Tire chain installation and removal .................................................. 3-22 3-24
Tire pressure (radial tires) (load range D tires) (table 1-15) ........... 1-12.1
Tire pressure (radial tires) (load range E tires) (table 1-15.1) ........ 1-12.1
TOW Gunner’s Protection Kit (T-GPK) in Preparation for Air Drop,
Removal and Installation ................................................................. 2-61 2-136
Towing operation................................................................................. 2-26 2-84
Trailer towing...................................................................................... 2-27 2-89
Towing operations (table 2-3) ............................................................. 2-84
Transfer case data (table 1-7) ............................................................ 1-9
Transmission data (table 1-6) ............................................................ 1-8
Transmission fluid, servicing ............................................................. 3-19 3-20
Troop/cargo winterization heater operating instructions ................ 2-50.1 2-122.2
Change 6 Index 7
TM 9-2320-387-10
INDEX (Cont’d)
Para. Page
T (Cont’d)
Troop seat kit operation (M1152, M1152A1) .................................... 2-53.1 2-125
Troop area soft top enclosures,
removal and installation (M1152, M1152A1).................................. 2-54.1 2.130.2
Troubleshooting (table 3-1) ................................................................ 3-3
Troubleshooting procedures ............................................................... 3-6 3-2
Turret brake operation ....................................................................... 2-33.4 2-98.10
Two-man crew area soft top enclosure, removal and
Installation of ................................................................................... 2-54 2-126
U
Umbilical power cable, 200-ampere ................................................... 1-26 1-31
Up-armored carrier (M1114) .............................................................. 1-11 1-4.1
Up-armored carriers w/supplement armor load plan
(M2/.50 cal), M1114........................................................................... F-3 F-6
Up-armored carriers w/supplement armor load plan
(MK19/40mm), M1114 ...................................................................... F-2 F-1
Up-armored weapon station operation (M1114) ............................... 2-33 2-98
V
Vehicle and engine, stopping the ....................................................... 2-14 2-68
Vehicle bridge classification (table 1-13) ........................................... 1-11
Vehicle cruising range (table 1-10) .................................................... 1-10.1
Vehicle dimensions (table 1-9)............................................................ 1-10
Vehicle light switch, operation of ....................................................... 2-15 2-70
Vehicle operating speeds, maximum (table 1-8)................................ 1-10
Vehicle payload (table 1-10.1) ............................................................ 1-10.1
Vehicular heater operation................................................................. 2-50 2-122
W
Warning Summery .............................................................................. warning a
Weight, axle (table 1-14) ..................................................................... 1-12
Weight, curb (table 1-12) .................................................................... 1-11
Wheel assembly replacement ............................................................. 3-25 3-28
Winch data, 10,500 lb (table 1-11.1) .................................................. 1-10.2
Winch data, 9,000 lb (table 1-11) ....................................................... 1-10.2
Winch operation, electric .................................................................... 2-28 2-90
Winch operation, hydraulic ................................................................ 2-28.1 2-92.2
Window cleaning, plastic .................................................................... 3-17 3-18
Windshield assembly operation ......................................................... 2-53 2-124
Windshield de-icer operation (M1114)............................................... 2-36 2-102
Windshield washer reservoir, servicing ............................................. 3-14 3-14
Windshield wiper/washer system operation...................................... 1-21 1-23
Index 8 Change 6
Byofdarc4thasaaualyafthakmy;
DENNIS J. REIMER
Gewmral,(msd~sArmy
C/l&fOfstan
AdrnihisbnUwAssistant to tha
.s8omtary
of tha Army
03071
ByDtderoftheSefetaryoftlwAirForce:
RDNALDR. FOGLEMAN
Gentnnf,LMedstKtes~~
cM8fofsel7
HENRY VICCELLID,JR.
-,lMtedulyed~AcFolw
commmdw,lwFmwM&erw-
DISTRIBUTION:
To ba distributed
in accordancewiththe initialdistribution
number
(IDN) 381018, ruquirements forTM 9-232WCi7-10.
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and DATE:
PUBLICATIONS AND BLANK FORMS Special Tools Lists (RPSTL) and Supply
For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent Catalogs/Supply Manuals (SC/SM). 14 Dec 01
agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) FROM: (Activity and location) (include ZIP code)
(include ZIP code)
AMSTA-LC-CI Tech Pubs, TACOM-RI Co. B, 1st BN, 2nd Brigade
1 Rock Island Arsenal Ft. Hood, TX 76445
Rock Island, IL 61299-7630
PART I - ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE
TM 9-2320-387-10 17 OCT 97 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
ITEM PAGE PARA- LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
NO. NO. GRAPH NO.* NO. NO. (Provide exact wording of recommended changes,
if possible).
1 2-47 2-5 2-2 Item 1 - Item reads break pedal (1).

Should read brake pedal (1).
2 2-47 2-5 2-2 Item 2 - Item reads lockpins (3).

Should read lockpins (1).
SAMPLE
*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.

TYPED NAME, GRADE, OR TITLE: TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, SIGNATURE:
PLUS EXTENSION:
Pat Smith, ILT AV272-4162 Pat Smith, ILT
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) FROM: (Activity and location) DATE:
(include ZIP code)
AMSTA-LC-CI Tech Pubs, TACOM-RI
1 Rock Island Arsenal
PA RT I I - R E PA I R PA RT S A N D S P E C I A L T O O L S L I S T S A N D S U P P LY C ATA L O G S / S U P P LY M A N U A L S
TOTAL NO.
OF MAJOR
PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL REFERENCE FIGURE ITEM ITEMS RECOMMENDED
NO. NO. NO. STOCK NUMBER NO. NO. NO. SUPPORTED ACTION
SAMPLE
PA RT I I I - R E M A R K S (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and
blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
TYPED NAME, GRADE, OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, SIGNATURE

PLUS EXTENSION
USAPPC V3.00
For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent Catalogs/Supply Manuals (SC/SM).
agency is ODISC4.
(include ZIP code)
PA RT I - A L L P U B L I C AT I O N S ( E X C E P T R P S T L A N D S C / S M ) A N D B L A N K F O R M S
TM 2320-387-10 17 OCT 97 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
if possible).

PLUS EXTENSION
(include ZIP code)
TOTAL NO.
OF MAJOR


PLUS EXTENSION
USAPPC V3.00
For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent Catalogs/Supply Manuals (SC/SM).
agency is ODISC4.
(include ZIP code)
PA RT I - A L L P U B L I C AT I O N S ( E X C E P T R P S T L A N D S C / S M ) A N D B L A N K F O R M S
TM 2320-387-10 17 OCT 97 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
if possible).

PLUS EXTENSION
(include ZIP code)
TOTAL NO.
OF MAJOR


PLUS EXTENSION
USAPPC V3.00
THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUIVALENTS
LINEAR MEASURE LIQUID MEASURE
1 Centimeter = 10 Millimeters = 0.01 Meters = 1 Milliliter = 0.001 Liters = 0.0338 Fluid Ounces
0.3937 Inches 1 Liter = 1,000 Milliliters = 33.82 Fluid Ounces
1 Meter = 100 Centimeters = 1,000 Millimeters = TEMPERATURE
39.37 Inches Degrees Fahrenheit (F) = °C • 9 ÷ 5 + 32
1 Kilometer = 1,000 Meters = 0.621 Miles Degrees Celsius (C) = °F - 32 • 5 ÷ 9
SQUARE MEASURE 212° Fahrenheit is equivalent to 100° Celsius
1 Sq Centimeter = 100 Sq Millimeters = 0.155 Sq Inches 89.96° Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2° Celsius
1 Sq Meter = 10,000 Sq Centimeters = 10.76 Sq Feet 32° Fahrenheit is equivalent to 0° Celsius
1 Sq Kilometer = 1,000,000 Sq Meters = 0.386 Sq Miles WEIGHTS
CUBIC MEASURE 1 Gram = 0.001 Kilograms = 1,000 Milligrams =
1 Cu Centimeter = 1,000 Cu Millimeters = 0.06 Cu Inches 0.035 Ounces
1 Cu Meter = 1,000,000 Cu Centimeters = 35.31 Cu Feet 1 Kilogram = 1,000 Grams = 2.2 Lb
1 Metric Ton = 1,000 Kilograms = 1 Megagram =
1.1 Short Tons
APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS
0
INCHES
CENTIMETERS
TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Millimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.400
1
Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.540
Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.305
Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.914
2
Miles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kilometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.609
Square Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Centimeters . . . . . . . . 6.451
1
Square Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.093

Square Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.836
Square Miles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Kilometers . . . . . . . . . 2.590 3
Acres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Hectometers . . . . . . . . 0.405
Cubic Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubic Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.028
4
Cubic Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubic Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.765

Fluid Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Milliliters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.573
Pints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.473
5
2
Quarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.946

Gallons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.785
Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.349
6
Pounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kilograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4536

Short Tons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metric Tons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.907
Pound-Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Newton-Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.356
7
Pounds Per Square Inch . . . . . Kilopascals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.895

Miles Per Gallon . . . . . . . . . . . Kilometers Per Liter . . . . . . . . 0.425
3
Miles Per Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . Kilometers Per Hour . . . . . . . . 1.609

8
TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
Millimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03937
Centimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3937
9
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.280

Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.094
Kilometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.621
10
Square Centimeters . . . . . . . . Square Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.155

4
Square Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.764

Square Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.196
11
Square Kilometers . . . . . . . . . Square Miles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.386

Square Hectometers . . . . . . . . Acres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.471
Cubic Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubic Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.315
12
Cubic Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubic Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.308

Milliliters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.034
Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113
5
13
Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.057

Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gallons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.264
Grams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.035
Kilograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2046
14
Metric Tons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short Tons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.102

Newton-Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . Pound-Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.738
Kilopascals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds Per Square Inch . . . . . 0.145
15
Kilometers Per Liter . . . . . . . . Miles Per Gallon . . . . . . . . . . . 2.354

6
Kilometers Per Hour . . . . . . . . Miles Per Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.621

PIN 075913-000
This fine document...
Was brought to you by me:
Liberated Manuals -- free army and government manuals
Why do I do it? I am tired of sleazy CD-ROM sellers, who take publicly

available information, slap “watermarks” and other junk on it, and sell it.
Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that
sell free information, come up first in search engines. They did not create it...
They did not even scan it... Why should they get your money? Why are not
letting you give those free manuals to your friends?
I am setting this document FREE. This document was made by the US

Government and is NOT protected by Copyright. Feel free to share,
republish, sell and so on.
I am not asking you for donations, fees or handouts. If you can, please
provide a link to liberatedmanuals.com, so that free manuals come up first in
search engines:
<A HREF=http://www.liberatedmanuals.com/>Free Military and Government Manuals</A>
– Sincerely
Igor Chudov
http://igor.chudov.com/
– Chicago Machinery Movers

HumveeTM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HumveeTM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HumveeTM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main safety warnings mentioned in the document?

What are the main safety warnings mentioned in the document?

What are some of the conversion factors provided in the document?

What are some of the conversion factors provided in the document?

ARMY TM 9-2320-387-10

AIR FORCE TO 36A12-1A-3061-1

TRUCK, UTILITY: S250 SHELTER CARRIER,

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY,

EXHAUST GASES CAN KILL

1. Do not operate your vehicle engine in enclosed areas.

2. Do not idle vehicle engine with windows closed.

3. Be alert at all times for exhaust odors.

4. Be alert for exhaust poisoning symptoms. They are:

5. If you see another person with exhaust poisoning symptoms:

• Remove person from area

*For artificial respiration, refer to FM 21-11.

6. BE AWARE, the field protective mask for Nuclear, Biological, or Chemical

THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST EXHAUST POISONING IS ADEQUATE

WARNING SUMMARY (Cont’d)

• Avoid using fire extinguisher in unventilated areas. Prolonged inhalation exposure

WARNING SUMMARY (Cont’d)

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.

By Order of the Secretary of the Air Force:

By Order of the Marine Corps:

To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN)

Marine Corps PCN 184 110330 06

TRUCK, UTILITY: UP-ARMORED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL

TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL

TM 9-2320-387-10, 17 October 1997, is changed as follows:

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.

By Order of the Secretary of the Air Force:

By Order of the Marine Corps:

To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN)

TRUCK, UTILITY: UP-ARMORED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: EXPANDED

TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL

TRUCK, UTILITY: COMMAND AND CONTROL/GENERAL

TM 9-2320-387-10, 17 October 1997, is changed as follows:

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.

By Order of the Secretary of the Air Force:

By Order of the Marine Corps:

To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN)

Remove pages Insert pages

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

2-59 through 2-62 2-59 through 2-62

By Order of the Secretary of the Air Force:

By Order of the Marine Corps: